IntroductionIntroduction| 00:00 | (Music playing.)
| | 00:03 | Hello! I'm Michael Ninness, a Product
Manager and Product Designer at Adobe.
| | 00:07 | In my role at Adobe, I get to spend a
lot of time with designers and one of the
| | 00:10 | questions I hear them ask over and over
is how can they apply their print design
| | 00:13 | skills to create digital
and interactive content.
| | 00:16 | Perhaps you are a traditional print
designer who struggled to learn how to use
| | 00:19 | Flash or have been frustrated with
the lack of typography in design to in
| | 00:22 | typical presentation software.
| | 00:24 | If so then this course, InDesign CS4
Interactive Documents and Presentations is for you.
| | 00:29 | We will use InDesign, by itself and
in conjunction with Acrobat and Flash
| | 00:32 | Professional to layout and design a
variety of digital documents including a
| | 00:37 | Slide Presentation, complete with
Navigation buttons, Slide Transitions and
| | 00:40 | Hyperlinks, an Interactive Movie board
or Style guide, an Interactive Digital
| | 00:45 | Portfolio that the viewer can turn the
pages of to see your work and a digital
| | 00:48 | magazine that includes animation and video.
| | 00:51 | Before you jump in and start the course,
you should know that the first chapter
| | 00:54 | is a bit different than
the rest of the chapters.
| | 00:56 | I'll begin by taking you through a
tour of digital publishing trends, showing
| | 00:59 | you real world examples of what kinds
of digital documents and experiences
| | 01:03 | designers and publishers are creating today.
| | 01:05 | Almost all the examples you will
see began their creation in InDesign.
| | 01:09 | These examples are meant to inspire you
and get you to think about the kinds of
| | 01:12 | documents you might want
to start creating yourself.
| | 01:15 | Note that if you just want to get to
the how to part of this course, then feel
| | 01:18 | free to skip chapter 1 or come back to
it when you are ready to take a break
| | 01:21 | from the step-by-step projects.
| | 01:23 | My goal for you is that by the end
of this course you have expanded your
| | 01:26 | document production capabilities beyond print.
| | 01:29 | Now, let's get started with InDesign CS4:
| | 01:31 | Interactive Documents and Presentations.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the exercise files| 00:00 | If you are a premium member of the Lynda.com
Online Training Library or if you
| | 00:03 | are watching this tutorial on a DVD-ROM,
then you have access to the exercise
| | 00:07 | files used throughout the
recording of this title.
| | 00:09 | You will find the Exercise Files on
your Desktop after you have downloaded them
| | 00:13 | or copied them from the DVD.
| | 00:14 | Inside that folder is any chapter
that actually has exercise files.
| | 00:19 | There is a folder corresponding to that chapter.
| | 00:21 | When you open up a chapter, you will see
typically there are Start and End files.
| | 00:25 | So, a Start would be the document in
the state at the very beginning of the
| | 00:29 | movie and then what it
should look like at the end.
| | 00:31 | So, the End files are provided for
you in case you get stuck or screw up a
| | 00:35 | document and want to compare
your results to the End document.
| | 00:38 | The other folder that you might find inside
a chapter folder is a Links or Media folder.
| | 00:44 | So, in the course of this title,
you are using InDesign quite a bit.
| | 00:47 | You might be placing graphics in an
existing document and those are going to be
| | 00:50 | located in the Links or Media folder in
the particular chapter folder for that
| | 00:55 | particular chapter you are working on.
| | 00:56 | If you are a monthly subscriber or an
annual subscriber to Lynda.com, you don't
| | 01:00 | have access to the exercise files,
but you can certainly follow along from
| | 01:03 | scratch or use your own assets.
| | 01:05 | Let's get started.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
1. Trends in Digital PublishingFrom print to web| 00:00 | There has been a lot of talk and
predictions about the death of print over the
| | 00:03 | past decade or so and there is no
denying that print publishing is facing
| | 00:06 | unprecedented challenges with the
primary change being the shift of advertising
| | 00:09 | dollars from print to online media.
| | 00:12 | Some newspapers and major markets
have seized their print publications, new
| | 00:15 | print magazine launches, are down
significantly and digital books seem to be
| | 00:18 | finally poised to become a viable
and accepted option by consumers.
| | 00:21 | That said, not everything is gloom
and doom for traditional publishers.
| | 00:24 | In fact, many companies that have more
from print only publishing, to publishing
| | 00:28 | across media or even holding their own
or even thriving and poised to come out
| | 00:32 | of the global economic turn
down strong in position for growth.
| | 00:35 | Meredith Corporation is one such
example of this print to web trend.
| | 00:39 | Now you may not have heard of Meredith
before but chances are you do know some
| | 00:42 | of their print magazine brands,
Better Homes and Gardens, Family Circle
| | 00:45 | magazine, Parents magazine
and more magazine to name a few.
| | 00:49 | Meredith started as a magazine
publisher but over time evolved into a media and
| | 00:54 | integrated marketing company primarily
providing content that reaches woman at
| | 00:57 | every stage of their life.
| | 00:59 | Meredith published their first
magazine Successful Farming in 1902, still in
| | 01:03 | print today with a circulation of over 440,000.
| | 01:05 | And launched Better Homes and Gardens
magazine in 1922 and it's grown into a
| | 01:10 | global brand which is ranked number 4
out of the top 100 magazines with the
| | 01:13 | largest circulation.
| | 01:14 | Today, Meredith publishes 23
subscription magazines, owns 12 TV stations and has
| | 01:19 | over 400 books in print
while operating 32 websites.
| | 01:22 | They started investing online in the
1919s and they launched interactive and
| | 01:26 | integrated marketing groups in 2000 to
start harnessing the benefits of the web
| | 01:29 | and expand their print brands online.
| | 01:31 | At the 2008 Digital Magazine Conference
in Berlin, rather than as a threat, the
| | 01:35 | Internet was described as a huge
opportunity for traditional print publishers,
| | 01:38 | because of the potential to reach and
extend their brands to new audiences.
| | 01:42 | In fact, it was mentioned that from
most print brands, the overlap between
| | 01:45 | customers who accessed magazine brands
via print and online was less than 20%.
| | 01:50 | This explains why some magazine
websites are actually branded differently than
| | 01:53 | their print counterparts.
| | 01:54 | For example, the website for Meredith's
first magazine, Successful Farming, is
| | 01:58 | actually agricultureonline.com.
| | 02:00 | In fact, if you enter
successfulfarming.com into your browser, you will be
| | 02:04 | redirected to agricultureonline.com.
| | 02:06 | This website serves a different purpose
than the print magazine but as you can
| | 02:09 | see the connection to the
print magazine is prominent.
| | 02:12 | At the 2009 FIPP World Magazine
Congress in London, the Meredith CEO told the
| | 02:16 | audience that they met their goal
to acquire the ten million new print
| | 02:19 | subscriptions they needed in 2008 to
sustain revenue growth, 35% or 3.5 million
| | 02:25 | of those new subscriptions were
acquired through their online properties at a
| | 02:28 | fraction of the cost of
traditional response card acquisitions.
| | 02:32 | The price to acquire a new subscriber
online was quoted as a $1.50 whereas the
| | 02:36 | prints acquisition cost $20.
| | 02:37 | That makes it pretty easy to see why
Meredith has to use the web as an opportunity.
| | 02:42 | In conclusion, asking if print
is dead is the wrong question.
| | 02:45 | The better question is how you create a
strong brand that attracts the audience
| | 02:48 | you wish to connect with.
| | 02:49 | For Meredith, their answer is to
deliver content whenever wherever and however
| | 02:53 | their audience wants to consume it.
| | 02:55 | Print continues to be a premium
product they offer customers, but is no
| | 02:58 | longer their only focus.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| From web to print| 00:00 | Probably it comes as no surprise
that it is now a requirement that any
| | 00:03 | traditional print publisher needs
to have an online presence as well.
| | 00:06 | I suppose then it makes it less a
trend more than it is just a necessity.
| | 00:09 | However, I'm noticing an interesting
trend that plays the model in reverse.
| | 00:12 | That is online publishers
are launching print magazines.
| | 00:15 | One of the distinct advantages the
Internet provides is that it is much easier
| | 00:18 | to build a database of
readers interested in your content.
| | 00:21 | Once you have successfully brought a
distinct group of people together online
| | 00:24 | around a particular topic, you now have
a much less risky platform to market a
| | 00:28 | premium print product too.
| | 00:29 | Here are a few examples of this trend.
| | 00:32 | The Knot is a website that actually
launched in 1997, they went public in
| | 00:36 | 2000, and they have actually went on to spawn
a variety of other websites that are related.
| | 00:41 | They actually describe themselves as
a leading life stage media company.
| | 00:44 | Notice they didn't call themselves a
print publisher, targeting couples,
| | 00:47 | planning their weddings
and future lives together.
| | 00:49 | So, they have got the knot for
people planning their wedding.
| | 00:53 | They have a sister website called The
Nest that's for people who have already
| | 00:56 | got married and are going to build their
happy home, and then they have recently
| | 00:59 | launched a third site called, The
Bump, for people expecting children.
| | 01:03 | They have a bunch of other
sister websites as well, weddings.com,
| | 01:05 | weddingchannel.com and so forth, and
you will notice here at the main page,
| | 01:09 | the banner at the top of the page of TheKnot.com,
they actually market a print product now.
| | 01:13 | They actually publish The
Knot Magazine twice a year.
| | 01:17 | It's one of those new inch-and-a-half
thick magazines that women buy to plan
| | 01:20 | their wedding, lots of photography
of that season's dresses and whatnot.
| | 01:24 | They also produce several regional
magazines for local wedding markets and so
| | 01:29 | forth and they have gotten into book
publishing as well and have a collection of
| | 01:32 | resources available for purchase.
| | 01:33 | The Nest has also started a print
magazine as well that you can subscribe to.
| | 01:38 | Again, they have got a great database
of unique visitors here coming to the
| | 01:43 | website that they can now market
these print products to and get print
| | 01:45 | subscriptions and extend their brand
beyond just the online audience into the
| | 01:50 | traditional news stand.
| | 01:51 | Another example is WebMD, many of
you know about this website webmd.com.
| | 01:56 | This was a relatively early entry
into the online space that quickly became
| | 02:00 | dominant in the health industry
and online health advice and whatnot.
| | 02:04 | They actually have launched a print
magazine as well, and you may not have seen
| | 02:08 | this on a newsstand.
| | 02:09 | Where do you think you will see WebMD Magazine?
| | 02:11 | You pause for a second for effect,
yes, in your doctor's office.
| | 02:14 | So, a terrific way for a website to extend
their brand to a captive audience, right.
| | 02:20 | What a better place to put a
magazine around health issues, to put in
| | 02:23 | the doctor's office.
| | 02:24 | So, it's a way to connect their
audience back to their website for the research
| | 02:27 | or for follow up and so forth.
| | 02:29 | Another example, it's a little bit
different than the first two that I showed
| | 02:33 | you, because the Lonely Planet, a few
of those who know about this company.
| | 02:36 | They didn't start as an online company.
| | 02:37 | They started as a book publisher,
travel guides, but they of course had to
| | 02:41 | launch a companion website for their
series of books when the Internet became
| | 02:45 | big, and they have sustained that.
| | 02:47 | It's quite a cool website.
| | 02:48 | But just recently in November, October
of 2008, they have actually launched a
| | 02:52 | print magazine now, and
there is a nice little video.
| | 02:54 | If you go to lonelyplanet.com/magazine
you can actually watch this little video
| | 02:58 | about why they have now started this magazine.
| | 03:00 | It's kind of a short little video that
kind of give you some insight as to this
| | 03:03 | has been something that they wanted
to do for a very long time and now they
| | 03:06 | actually have an opportunity to do that.
| | 03:07 | But again, they have a way to
extend their brand across all sorts of
| | 03:11 | different media types.
| | 03:12 | So, printed books, short guides, the
magazine for inspiration, the website to
| | 03:17 | continue the relationship between
trips and so forth. So, there it is.
| | 03:20 | Some examples of traditional online
companies that started out primarily being
| | 03:25 | web based now starting to actually
publish printed products for their customers.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Print plus digital: Newspapers| 00:00 | So one of the disturbing trends we are
seeing in digital publishing of course is
| | 00:03 | the demise of certain newspaper markets.
| | 00:05 | I live in Seattle and we just lost the
Seattle PI, Post-Intelligencer recently
| | 00:10 | but there is some interesting
developments going on, the digital space for
| | 00:14 | newspapers and we are starting to see
some experimentation, and one of the
| | 00:17 | examples here is The New York Times.
| | 00:18 | This is The New York Times website,
very vibrant website with all the news that
| | 00:22 | you would expect from the New York
Times paper edition, just online.
| | 00:25 | But they have recently launched a New
Times Reader, a separate application for
| | 00:30 | consuming their content.
| | 00:31 | So this is just the browser version of this.
| | 00:33 | If I scroll down to the very bottom
towards their page, they have a Services
| | 00:37 | section here, and there is a
link here to the Times Reader.
| | 00:39 | I am going to go ahead and click on
that and that will take you to a page that
| | 00:41 | kind of explains what the Times
Reader 2.0 project is all about.
| | 00:45 | This is a separate application rather
than consuming in Internet browser, this
| | 00:49 | is a standalone application
built on the Adobe Air platform.
| | 00:52 | You can download this for free
and get some access to the content.
| | 00:56 | Of course they are trying to promote a
subscription to the digital version of their paper.
| | 01:00 | I am going to switch back to their front
page, which we can see what the current
| | 01:04 | headlines are, scroll up to the top here.
| | 01:06 | So U.S. Relies More on Allies
in Questioning Terror Suspects.
| | 01:09 | And the second link here, I just
want you to pay attention to those two
| | 01:12 | links, because I'm going to actually switch to
the standalone application, the Times Reader.
| | 01:16 | And you'll see that the latest news,
they are really are just feeding the same
| | 01:20 | content from the website into the
standalone application as well here.
| | 01:24 | So there is those two stories.
| | 01:26 | So you might ask, well what's the
benefit of viewing The New York Times content
| | 01:30 | in a separate application?
| | 01:31 | Let's go and expand this app so it
takes up the whole screen, and we'll start
| | 01:35 | playing around with the reading
experience of this application.
| | 01:38 | First of all, it is a separate
application which means it's a dedicated reader
| | 01:41 | just for this particular publisher's
content but it's also got some interesting
| | 01:45 | usability and reading experience features.
| | 01:47 | So for instance, if I resize the application,
you will see the content relays itself out.
| | 01:52 | So now I've only got room here for two columns.
| | 01:54 | If I make it wide enough, I actually have
room for additional columns of information.
| | 01:59 | So there is some layout
logic built into the app here.
| | 02:02 | You can also change the type size.
| | 02:04 | So if you want your body copy to be larger,
you can go ahead and change that as well.
| | 02:08 | So I'll go back to Medium, and whatnot.
| | 02:11 | It's got some nice navigation features as well.
| | 02:12 | Now this is the version that's free.
| | 02:15 | So you will see that some of the
content is not available to me because I'm a
| | 02:18 | print subscriber to The New York Times.
| | 02:20 | If I was a print subscriber, the entire
set of content is available to you for
| | 02:26 | free as a part of your print subscription.
| | 02:28 | You have the option to subscribing to
just the digital version and not have to
| | 02:31 | deal with the print
version if you don't want to.
| | 02:33 | I believe their price right now is
about $15 a month for the digital version,
| | 02:37 | and if you want to subscribe to that
you have access to all that content.
| | 02:40 | But you do get enough free content here
to kind of get an understanding of the
| | 02:43 | user experience of the application here.
| | 02:45 | So for the free version, the Front
Page content is available, the Business
| | 02:49 | content is available, and what
everyone likes of course is the Crossword.
| | 02:53 | You have the digital version
of the crossword available.
| | 02:55 | The thing I find interesting is that
you can store up to the last seven days
| | 03:00 | issues in this offline reader.
| | 03:02 | So when you are connected, it
always is looking to download the latest
| | 03:06 | content that The New York Times is
pushing out but it stores the content here
| | 03:10 | up to seven days offline.
| | 03:12 | So if you want to get on an airplane,
or you don't have an Internet connection
| | 03:15 | for a while, you still have access to
your paper if you will, even when you are
| | 03:20 | not connected to the Internet.
| | 03:21 | So that's kind of cool.
| | 03:22 | In terms of navigating, so if I
actually click on a particular article here.
| | 03:25 | I'll just click on this one.
| | 03:26 | You can see it's got a nice reading
experience, very nice beautiful typography.
| | 03:31 | And I have got some navigational
buttons that I can use at the bottom of the
| | 03:34 | application, or I can just use my keyboard.
| | 03:36 | So if I use my down arrow, I can
actually go to the next page in the article.
| | 03:41 | You will see there is a pretty tasteful
insertion of text ads being fed in by Google.
| | 03:45 | And if I want to go to the next article
in this section, I use my right and left
| | 03:48 | arrow keys to go to the
previous article or the next article.
| | 03:51 | And I get a nice animated transition between.
| | 03:54 | If I want to again go through the
current article, I just hit my up and
| | 03:57 | down arrows to navigate within an
article and then right and left to go
| | 04:01 | within a particular section.
| | 04:02 | They actually have their nice
feature up here, to the Browse feature.
| | 04:05 | This actually zooms out and you get a little
nice size thumbnail of the current articles.
| | 04:10 | So you can just use your right arrows
here, or left arrow to scroll back and
| | 04:13 | forth within that particular section.
| | 04:15 | If I use my down arrow to go another
section, you will see that these are now
| | 04:19 | previews because this is a locked area.
| | 04:22 | So it actually says here, real tiny typing.
| | 04:24 | You may never be able to read that
but it says Subscription Preview.
| | 04:26 | If I were to click to zoom in on that
section, you get a little preview of the
| | 04:30 | headlines and short little summaries there.
| | 04:32 | But I wouldn't be able to click into
that content unless I was a paid subscriber.
| | 04:35 | So will this take off? Will we see other
papers using this kind of model? I don't know.
| | 04:40 | It's probably too early to tell, but
obviously the newspaper industry is looking
| | 04:43 | for different ways to monetize their content.
| | 04:45 | And The New York Times is going to have
a bold approach here to encourage you to
| | 04:49 | pay for a better reading experience
and a better access to the content.
| | 04:53 | So we'll see where this all goes in the
future but if I had take an opportunity
| | 04:57 | to kind of just show you what one paper
is doing, to try to reinvent themselves
| | 05:00 | and create a relationship between
their readership and their content and
| | 05:04 | encourage them to pay for the content.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Print plus digital: Magazines| 00:00 | Here is another trend that I think is
pretty interesting and kind of cool.
| | 00:03 | It's a way that print publishers are
using the Internet to compliment your print
| | 00:07 | subscription with digital versions.
| | 00:09 | This is a website called Coverleaf.
| | 00:11 | And it's got a small number
of participating titles here.
| | 00:14 | I think this is a little bit of
an experiment by the industry.
| | 00:16 | We'll see where this goes if it becomes popular.
| | 00:19 | But the idea here is if you are a print
subscriber to any of the participating
| | 00:23 | titles in this service, you get free
access as part of your print subscription
| | 00:27 | to all the digital versions
of that particular magazine.
| | 00:31 | The other advantage of this particular
website is it let's you browse and seek
| | 00:34 | out other magazines that
you might be interested in.
| | 00:36 | And of course, if you are not a
subscriber then they are going to try to get
| | 00:39 | you subscribe by giving you a preview
of the print magazine, by showing you a
| | 00:43 | print replica on screen.
| | 00:45 | So here is an example, here is I.D.
Magazine, a popular industrial designer
| | 00:49 | design magazine here.
| | 00:50 | And I don't have an active print
subscription here but I can preview the current issues.
| | 00:53 | So I'll click the look inside button,
and this will launch a digital viewer, if
| | 00:58 | you will, of the current issue here.
| | 01:00 | And you can scroll from page to page to
get an idea of what some of the content
| | 01:04 | looks like, see the table of contents.
| | 01:06 | At some point, they will let you know
that this is just a preview and they will
| | 01:09 | get you to try to subscribe or
purchase this individual issue here.
| | 01:12 | I will go ahead and close this box here
though, but this gives you a thumbnail
| | 01:15 | view of the current issue, and you can
scroll through there and get an idea of
| | 01:18 | what the content is about.
| | 01:19 | So they are kind of doing two things
here, they are promoting the current issue
| | 01:23 | and giving you a preview of that
and then getting you to buy it.
| | 01:26 | But also promoting the service that if
you are already a print subscriber, you
| | 01:30 | can do all sorts of interesting
things with the digital version.
| | 01:33 | You can search them.
| | 01:34 | You can create clippings of articles.
| | 01:36 | You can share those articles by
E-mailing them to other people.
| | 01:39 | So a nice way to augment
your current print subscription.
| | 01:43 | Another website that I find
pretty interesting, it's Maghound.
| | 01:46 | This is actually a site
that's powered by Time Inc.
| | 01:50 | So a pretty popular high
volume publisher of many titles.
| | 01:53 | But they are working with a lot of
other publishers as well to create a
| | 01:56 | subscription, subscription
service, kind of a double word there.
| | 01:59 | It's like a Netflix type of thing where
for a flat monthly rate you choose any
| | 02:05 | magazine you want, a certain number of
magazines of the available titles that
| | 02:09 | are participating here.
| | 02:10 | So you can see some of the
issues scrolling by there.
| | 02:13 | Let's go to How It Works for a flat fee.
| | 02:16 | I think their early entry model or
their lowest entry tier here is Tier 1.
| | 02:19 | It's three magazines titles for $4.95 a month.
| | 02:23 | You pick any three participating
magazines that are part of this program, and
| | 02:27 | these are not digital versions.
| | 02:28 | These are actually print versions that are
mailed to you as part of your subscription.
| | 02:32 | So you can actually see that you can go
up to five magazines or seven magazines
| | 02:36 | a month, and your cost goes
up a little bit each level.
| | 02:39 | And you can add even more and
pay a per-magazine title fee there.
| | 02:44 | This is a monthly service so any time you
can cancel or you can even swap out magazines.
| | 02:48 | So if you have a magazine for a couple
of months and decide that you don't want
| | 02:51 | that one anymore, you want to
swap it out with a different title.
| | 02:53 | They let you manage your account online.
| | 02:55 | You can just choose a different
title and start getting that magazine
| | 02:58 | So for those of you who actually do like
print and like receiving your magazines
| | 03:02 | in your mailbox and you'd like to
archive them and actually flip through the
| | 03:06 | physical paper there, this is kind of
an interesting hybrid here of using an
| | 03:10 | Internet based service to
manage your magazine subscriptions.
| | 03:14 | Pretty affordable as well, I mean this
is a lot cheaper than actually buying
| | 03:17 | individual cover issues off the
newsstand or even individual subscriptions to
| | 03:21 | individual magazines.
| | 03:22 | So again, we'll see does this grow
or does this become a popular trend.
| | 03:26 | And more magazines will participate or will
this be a fad and be gone in a year or two.
| | 03:31 | Don't really know but just an example
of some of the experimentation happening
| | 03:34 | in digital or hybrid publishing, kind
of combining the benefits of the web with
| | 03:39 | the beauty in convenience of print.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Digital print replicas| 00:00 | When publishers first start to
thinking about what it would mean to put their
| | 00:03 | publications online, they tend
to go about in one or two ways.
| | 00:06 | They would either create a companion
website, but end up losing a lot of the
| | 00:09 | original publication design in the
process or they opted to create digital
| | 00:12 | replicas of the print version, even
recreating the notion of page turning that's
| | 00:16 | part of the reading experience.
| | 00:17 | This trend continues today and it's
relatively cheap now, and an easy method for
| | 00:21 | distributing highly designed content.
| | 00:23 | There are now lots of digital page
flipping providers out there and I'm going to
| | 00:25 | walk you through a couple of
examples of those in just a moment.
| | 00:27 | What your looking at right now is a
Google Maps mashup of digital publications
| | 00:32 | that are being read online, right
now, in real-time or at least as I'm
| | 00:35 | recording this video.
| | 00:36 | These particular publications are
being hosted by one of these digital
| | 00:40 | publication providers.
| | 00:41 | It happens to be called Nxtbook Media.
| | 00:43 | And it's a fun way to see what's
being read right now across the world.
| | 00:46 | Nxtbooks work with consumer magazine
publishers, but also focuses on B2B
| | 00:52 | publications, and digital
marketing collateral and catalogs.
| | 00:54 | Now, if I click on any one of these
thumbnails, I'll be taken to the actual
| | 00:57 | digital version of this magazine.
| | 00:59 | You'll see it's really truly is just a
digital replica of the print version.
| | 01:02 | In fact most of these providers simply
start with the final PDF that was used
| | 01:06 | for the printed version, and just take
it through various conversion processes.
| | 01:09 | So let's go ahead and click
on this one, Colorado magazine.
| | 01:12 | This will launch the Nxtbook online
reader for this particular publication.
| | 01:17 | I can zoom in, I can zoom out, I can
pan around and see the full resolution.
| | 01:22 | Zoom back out and if I go to the corner,
I can click and get the page turning
| | 01:25 | experience and whatnot.
| | 01:27 | The various providers have different features.
| | 01:29 | They have their own interface for
flipping thought the document and so forth.
| | 01:32 | You'll see some of these have
hyperlinks to jump to that particular page.
| | 01:36 | This particular magazine is free, so
there was no Login screen that came up for
| | 01:40 | asking me to validate or whatever.
| | 01:42 | So, if this was a paid digital magazine,
it would ask you to validate that or
| | 01:46 | you would just get a preview experience.
| | 01:48 | If I go over to zinio.com, Zinio is
another provider that's been offering this
| | 01:52 | kind of service the longest.
| | 01:54 | They've spent a lot of energy
working with various publishers to create
| | 01:57 | a digital newsstand.
| | 01:59 | The idea being that you would purchase
digital subscriptions instead of print
| | 02:02 | subscriptions of your favorite magazines.
| | 02:04 | If nothing else, this provides a
convenient way to preview hundreds of different
| | 02:08 | magazines before actually purchasing.
| | 02:10 | So you can scroll through and see
the various publications that are
| | 02:12 | participating, and they've got it nicely
organized on the left so you can see it by category.
| | 02:17 | If I click on anyone these thumbnails
again, I can take into this one as a page
| | 02:21 | subscription so they just
give you a little thumbnail here.
| | 02:23 | But I can go ahead and
click to see a preview of that.
| | 02:26 | Zinio lets you preview any of
their participating magazines.
| | 02:29 | You get the opportunity to zoom in, I
think two or three times before it asks
| | 02:32 | you to start paying.
| | 02:33 | But they've got their own little reader here.
| | 02:36 | It's got different
features than the Nxtbook reader.
| | 02:38 | They have this nice little page
thumbnail slider here that gives you a preview
| | 02:41 | of each page before you actually
turn to it. It's kind of cool.
| | 02:43 | Of course, when you let go, it actually
navigates to that particular page, and
| | 02:47 | tells you how many zooms I have left.
| | 02:48 | I'm going to zoom in and see that
particular ad and pan it around. I can do that.
| | 02:52 | But basically the same concept.
| | 02:54 | Now, what's happening is you're actually
getting a lot of experimentation going on.
| | 02:57 | I think this trend is most likely
going to evolve beyond this simple digital
| | 03:01 | replica of the print version.
| | 03:02 | While the page flipping effect is kind
of a nice bridge to the analog version.
| | 03:06 | The web provides an opportunity to
completely redefine what a digital
| | 03:09 | publication could be.
| | 03:10 | In fact even within a single
publisher you can already see examples of
| | 03:13 | experimentation with adding rich
media, making the print replica more
| | 03:17 | interactive and so on.
| | 03:18 | For example, let's take a
look at Reader's Digest.
| | 03:20 | Reader's Digest happens to be the print
magazine with the largest circulation in the world.
| | 03:25 | It's number one in the circulation game here.
| | 03:28 | This is the US version of their website.
| | 03:30 | You can see right at the top they've
got the current issue up here, and they're
| | 03:33 | promoting the digital edition.
| | 03:35 | Now they're actually using Zinio
as their digital edition platform.
| | 03:38 | Go ahead and click on this link.
| | 03:40 | This takes us to something we just saw
a few seconds ago, that same experience
| | 03:44 | where you can add it to your cart and
actually subscribe to the digital version.
| | 03:47 | You can download that and
read it offline, and whatnot.
| | 03:50 | If I go ahead and click on the Preview,
again I'll be launched in to their
| | 03:52 | reader and I can start cycling
through and seeing the current issue.
| | 03:56 | Again, I have the little thumbnail
interface here for jumping to a particular page.
| | 04:00 | I am actually going to jump to a very
specific page here, page 191 because I
| | 04:03 | want to show you something.
| | 04:04 | This is their very popular Word Power article.
| | 04:07 | It's in every issue.
| | 04:08 | It's kind of a way to learn vocabulary.
| | 04:10 | And in the analog version, of course
you would pick a pen and you would circle
| | 04:14 | what you think the answer is and then
you would turn to a different page and
| | 04:16 | find out how many you got correct.
| | 04:18 | So this is an example of truly a
digital replica of the printed version.
| | 04:23 | The experience instead of reading on
paper, you are just reading in a browser.
| | 04:27 | Now if you see the UK version of the
Reader's Digest website, they have a tab
| | 04:32 | here for the digital magazine.
| | 04:33 | And we'll go ahead and click on that.
| | 04:35 | The UK version is actually using a
different digital provider that's called
| | 04:38 | Ceros and it competes with Nxtbook and Zinion.
| | 04:41 | I'm not endorsing any of these, just
kind of giving you an example of the
| | 04:43 | different players out there.
| | 04:45 | Here's the UK version of their current issue.
| | 04:47 | We're going to go ahead and click inside.
| | 04:49 | This actually takes you to what it
first appears to be another digital replica
| | 04:53 | of the print version but they've
actually taken a different approach here.
| | 04:56 | This is a digital sampler, and
they're still trying to get you to subscribe
| | 05:00 | either to the print
version or the digital version.
| | 05:03 | But they've kind of taken
a different slant on this.
| | 05:05 | Let's go ahead and zoom around.
| | 05:06 | You can see they've got a video welcome
here from the editor-in-chief, and they
| | 05:09 | have a different guided interface here.
| | 05:12 | They've got a lot of
interactivity and animations.
| | 05:14 | So it's not just the static content,
they're actually trying to make it more engaging.
| | 05:17 | I want to grow and just kind of
experiment here, and you can see here I've an
| | 05:21 | animated spread coming in,
and just kind of a nice way.
| | 05:24 | Now, here's what I want to show you.
| | 05:25 | Here is their Word Power,
the digital version of that.
| | 05:29 | But you can see that this isn't
just a picture of the actual form.
| | 05:32 | This is actually an
interactive version of Word Power.
| | 05:35 | So we can actually start
interacting with this and making our guess.
| | 05:38 | So, coalition, what is that?
| | 05:39 | That's a political alliance. Hey, look at that!
| | 05:41 | I got it right.
| | 05:41 | It colors it green.
| | 05:42 | It gives me the full definition.
| | 05:44 | Then I can go ahead and close that.
| | 05:46 | Oligarchy, what is that?
| | 05:47 | That's a rule by the few. Hey, look at me.
| | 05:49 | I've got some good word power.
| | 05:50 | It's giving me a score, and updating that.
| | 05:53 | So, hopefully you are starting to see
if you'd combine the beauty of print
| | 05:57 | design and print publication of
design with the benefits of interactive and
| | 06:01 | online media, you can actually start
getting a pretty compelling package here.
| | 06:05 | I personally think this is where
it's going to go in the future.
| | 06:08 | I'll go ahead and click the one that's wrong.
| | 06:09 | So a directive, that's a
location. Well, no it's not.
| | 06:12 | So it tells me that's wrong and I get it red.
| | 06:13 | It shows me what the correct answer is
and it gives me the full definition here.
| | 06:16 | So, there you have it, just kind of a brief
snapshot of these digital replica providers.
| | 06:21 | But also a hint about where it might
be headed in the future, and how to
| | 06:24 | actually make it more compelling,
and go beyond just a print version
| | 06:29 | being hosted online.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| User-generated content| 00:00 | The next trend I want to talk
about is user generated content.
| | 00:03 | Now this is kind of a buzzword.
| | 00:04 | It's part of the Web 2.0 thing.
| | 00:06 | But this notion of having the community
be involved in your content, and in some
| | 00:10 | cases actually being the
bulk of the published content.
| | 00:13 | The example I really find compelling here
is JPG magazine, if you have never seen this.
| | 00:17 | It's just jpgmag.com.
| | 00:19 | And this is a really interesting
publishing model where the community is very
| | 00:24 | involved in actually the final printed
version that shows up on the newsstand.
| | 00:29 | So the way it works is they pick a
theme or a series of a themes for
| | 00:32 | each particular issue.
| | 00:33 | They have current themes going on right on.
| | 00:36 | Let's go ahead and click on the Themes
link here, and the three themes that are
| | 00:39 | open for submissions are
Zen, House, and Fairly Tale.
| | 00:42 | Now the way it works is that you join
the JPG community here, and as a member
| | 00:47 | you can submit photographs against that theme,
whatever that theme means to you. So Zen.
| | 00:52 | Let's go ahead and click on one of
these and these are some of the current
| | 00:55 | submissions against that particular
theme from the jpgmag.com member community.
| | 01:00 | Now, what you get to do is vote on
these particular submissions and the idea
| | 01:05 | is that the photographs that get the most votes
end up in the printed version of the magazine.
| | 01:10 | Now, if I take a look at some of the
magazine issues here then you can actually
| | 01:13 | see all their backlogs, here is the
current issue and you can see thumbnails of
| | 01:17 | the previous versions here.
| | 01:18 | But the last issue, the main
theme of the magazine was Faith.
| | 01:22 | If we go ahead and click on this
little thumbnail, they kind of do something
| | 01:25 | really interesting, I kind of wish all
magazines that were promoting themselves
| | 01:28 | online would kind of have this type
thing instead of just a little static tiny
| | 01:32 | thumbnail of the cover of the current issue.
| | 01:34 | JPG actually let's you experience the
magazine a little bit and actually flips
| | 01:39 | through it to see what the content is all about.
| | 01:41 | I think that's a much more compelling
way to kind of communicate what your
| | 01:44 | magazine is all about.
| | 01:46 | So great kudos to them.
| | 01:47 | Now they actually take it one step
further, they actually let you download a
| | 01:51 | high resolution PDF of the magazine or
a portion of the magazine which you can
| | 01:55 | experience and get a larger resolution.
| | 01:57 | You can print on your inkjet printer if
you want, and it's kind of a nice way to
| | 02:00 | experience the content there.
| | 02:02 | Now, what I find interesting about
the model if you talk to a traditional
| | 02:05 | magazine publisher, they tell you that
a successful publication tends to sell
| | 02:10 | 50% of their print run right.
| | 02:12 | All right, so what does that mean?
| | 02:12 | That means 50% of what they print actually
ends up in landfills, are being recycled.
| | 02:17 | JPG is claiming that they are getting 80%
sell through of their printed issues,
| | 02:23 | and they attribute that to the fact
that the community is very involved in
| | 02:27 | creating this printed object that you
want to purchase and experience and have
| | 02:30 | an analogue touch and collectible, if you want.
| | 02:33 | Now, these are coffee table quality
print jobs with beautiful photography and
| | 02:37 | the community was very
involved in the creation of them.
| | 02:40 | So, is this a trend that we'll
see being introduced in other areas?
| | 02:44 | Perhaps, I don't know.
| | 02:45 | I just think this is one of the
compelling examples of how you can use the
| | 02:48 | community and involve them in the
creation of your publication and create
| | 02:52 | compelling content at the same time.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Self-publishing: Print| 00:00 | Annother trend that I think is
actually here to stay it's this notion of self
| | 00:03 | publishing and it's really kind of a
variant of The Long Tail theory in action.
| | 00:07 | For those of you who don't know what
The Long Tail theory is I highly encourage
| | 00:10 | you to go off on a tangent,
go Google The Long Tail.
| | 00:13 | You can see that is what I did here in
the search bar here and there will link
| | 00:16 | in your Google results that takes you
to the original article written by one of
| | 00:20 | the editors at Wired Magazine, Chris
Anderson and this is his original article
| | 00:24 | where he explains this phenomenon of
how the internet actually provides a vast
| | 00:29 | market for niche topics and the market
is actually hungry for content that goes
| | 00:34 | beyond just the top tittles or the
top content, as an example the average
| | 00:39 | Barnes& Noble carries 130000 Book titles
in their Brick and Motor Store and when
| | 00:43 | you look at amazon.com book sales
more than half of their sales come from
| | 00:47 | outside of the top 130000 titles.
| | 00:50 | So the markets for books not sold in
the average bookstore is larger than the
| | 00:53 | market for those that are.
| | 00:55 | What this mean is that you have this
opportunity to create an audience for your
| | 00:59 | niche content that may not make it in a
Brick and Motor Store, so to speak, but
| | 01:03 | you can still create an audience
and market your content to them.
| | 01:07 | So again take a look at this article
if you haven't seen it Chris Anderson
| | 01:10 | actually has a blog called the thelongtail.com.
| | 01:13 | So there is lots of links and useful
information on this particular web site as well.
| | 01:17 | He eventually wrote a book that took
on expanded view on its original article
| | 01:20 | and converted into a longer book form
called the Long Tail of course, he has an
| | 01:24 | update to the book called the Longer
Tail as you can take a look at that
| | 01:27 | available at amazon.com of course.
| | 01:29 | Back to the trend and
related to this is createspace.com.
| | 01:33 | It's an example of one of these self
publishing websites that have actually
| | 01:37 | sprung up around this theme or this trend.
| | 01:39 | CreateSpace is actually a subsidiary of
amazon.com and it lets you self publish
| | 01:44 | either a book content, written content,
music content or a video content and the
| | 01:49 | whole website is organized
around those three themes here.
| | 01:51 | If I click on the Author's link here,
you can see it takes you to a page were
| | 01:54 | it explains the whole process you can
create a print it on demand book for the
| | 01:58 | person who wants you buy your book
or if you want to sell your book as an
| | 02:01 | e-book through the Amazon Kindle store you
can go ahead and do that or do both actually.
| | 02:05 | You set the price and when someone
orders your book it gets printed digitally on
| | 02:09 | demand get shipped to the purchaser.
| | 02:12 | You get a piece of the revenue Amazon
of course gets piece of the revenue and
| | 02:15 | everybody wins, another example of a
self publishing web site and there is lots
| | 02:19 | of them here I'm just going to
highlighting two or three, lulu.com they have
| | 02:22 | gone beyond just quote books or
offering self publishing opportunities for
| | 02:27 | e-books, for calendars,
for cook books and so forth.
| | 02:29 | Again the idea is that you have got
your content, they provide a digital store
| | 02:33 | front where you can actually turn it
into a physical product or an electronic
| | 02:36 | product, set the price in there
is a revenue share model there.
| | 02:40 | Another example is blurb.
| | 02:41 | This is a website that I particularly
like because the quality of design is so
| | 02:44 | high. They tend to cater to the
creative professional which means that a
| | 02:48 | lot of the people creating books on
blurb or actually using professional tools,
| | 02:52 | and products like InDesign so to
speak, or Illustrator or whatnot
| | 02:55 | Again you set the price, either print
it on demanded you can buy them yourself
| | 02:59 | and sell them on your own or you can
make them available for purchase online as
| | 03:03 | well, giving example somebody's book, I
mean they tend to be Photo Books but a
| | 03:06 | lot of designers and agencies are
using them create custom portfolio books to
| | 03:11 | send to potential clients to get work
and they have got the nice flash based
| | 03:16 | kind of interactive preview of some of
these books, I'm just kind of clicking
| | 03:19 | through one of the samples and
eventually I'll click through and see this is
| | 03:22 | another photo book example.
| | 03:23 | I am kind of clicking real quickly
just so you can get an idea of what
| | 03:26 | these look like and again these are
just the digital previews of what the
| | 03:29 | printed would look like.
| | 03:31 | And they are printed on high quality
paper and they are nicely bound and they
| | 03:34 | are really gorgeous objects actually.
| | 03:36 | These are some examples of some photo books.
| | 03:38 | Some of the other examples
are architecture firms use them.
| | 03:42 | This is a really well
designed book for a design agency.
| | 03:46 | It's talking about their work their
philosophy and some of the samples of
| | 03:48 | their work as well.
| | 03:49 | So, just a real nice engaging way
to create self published content.
| | 03:54 | The other one I would
like to mention is MagCloud.
| | 03:56 | This is actually a self publishing
service for Niche Magazine content.
| | 04:01 | So if you want to create a digital
magazine that actually ends up getting
| | 04:05 | printed when someone purchases it,
again you set the price, they are digitally
| | 04:09 | printed on demand, MagCloud takes care
of the fulfillment and you guys share the
| | 04:13 | revenue between their service and
you being the author or the publisher.
| | 04:17 | Again these are all examples of self
publish magazines, I haven't seen any of
| | 04:20 | these before, so I'm not really sure
what they are all about, but let's click on
| | 04:23 | Film & Festivals when you click on
this thumbnail it will take you to about a
| | 04:27 | page where you can actually see the
price where you can actually buy the issue,
| | 04:30 | you can see the preview, you could see
the back issues here and when you click
| | 04:34 | on the Preview you get a way to actually
again kind of cycle through and see the
| | 04:37 | inside of the magazines you can
get an idea what it's all about.
| | 04:40 | So, just some examples of
the self publishing trend.
| | 04:43 | This one is more focused on using
online to drive awareness and promotion of a
| | 04:49 | physical print product that arrives in
your mailbox if you actually go ahead and
| | 04:52 | order these things, but I think you
are going to see this type of publishing
| | 04:56 | explode, and you will see lots of
different websites and services available here
| | 04:59 | as a way to propagate this
Long Tail theory in reality.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Self-publishing: Digital| 00:00 | In addition to the self print
publishing trend there is now an emerging self
| | 00:04 | digital publishing trend as well.
| | 00:06 | The idea being that you can take
advantage of all these digital documents you
| | 00:10 | have and share with others easily.
| | 00:12 | I'm going to cover three different
websites here that it kind of really
| | 00:14 | focused on the space.
| | 00:15 | They are all relatively new.
| | 00:17 | They have only been around for two years or so.
| | 00:19 | The first one is issuu.com and the
idea is that you can upload any digital
| | 00:24 | document to their service for free.
| | 00:26 | Now they have some services that they
want you to pay for as well, but there is
| | 00:29 | actually a ton of functionality and a
ton of interesting services here you can
| | 00:33 | actually get for free.
| | 00:35 | The idea is that you start
with any digital document.
| | 00:37 | In the most cases they are PDFs but
they support other file types as well, like
| | 00:40 | Word files or PowerPoint files of whatever.
| | 00:42 | You create an account and then
you can upload your documents.
| | 00:45 | Once they are hosted on their service
you can then link to them they can make
| | 00:49 | them part of your website, they have
some really great ways of presenting that
| | 00:52 | digital content back to your
particular viewers in really neat ways.
| | 00:56 | They also have pro service where they
act as a digital publisher and actually
| | 01:01 | have some analytics behind so you can
see what people are reading and so forth.
| | 01:04 | These are all examples of
documents that the community has uploaded.
| | 01:07 | There is a mixture of traditional
publishers experimenting with this model
| | 01:10 | on putting their content in, but the
majority of this content is done by individuals.
| | 01:14 | So here are some magazines or digital
documents that people have uploaded, I
| | 01:18 | don't know what any of these are, so
let's go ahead and click on brownbook Art
| | 01:21 | & Architecture and again what they do is they
create digital replica of that uploaded document.
| | 01:27 | They built this nice little thumbnail
navigation so you can browse and turn from
| | 01:30 | page to page that way.
| | 01:32 | They have the page turning effect there
that you can zoom and you can zoom out
| | 01:35 | and so forth and pan around
to see the larger version.
| | 01:37 | What's kind of nice here too is they
build in Web 2.0 features so people that
| | 01:42 | are reading this magazine or these are
some other magazines or other documents
| | 01:45 | that they are interacting with as well.
| | 01:47 | You can actually see statistics, so
what kind of use has this particular
| | 01:52 | publication got, has anybody comments
or the ratings, what other sites are
| | 01:56 | linking to this particular document.
| | 01:58 | Because again once it's in the issuu
system or any of these three example
| | 02:02 | systems that I'm talking about, it's a
digital document you can now link to and
| | 02:06 | including other parts of your websites.
| | 02:08 | If I got to Scribd, this is another
service they actually have the largest
| | 02:13 | number of visitors coming to their site.
| | 02:15 | They are claiming 60
million readers a month now.
| | 02:18 | Again it's the same model where you
upload your digital documents and now start
| | 02:22 | making them available to people.
| | 02:23 | They have actually just introduced an
interesting way to try to monetize this.
| | 02:27 | It's kind of like an Amazon play if you will.
| | 02:28 | Well they have introduced the Scribd
store where if you want you can actually
| | 02:33 | set a price for your digital document
and actually sell it, where then you could
| | 02:37 | download that and have
that document DRM Protected.
| | 02:40 | So Scribd is acting as a digital
storefront for the user generated content here.
| | 02:45 | The third example is
Docstoc and again similar model.
| | 02:49 | This is less about editorial magazines
so to speak this is any business type of
| | 02:54 | document as well, so there is a real
mixture of the type of content is available here.
| | 02:58 | What I find interesting about Docstoc
is they are actually providing a way for
| | 03:01 | you monetize your content in a different manner.
| | 03:03 | You can actually participate in
revenue share from advertising.
| | 03:07 | So when you put your document up into
their system here and you click on a
| | 03:11 | document to read it, there might be some
advertising displayed in either side or
| | 03:14 | at the bottom of that particular presentation.
| | 03:17 | If Docstoc actually gets advertising
revenue from those advertisements they will
| | 03:21 | actually share that revenue with
you for participating in their system.
| | 03:24 | So interesting examples of this
digital self publishing trend and three
| | 03:30 | different takes on it slightly
different experiences in different business
| | 03:33 | models there but I
encourage you to check these out.
| | 03:35 | You might just have some interesting
uses for the services and take advantage of
| | 03:40 | what they have to offer.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Digital catalogs| 00:00 | I don't know about you, but our
household certainly gets its fair share of
| | 00:03 | printed catalogs arriving
in our mailbox every day.
| | 00:06 | Catalog, we get quite frequently is
the IKEA catalog, they tend to ship a lot
| | 00:10 | of those worldwide.
| | 00:11 | One trend we're definitely seeing is the
emergence of digital versions of these catalogs.
| | 00:16 | Now I think right now, what we are
seeing is just similar to the digital replica
| | 00:20 | of the printed catalog original lining.
| | 00:23 | You are starting to see some
functionality added to the digital version.
| | 00:26 | So here is an example of the digital IKEA
catalog, where you can turn from page to page.
| | 00:30 | It gives you the page turning experience.
| | 00:32 | You get little preview of
the previous and last page.
| | 00:35 | You can navigate to a certain pages here.
| | 00:37 | What's interesting here is that their
digital version of the catalog really just
| | 00:40 | mirrors the analog version
with some additional features.
| | 00:43 | So if you want to send this
particular page to someone as an email
| | 00:46 | attachment, you can do that.
| | 00:47 | If you want to crop a particular
portion of the page and save it offline as a
| | 00:51 | file, if you want to do a collection
our images just to kind of get an idea for
| | 00:54 | what you might want to do for a
particular room in your house.
| | 00:57 | You download the whole publication as a digital
PDF, or just that one page. You can print it.
| | 01:02 | Of course you can click on the table of
contents here to get a floating window
| | 01:05 | showing up to see the other pages.
| | 01:07 | So you can see here is the Table of
Contents and you can scroll through and jump
| | 01:11 | to a particular page that you
want, jump to a particular section.
| | 01:15 | I just think that in over the time you
are going to see these getting much more
| | 01:18 | interactive as well, and you'll see
current prices and specials, and maybe a
| | 01:22 | room configurator and things like that.
| | 01:24 | They haven't done that yet.
| | 01:25 | You kind of get the idea that
might be where it's heading.
| | 01:28 | So digital catalogs take a notice of
them, I think you are going to see much
| | 01:31 | compelling examples in the future, but
there is definitely some advantages now
| | 01:35 | to distribute these online
and perhaps save some trees.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Digital magazines: iGIZMO and iMOTOR| 00:00 | In this video, I'm going to highlight a
particular innovative publisher out of UK.
| | 00:04 | It's called Dennis Publishing and they
are kind of interesting to note, because
| | 00:08 | they are publishing digital
magazines that are truly digital magazines.
| | 00:12 | They don't have a print version,
so it's not a digital print replica.
| | 00:17 | It's actually original content
designed for the medium from the get-go.
| | 00:21 | So they have two particular
digital magazines I'm going to highlight.
| | 00:22 | One is called iGIZMO.
| | 00:23 | It's a gadget technology digital publication.
| | 00:27 | The other one is iMOTOR for car
enthusiasts and the iGIZMO website is
| | 00:30 | igizmo.co.uk and here is a
thumbnail of the current issue.
| | 00:34 | I am actually going to
take you to the Sign Up tab.
| | 00:37 | That's where all their digital archives are.
| | 00:39 | So if we click on that link and scroll
down we can actually see the covers of
| | 00:43 | their last 31 issues.
| | 00:45 | They publish every two weeks and
I'm going to take a look at two of
| | 00:48 | these particular issues.
| | 00:49 | One of the most popular issues was
their Issue 25 Jobs versus Gates.
| | 00:53 | Go ahead and click.
| | 00:54 | These are actually been hosted by Ceros.
| | 00:57 | Another one of the digital magazine
vendors are Zinios and the Nxtbooks and
| | 01:01 | Texteritys and this one happens to be Ceros.
| | 01:03 | So here is the digital
magazine. Here is the cover.
| | 01:05 | What's particularly interesting to note
about these digital magazines that I'm
| | 01:09 | showing you is that they were
actually all laid out in InDesign first.
| | 01:13 | They use the workflow of using InDesign
to do all the design and typography and
| | 01:18 | layout, and then they hand off their
layouts over to Flash Professional using
| | 01:23 | some new features in the
InDesign CS4 to make that happen.
| | 01:26 | We'll get into some of that actually
later, but for now that's just kind of the
| | 01:30 | whole high-level overview of how
these actually are designed and created.
| | 01:34 | If we actually go in and take a look at
some of the content here, we'll go ahead
| | 01:37 | and just click the Page button.
| | 01:38 | This is their Table to Contents, and you
can see these are all interactive links.
| | 01:42 | They've got usually a
Welcome video from the Editor Ross.
| | 01:45 | I'm going to take a look
at the Amazon Kindle here.
| | 01:52 | I'll go ahead and turn the audio off.
| | 01:54 | But it just gives you an
idea of what's in the issue.
| | 01:57 | You can pause the video.
| | 01:59 | Here is your Table to Contents.
| | 02:00 | Let's go and take a look at the Jobs versus
Gates article, because it's kind of a fun thing.
| | 02:05 | This is actually a game within the magazine.
| | 02:08 | So if we go ahead and click on there,
there is the spread, and once the intro is
| | 02:12 | here, we can actually go ahead and Race.
| | 02:13 | So you choose your person if
you want Bill Gates or Steve Jobs.
| | 02:16 | Let's go ahead and be Bill Gates here.
| | 02:19 | It gives you some keys there, some
instructions, and A moves him left, S -
| | 02:24 | D moves it right.
| | 02:27 | It's kind of funny.
| | 02:27 | If he goes over the Windows
logo, he actually goes faster.
| | 02:30 | If he goes over the Mac logo, he gets slower.
| | 02:34 | Anyway, it's a pretty popular issue.
| | 02:37 | Let's go ahead and go back
to the main content page.
| | 02:39 | Just to give you an idea of what you
can actually do with the digital magazine.
| | 02:44 | So you have rich interactivity available to you.
| | 02:49 | They have some regular columns and
there are news column, and so it's going on
| | 02:52 | if you are on the last two issues.
| | 02:54 | Similar articles here again,
some video intros there.
| | 02:57 | We'll just go ahead and do the page turn here.
| | 02:59 | You can see they have an
interactive advertising as well.
| | 03:03 | Little bit tough to record this, as this
stuff is going on, but you guys the get the idea.
| | 03:09 | You can experience this on your own and I
want to take you to a couple of other pages here.
| | 03:13 | The Five to Try is kind of nice where
again this is an example of how they can
| | 03:18 | leverage interactive so rather than
being links to other pages, they can
| | 03:22 | actually have this content swap out
on the current page, and they do this
| | 03:26 | every issue to Five to Try, just
highlighting some five new gadgets that came
| | 03:30 | out in between issues.
| | 03:31 | What's nice for advertisers is that
the viewer on this particular page is
| | 03:34 | staying on the page, as
they engage with this content.
| | 03:37 | So they can see the advertisement on
the left here, still present, just kind of
| | 03:41 | a nice way to engage them.
| | 03:43 | So this is kind of an
example of their GIZMO product.
| | 03:45 | iGIZMO, iMOTOR is another example, again
published by Dennis Publisher on the UK.
| | 03:51 | This is their archive page.
| | 03:53 | You can see all of the
covers of their current issues.
| | 03:55 | I go ahead and click on their last issue,
and again this launches their digital
| | 03:59 | reader that doesn't have a
print version associated with it.
| | 04:02 | It's just a digital magazine, and again
they have got nice user interactivity.
| | 04:07 | Go ahead and see what the contents are.
| | 04:08 | See if there is a particular car
you want to read about, I'm sure.
| | 04:11 | Let's read about the new BMW X5.
| | 04:13 | Go ahead and click on that and
some interactive options come up.
| | 04:16 | So you can rate it, you can interact
and see some hot spots, and get some
| | 04:21 | additional content when
you click on the hot spot.
| | 04:23 | Let's click on that one.
| | 04:24 | We get the steering column view.
| | 04:27 | Over here we get the view of the engine,
and I'm not sure what's going on there,
| | 04:31 | but click now for the BMW X5
or you can change the color.
| | 04:35 | That's going to cool, and so forth.
| | 04:37 | You can play a video on that if you want.
| | 04:38 | This will slide out and give you an
overview of what the car is all about.
| | 04:44 | I'll go ahead and pause that.
| | 04:45 | So again nice use of the traditional
design of a printed magazine by combining
| | 04:51 | rich media and interactivity to
make a compelling reading experience.
| | 04:54 | They are actually just seem quite a bit
of success, their circulation rates are
| | 04:57 | pretty impressive for being such young
magazines, and I think this is a trend
| | 05:01 | that we'll pay attention to and see if
other publishers start doing content like this.
| | 05:06 | So that's Dennis Publishing
of the UK, iGIZMO, iMOTOR.
| | 05:09 | What's also interesting about
these is these are free, they are all
| | 05:12 | advertising supported.
| | 05:13 | You just go to the website
and get the current issue.
| | 05:15 | If you sign up of course you will get
an email telling you that the current
| | 05:17 | issue is available, and so an interesting model.
| | 05:19 | Let's see where it goes in the future.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Digital magazines: VIVmag| 00:00 | This is another example
of a digital only magazine.
| | 00:03 | There is no print version of this publication.
| | 00:06 | It's slightly different than the
iMotor or iGizmo model where those were
| | 00:09 | free advertising based.
| | 00:11 | This is a paid digital subscription to VIVmag.
| | 00:15 | Its platform is Zinio.
| | 00:16 | That's the digital magazine publishing
platform that VIVmag is delivered on.
| | 00:20 | VIVmag was started, the first
issue was published in August 2006.
| | 00:23 | It's published every two months and
it's a fashion, beauty and wellness travel
| | 00:27 | etcetera magazine for women 30 and
above and let's just go ahead and launch it.
| | 00:32 | So, I have actually got a subscription
of this just to kind of play around with
| | 00:34 | it and see what they are doing.
| | 00:36 | They are doing a lot to kind of
push what a digital magazine can be.
| | 00:39 | Let's go ahead and click on the current issue.
| | 00:41 | They have the ability to read the
issue online but they also have an offline
| | 00:45 | viewer as well so you can download
the issues and read them offline.
| | 00:48 | You don't have to be connected to the Internet.
| | 00:49 | This is just their online version of
their reader and actually if you pause for
| | 00:53 | a second you will see that
Navigation bar at the top actually fades out.
| | 00:56 | So it's just, I mean you can really focus
on the content when you are not navigating.
| | 00:59 | You move your mouse, it comes back temporarily.
| | 01:00 | Again, I have got that thumbnail nav
bar at the bottom so you can scan through
| | 01:04 | the magazine and jump to a particular
page that you want to jump to or you can
| | 01:08 | just click through it a page at a time.
| | 01:10 | I am going to go ahead and go to the
corner here and just edge and there is a
| | 01:13 | full screen ad, go ahead and click,
there is the table of contents and all these
| | 01:16 | of course are hyperlinks.
| | 01:17 | I'm going to jump to this particular
article, I think it's really nice of use of
| | 01:21 | animation, so you can see that on
this particular opening spread the model
| | 01:26 | shifts position, every once in a
while and there is some rollover hot spots
| | 01:29 | where you can get more information
about what she is wearing, so let's go ahead
| | 01:32 | and click on this little hot spot here
and you get an overlay of the purse that
| | 01:36 | she is holding and the ring, and it
gives you information about where it can be
| | 01:40 | bought and how much it's
for sale and stuff like that.
| | 01:42 | If you go to the next page, they do a
really nice job of having this kind of
| | 01:46 | engaging intro where it fades from
a line-art drawing into you know the
| | 01:50 | photograph and again you have got the
rollover hot spots to find out more about
| | 01:54 | what this model is particularly wearing,
there is the necklace and so forth.
| | 01:58 | There is information about the shoes.
| | 02:00 | So, a really nice use of photography
and layout and interaction design and so
| | 02:05 | forth and you can click and there is
another version of that particular article,
| | 02:08 | again where you get that nice fade.
| | 02:10 | We scroll through and kind of take a
look at some of the other content here.
| | 02:14 | Let's go to this particular article.
| | 02:16 | Anything that's interactive they
actually use this Vivify Moniker as of where
| | 02:20 | they kind of indicate that and you
can just click on that cycle through the
| | 02:23 | various interactive content.
| | 02:25 | Now, what's interesting about this
particular model is the advertisers again
| | 02:29 | love this because you are interacting
with the editorial content on the magazine
| | 02:33 | here but you are not
shifting to a different page.
| | 02:36 | So, the ad impression actually lasts a
lot longer for the viewer, the longer
| | 02:41 | they stay on this particular page, the
longer they actually see or expose to
| | 02:45 | this particular article.
| | 02:46 | Now, the article itself is interactive
as well and the advertising that they
| | 02:50 | have in the VIVmag varies on the level
of interactivity and this is probably
| | 02:54 | going to be a link to another website,
so I'm not going to click on that right
| | 02:56 | now to take us out of the magazine.
| | 02:58 | But there is other examples of
interactive magazines as well.
| | 03:01 | Here is a full-page ad for a resort on
a very nice island and it's got a Vivify
| | 03:07 | logo here too, when I go ahead and click
on that you see it's got an audio track
| | 03:14 | and it's a little slide show.
| | 03:20 | The idea being that you have got
this interacting on the ad as well.
| | 03:24 | The advertisers like this because we
have kind of been trained ourselves to blur
| | 03:28 | out the lines of web,
typical web banner advertising.
| | 03:31 | A lot of the time, we don't even see
those banner ads at the top or left or
| | 03:34 | right anymore, so here you have
got this nice traditional model of
| | 03:38 | page-flipping advertising right.
| | 03:40 | You know like in a printed magazine.
| | 03:41 | You get that impression but you are
combining the benefits of online as well
| | 03:45 | because you can add interactivity and
animation and video and create more than
| | 03:49 | just a static version of that particular ad.
| | 03:52 | There is another article, I kind of
want to show you, where they are actually
| | 03:54 | showing Yoga moves, I'll
just kind of flip through this.
| | 03:58 | Well, here is another one
that's kind of interesting too.
| | 04:00 | So, here you can interact with the
actual model, again you can see what shades,
| | 04:04 | what kind of sunglasses should she wear
with whatever swimsuit styles and click
| | 04:08 | on a different swimsuit and change the glasses.
| | 04:11 | So again, you are getting the reader to
interact with the content more and there
| | 04:16 | you have the full-page ad to the right.
| | 04:17 | So, it keeps them engaged while they
still have exposure to the advertising.
| | 04:21 | But the content itself is
engaging as well and interactive.
| | 04:25 | It's not just you know
side-by-side, next to ads.
| | 04:29 | So, here you can see different fashion
and different vendors and so forth and
| | 04:33 | click through that particular content.
| | 04:35 | So this is another example of interactive ad.
| | 04:38 | We'll go to the Claudia.
| | 04:39 | I'm not sure, how you say
that last name but Ciuti version.
| | 04:42 | Here, if I click on this, there will
be a video of the designer actually
| | 04:46 | explaining, her whole design process
and what's important to her and her
| | 04:52 | shoe brand and whatnot.
| | 04:53 | So, there's lots to kind of see in this
particular magazine, that they do a lot
| | 04:56 | of work to get you to engage and stay
with the content more and I think this is
| | 05:03 | going to be something that you are
going to see a lot more of in the future and
| | 05:06 | again they are using InDesign to do all
their layout and all their typography of
| | 05:09 | each of their spreads and then they
hand off that content over to their Flash
| | 05:13 | developer or the Flash designer to add
the complex interactivity to create the
| | 05:17 | final combined piece here.
| | 05:19 | Just looking through another
particular article here, just as an example
| | 05:23 | here they have got different
interactivity here, where you can change the
| | 05:26 | section, this is a particular
article about different iPhone applications
| | 05:30 | for fitness relative for women.
| | 05:31 | So, you can kind of get an idea of that.
| | 05:34 | So, you can actually get a free
subscription or a free sample issue of this you
| | 05:37 | want to play with this yourself.
| | 05:38 | If you just go out the typical website
on zinio.com and look for VIVmag, you
| | 05:42 | will just get the typical.
| | 05:43 | You can only see three pages or so.
| | 05:45 | You can actually follow the link to get
a sample issue, not necessarily because
| | 05:48 | you are interested in the content but
because you might be interested to see
| | 05:51 | how they are executing.
| | 05:52 | So, again here is another
version of an interactive ad.
| | 05:55 | You know publishers like this because
behind the scenes and advertisers as well,
| | 05:59 | they provide analytics.
| | 06:00 | You know they can actually see which
pages got clicked on, which parts of the
| | 06:04 | page got clicked on, on this
particular ad here, did someone look at that
| | 06:08 | particular dress longer than this
particular dress and which dress got the most
| | 06:12 | clicks, all that type of analytic
information that's pretty tough to get it from
| | 06:16 | a printed version of a magazine.
| | 06:17 | So again, combining the benefits of
beautiful called print design with the
| | 06:22 | benefits and power of the
interaction provided by online content.
| | 06:26 | So, well compelling example of
what a digital magazine can be.
| | 06:29 | It's VIVmag published and hosted by Zinio.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Digital magazines: FLYP| 00:00 | There is one more example of a "Digital
Magazine" that I would like to highlight.
| | 00:04 | It's called FLYP.
| | 00:06 | It's flypmedia.com.
| | 00:07 | You can see it right in there.
| | 00:08 | It says more than magazine.
| | 00:10 | What I would like to call out about
this particular example is that they have
| | 00:14 | not gone the route of having this
wrapper, this reader, that kind of sets as a
| | 00:19 | separate application or a separate
experience within particular website, so for
| | 00:24 | them, the content is their website.
| | 00:26 | So here it says flypmedia.com,
their articles are on this carousel
| | 00:33 | type interface here.
| | 00:34 | You can kind of cycle through and see
which article you want to experience.
| | 00:38 | They publish every two weeks and again,
this is all done in with a combination
| | 00:43 | of InDesign in Flash.
| | 00:44 | So, all the articles that you are
going to see or the example article that I
| | 00:47 | click on, let me go ahead and click on
this article here, all the layout and
| | 00:50 | typography and image
stuff is laid out in InDesign.
| | 00:54 | We will go ahead and enter that
particular article and this opens up in a
| | 00:58 | full-screen experience here.
| | 00:59 | So again, just minimal chrome or user
interface elements around and just real
| | 01:05 | nice focus on the content.
| | 01:06 | So, the layout is done in InDesign and
then the layouts are taken over to Flash
| | 01:10 | Professional where the video is
added or animation is added and so forth.
| | 01:14 | To go from page-to-page we'll just
click on the arrows here and again, I'll do
| | 01:18 | the page-flip thing as well.
| | 01:20 | But again, they are designing for the medium.
| | 01:21 | So, it's a not a print magazine
that's been shoved on to a screen.
| | 01:25 | It's been laid out in a horizontal
manner through using larger typefaces,
| | 01:29 | so that it can be read on screen and they make
use of conventions that are available to you.
| | 01:34 | So like for instance here if you
want to read more, rather than having a
| | 01:36 | scrolling text box and forcing you to
read to scroll through that content, you
| | 01:40 | have the option to read more and then
another document, another window, comes
| | 01:44 | open where you can continue reading,
and when you are done with that you can
| | 01:47 | close that and be back to the main article.
| | 01:49 | So it's kind of like a sidebar.
| | 01:51 | A different take on a sidebar.
| | 01:52 | Go ahead and go to the next page
here and you can see we have got some
| | 01:56 | integrated video here.
| | 01:57 | What I like about this particular
example is that they don't necessarily just
| | 02:01 | automatically start playing the video.
| | 02:02 | That can be sometimes distracting.
| | 02:04 | It also makes it easier to record a
video about this, so that I don't see the
| | 02:08 | conflict of the video stream going on.
| | 02:10 | But if I want to engage with that video,
I've obviously got an easy way to do that.
| | 02:13 | Go ahead and click that.
| | 02:14 | I get slide out video player coming
and in a few seconds the video will start
| | 02:18 | playing, we'll go ahead and close that.
| | 02:20 | You guys get the idea.
| | 02:22 | And again, when we continue to
navigate through the page and I have got
| | 02:25 | traditional web links with inside the
text as well and again nicely formatted
| | 02:29 | for on-screen reading,
beautiful typography and photography.
| | 02:33 | This is a nice use of interactivity,
so this is an article about you know
| | 02:37 | ultra small houses, so here is an
interactive floor map where you can click on
| | 02:41 | it to kind of get a larger
photograph of that particular section of this
| | 02:45 | little small house.
| | 02:47 | And again, just really nice use of
layout combined with interactivity, we'll
| | 02:52 | go to the next page here and again, we have
got some integrated video, and you get the idea.
| | 02:57 | So, here is kind of a nice info
graphic, how many tiny houses can fit into
| | 03:01 | the average US home.
| | 03:02 | You click on that and you get a nice
visual where you collapse it back down.
| | 03:05 | Again, I didn't have to take the
reader to a different page to do that.
| | 03:09 | It's all integrated right in there
and I'm going to get a full-screen video
| | 03:11 | here, if I want to play that video
as well, where he is going to take you
| | 03:15 | through the house and kind of give you a
virtual tour so to speak. So flypmedia.com.
| | 03:21 | Another interesting use case of
taking traditional design products like
| | 03:26 | InDesign coupled with Flash to create
these really interactive beautifully
| | 03:30 | designed digital magazines.
| | 03:32 | We'll see other sites like this,
other magazine publishers doing this.
| | 03:35 | I'm not sure, but it's certainly an
interesting trend to pay attention to and
| | 03:38 | see where it all goes.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Digital portfolios: Studio Q| 00:00 | This is an interesting
example of a digital portfolio.
| | 00:03 | Now what makes this kind of
interesting is that it was actually done in
| | 00:07 | InDesign, created in InDesign
and exported out as a Flash file.
| | 00:10 | The designer that actually did this his
name is Tomasz, and here is his contact
| | 00:13 | information there in left.
| | 00:14 | He is a designer out of Poland, and he
was actually in InDesign CS4 prerelease
| | 00:20 | beta tester here, and he was really
interested in creating a nice interactive
| | 00:26 | portfolio showcasing his work to show
to future clients and potential clients.
| | 00:30 | Problem is that he had a rich history
in traditional print design, but didn't
| | 00:35 | have a lot of experience using Flash.
| | 00:37 | So he wanted to know if there was
an easy way to create and layout his
| | 00:42 | portfolio, and export as a Flash file out
of InDesign, and of course there now is.
| | 00:46 | So this is an example of
what he brought together.
| | 00:48 | He actually has a sort of spiral
bound look, which is kind of cool.
| | 00:51 | He has got the
interactive page curl feature here.
| | 00:54 | We'll go ahead click-and-drag to turn the page.
| | 00:57 | You can see here real nice
typography and layout showcasing of his work.
| | 01:01 | You can also use your arrow keys here.
| | 01:03 | So if I use my right arrow keys to
turn the page, it does the page turn
| | 01:06 | transition, left arrow key to turn
the page for the previous section there.
| | 01:11 | Then if you mouse over the Q here.
| | 01:13 | You actually get a rollover button, and
when you click it, it actually takes you
| | 01:16 | back and closes the book back to the
cover and you get the contact information.
| | 01:20 | So a real quick easy way to do a
digital portfolio using InDesign.
| | 01:24 | I'm actually going to walk you through
the production of this project in another
| | 01:28 | chapter in this title later on, but
this is just kind of an example of what you
| | 01:32 | can kind of do with this feature set
to create an interactive or digital
| | 01:35 | portfolio for your design website.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
2. Setting Up InDesign for Designing Digital DocumentsCustomizing the workspace| 00:00 | We are taking a look here at InDesign,
the way it appears out of the box, the
| | 00:03 | default configuration.
| | 00:06 | We are going to go ahead and get a
custom workspace setup for the rest of the
| | 00:09 | chapters in this course.
| | 00:11 | I tend to like a particular
workspace when I'm working with interactive
| | 00:14 | documents or digital documents.
| | 00:16 | So we are going to configure things.
| | 00:17 | The default workspace is set to
Essentials and the Application Frame is not
| | 00:21 | turned on by default, so
we're going to choose that first.
| | 00:24 | Under the Window menu, we are going to
turn on Application Frame, and that just
| | 00:28 | puts InDesign in this self-contained Window.
| | 00:30 | Some people like it.
| | 00:31 | Some people don't tend to like it.
| | 00:33 | So I'm going to use it for
the recording of this title.
| | 00:36 | Once the Application Frame is turned on
we are going to expand the application
| | 00:39 | to fill up the screen.
| | 00:41 | The default workspace as I said is
Essentials, not a very effective workspace
| | 00:44 | for digital documents, because it
turns off a lot of features actually.
| | 00:48 | A lot of menu commands are turned off.
| | 00:49 | Some panels are hidden.
| | 00:51 | So we are going to switch it
from Essentials to Advanced.
| | 00:53 | And what that's going do is going to
turn on all the menu commands, so you can
| | 00:57 | see Show Full Menus is grayed out,
because they're already all turned on.
| | 01:01 | Our panel Dock on the right
has a few more options on it.
| | 01:04 | We are going to go ahead and expand the
panel Dock, so we actually see the panels.
| | 01:08 | Now we are going start reconfiguring
these panels on the screen a little bit.
| | 01:12 | Okay, first I want to put Layers on the top.
| | 01:15 | So I'm going to move that and
dock it above Pages and Links.
| | 01:19 | I'm going to go make Pages be
the active panel in this group.
| | 01:21 | I'm going to go ahead and collapse
Layers down, so it's available to me when I
| | 01:24 | need it, for the Pages panel itself.
| | 01:26 | I'm going to go to Panel Options, and I
want the pages not be shown vertically.
| | 01:31 | And I want to see thumbnails, and I
want the thumbnails to be enlarge.
| | 01:35 | For the masters, I'm going to have
them be Extra Small, and I'm not going to
| | 01:38 | show them vertically, I want to
show them horizontally as well.
| | 01:41 | And I'm going to turn off
Transparency and Spread Rotation for Icons, but
| | 01:45 | leave Page Transitions.
| | 01:46 | So any panel options that you do to
customize any of the panels inside InDesign,
| | 01:51 | those actually get saved as
part of a workspace as well.
| | 01:54 | So we are going to save this and
create a custom workspace, in a few moments
| | 01:57 | when we are done customizing it.
| | 01:59 | And all these choices we make to the panels
will get captured as part of that workspace.
| | 02:03 | Okay, we are going to keep Stroke.
| | 02:05 | We are going to keep Swatches.
| | 02:06 | I don't need Gradient in here, so I'm
going to pull that out, and then close it.
| | 02:11 | And I'm going to pull out Effects.
| | 02:12 | So we're going to keep that in the workspace,
and I'm going to pull out Object Styles.
| | 02:16 | Now I want Object Styles to open in a
particular location, so I'm going to put
| | 02:20 | it here, so that when I do open it
manually, I know where to expect it.
| | 02:24 | I'm going to go ahead and put
the Object Styles panel there.
| | 02:27 | And there is the Stroke panel, same thing
with Paragraph Styles and Character Styles.
| | 02:31 | I'm going to float Paragraph Styles
and expand it, and I'm going to dock
| | 02:35 | Character Styles down below it.
| | 02:36 | So you click on the undo and drag it
below another panel, you'll see the blue
| | 02:40 | line, and expand that.
| | 02:41 | So now this is acting as
one uber panel if you will.
| | 02:45 | Dock those two together, put it
right there in case I need it.
| | 02:47 | We'll close it, and that's looking good.
| | 02:50 | Next, we want to collapse the
Swatches panel here, and I'm going to move
| | 02:55 | Swatches, so it's in front of Stroke.
| | 02:57 | Yes, I'm getting very specific here.
| | 02:58 | I'm going to go ahead and go to my
Window menu, pull down to Interactive, choose
| | 03:02 | Buttons, and I want buttons to be
in the top group of panels here.
| | 03:07 | So I'm going to insert it
between Swatches and Pages.
| | 03:10 | I am going to have Bookmarks open occasionally.
| | 03:12 | So again I'll put this in my
temporary spot, then I go ahead and close it.
| | 03:16 | And last, I want to go ahead and open up
Hyperlinks, and dock that with Buttons.
| | 03:21 | So we'll go ahead and group that
together, and make Buttons the active panel.
| | 03:25 | So there we have it, we've got the
workspace configured, the way I want to use
| | 03:29 | it, and have the panels that I
need most often, when we are creating
| | 03:32 | interactive documents.
| | 03:33 | I might just put Color down at the bottom
just in case I need the Color Wheel as well.
| | 03:37 | So we'll open up Color and I'll dock that
down at the very bottom, below Swatches.
| | 03:42 | There we go, and then collapse it down.
| | 03:44 | So there I have my custom workspace all set up.
| | 03:47 | Now I'm going to give it a name.
| | 03:48 | I'm going to go where it says Advanced.
| | 03:50 | Click on that and say New Workspace.
| | 03:53 | And we'll call this Interactive
Documents and click OK, and now I've got
| | 03:59 | my custom workspace.
| | 04:00 | Looks like I made a typo.
| | 04:01 | And anytime I switch to a different
workspace or I screw something up, if I go
| | 04:06 | back to Essentials, I can just go back
and choose Interactive Documents again,
| | 04:10 | and it resets itself back
to the way it needs to be.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working in pixels| 00:00 | When it comes to designing digital
documents, you really should be thinking in
| | 00:04 | the measurement system of monitors and
the web, and that would be in pixels.
| | 00:08 | Well, it turns out, InDesign doesn't
actually have pixels as an option when you
| | 00:12 | choose your measurement system in Preferences.
| | 00:14 | Here I'm in what's called the No Pub State.
| | 00:17 | I have InDesign open.
| | 00:19 | I just don't have any documents open.
| | 00:21 | And it turns out that when you are in
this state in InDesign, when you go to
| | 00:23 | Preferences or Command+K or Ctrl+K
on Windows, any choice you make in the
| | 00:28 | Preferences dialog now is going to be
resetting that preference for every new
| | 00:33 | document you create from hereon out.
| | 00:35 | So if you have a document open, and
you go to Preferences, you just change in
| | 00:39 | the Preferences for that one document.
| | 00:41 | But if you have no document open, you
are making this choice for every new
| | 00:44 | document you create from hereon out.
| | 00:46 | If we go to Units & Increments, you'll
see I've got a Rulers Units section here,
| | 00:50 | and I have a Horizontal
and Vertical Ruler option.
| | 00:53 | It's default set to Picas.
| | 00:55 | When I click on here, I don't see pixels here.
| | 00:57 | Turns out that if you choose Points,
that's the equivalent of pixels, even
| | 01:02 | though it doesn't say pixels in the interface.
| | 01:04 | If you choose points as your
measurement system, one point will equal to one
| | 01:08 | pixel, and that's because the default
value for points to inches is 72 points
| | 01:13 | per inch, which happens to be the
resolution of Flash applications.
| | 01:18 | If I click OK now and create a new
document, just click the New Document button,
| | 01:23 | you'll see that my measurement
system now is listing in points.
| | 01:27 | And I can just type-in 500x400,
and I've got 500x400 pixel document.
| | 01:35 | So points are equivalent to pixels.
| | 01:38 | Change your measurement system with no
document open, and every new document you
| | 01:42 | create from now on will be using
points/pixels as your default measurement
| | 01:47 | system for the objects that
you create in your document.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Other helpful preference changes to make| 00:00 | In addition to changing your Measurement
System Preference, I actually recommend
| | 00:03 | a few other preference choices.
| | 00:05 | Again, when you have no document
open and you think you change in the
| | 00:08 | Preferences dialog, will affect new
documents created from hereon out.
| | 00:12 | Let's open up our Preferences dialog.
| | 00:14 | That's Command+K on the
keyboard or Ctrl+K on Windows.
| | 00:16 | That will open up our Preferences.
| | 00:18 | Couple of other ones to specify here.
| | 00:21 | Under Guides & Pasteboard, I'd like to
change the Smart Guides color from Grid
| | 00:25 | Green to Red, I find the Grid Green
option just a little bit too faint, if you
| | 00:29 | want a little bit more contrast there,
make a little bit more noticeable then I
| | 00:32 | go ahead and change that to Red.
| | 00:35 | Under the Display Performance I'd like
to change the Default View from Typical
| | 00:39 | to High Quality display.
| | 00:41 | I know a lot of beginners who have been
using InDesign for a while who claim or
| | 00:45 | think that InDesign is making their
Photoshop documents look bad when they place them.
| | 00:49 | It's because the Default View
quality is set to Typical, which is a
| | 00:52 | low-resolution proxy for your placed images.
| | 00:54 | We change that to High Quality.
| | 00:56 | It will make your images look a lot better.
| | 00:58 | It will be as high as quality as they can be.
| | 01:01 | And then last, I'd like to
change the Greek text below.
| | 01:03 | I don't really like the gray bars
that happen when you are greeking text.
| | 01:06 | So that's just my personal
preference, I change that to 1.
| | 01:08 | So there are just a few
more preferences to change.
| | 01:11 | One last one under File Handling we're
going to be using Snippets throughout
| | 01:16 | this course, and I'd like to bring
Snippets in at their original location.
| | 01:20 | We'll talk more about that later on in
the title, but basically when you Save
| | 01:24 | a Snippet out of InDesign it captures the
location of the artwork that you are saving.
| | 01:29 | And when you place the snippets you can
place them back at their original location.
| | 01:32 | So I kind of like changing that setting.
| | 01:34 | So there's some good
recommendation changes to make your preferences.
| | 01:38 | Go ahead and click OK, and now every
new document we create from this point on
| | 01:42 | will honor those preference choices.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating an RGB color palette| 00:00 | One additional housekeeping or setup
task we should think about when we are
| | 00:04 | doing digital document design or
interactive documents is creating a set of
| | 00:07 | RGB color swatches.
| | 00:09 | By default InDesign is populated at
Swatches panel with CMYK color swatches, so
| | 00:14 | there is the Cyan, Magenta, Yellow,
and of course Black, and then the Red,
| | 00:17 | Green, and Blue color
swatches to find the CMYK colors.
| | 00:20 | We want to create some RGB colors.
| | 00:22 | I have no document open right now
so this is called the No Pub State.
| | 00:25 | We can go ahead and delete these
colors if we don't want them in our Swatches
| | 00:29 | panel for any new document we create,
or we can leave them in there and just
| | 00:33 | add additional colors.
| | 00:34 | For now I'm going to go ahead and
delete these, I'm going to click on the first
| | 00:36 | one, hold down the Shift key, click on
the last one in the list and just hit
| | 00:39 | the Trash Can there.
| | 00:41 | And then you can also set your Default
Fill and Stroke colors with no document
| | 00:45 | open, so if I just choose Paper as my
Fill, click on the Swatch or proxy for the
| | 00:50 | stroke and choose None let's say.
| | 00:51 | Now every new graphic I create is going
to have a fill of paper and a stroke of
| | 00:55 | none, so you can control it that way.
| | 00:58 | Now I can go ahead and add new swatches
manually by clicking on the flyout menu
| | 01:02 | and choosing New Color Swatch, or I'm
going to take advantage of another feature
| | 01:06 | that does need to have a document open
in order for it to work, so I'm going to
| | 01:09 | create a new document and
go ahead and just click OK.
| | 01:10 | It doesn't really matter what the settings are.
| | 01:13 | Under Window > Extensions there
is a panel called the Kuler panel.
| | 01:17 | If you've never seen the Kuler panel or
the Kuler website, kuler.adobe.com this
| | 01:22 | is a community site where the community
creates and shares color palettes with
| | 01:26 | each other, they rate them and
comment on them, and then most popular gets
| | 01:29 | filtered into this list.
| | 01:30 | There is the Highest Rated.
| | 01:32 | You can see the Most Popular, the
Newest, Random, and new ones that you've
| | 01:35 | saved, and so forth.
| | 01:37 | So if there is a color palette that you
like or more than one you can just click
| | 01:41 | on it in this list and then click the
little arrow to the right that says Add to
| | 01:45 | the Swatches Panel, go ahead and click
on that and it will populate the Swatches
| | 01:48 | panel with those colors.
| | 01:50 | So I'm going to go ahead and click on
this little arrow to the right of the name
| | 01:53 | and say Add to Swatches Panel, and you
can see after a brief second there it
| | 01:58 | actually adds those RGB
colors to my Color Swatches panel.
| | 02:02 | So I've got a new set of colors that I can use.
| | 02:04 | Go ahead and close the Kuler panel and
I'm pretty happy with those color sets,
| | 02:08 | and now if I want I can save
those swatches as an external file.
| | 02:12 | So if I ever want to reload them I can
easily do that to replace the current
| | 02:16 | color set of swatches there.
| | 02:18 | To do that, you select the colors that
you want to save, and actually before I
| | 02:21 | do that let's create an RGB Black.
| | 02:23 | Right now there is just this Black
with brackets, I can't rename that so I'm
| | 02:27 | going to create a new color, I'm going
to go to the flyout menu for Swatches and
| | 02:29 | say New Color Swatch.
| | 02:31 | I'm going to change the
Color Mode from CMYK to RGB.
| | 02:35 | I'm going to take the Color sliders all the
way to the left or all three to get an RGB Black.
| | 02:40 | Name with Color Value, go ahead and click OK.
| | 02:43 | And with nothing selected you can
also rearrange the order of the color
| | 02:47 | swatches, so I don't want this Black to
be at the top or Registration to be at
| | 02:51 | the top, I want to make
Registration be at the bottom, we'll put Black
| | 02:54 | underneath that and then I'm
going to put my RGB Black at the top.
| | 02:58 | So now I've got the swatches exactly
the way I want them, I've got RGB Swatches
| | 03:02 | instead of CMYK Swatches.
| | 03:04 | Now I'm going to go ahead and save
this as a set by Shift-clicking on the
| | 03:07 | colors that I care about to select
them and then go into the File menu and
| | 03:10 | saying Save Swatches.
| | 03:12 | I'll just give it a name.
| | 03:13 | I'll call it MyRGB_Swatches and save
it to the desktop. Click Save, great!
| | 03:20 | I want to close that document, I
don't need to save changes here.
| | 03:23 | When I create a new document if I want
to get those swatches in this document I
| | 03:28 | can just go to the Load Swatches command,
and go to the desktop, and choose the
| | 03:33 | MyRGB_Swatches file that we just saved
a second ago, and they get populated and
| | 03:37 | added back into the Swatches Color panel.
| | 03:39 | So I recommend you set up yourself
with some RGB colors, especially in RGB
| | 03:44 | Black, get rid of the CMYK colors, they
are just going to get in your way, and
| | 03:48 | you are ready to get going on
designing digital documents.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
3. Creating a Slide PresentationWhat we're going to build| 00:00 | So let's take a moment to preview the
final version of the project you're going
| | 00:04 | to be building as part of this chapter.
| | 00:06 | This is the slide presentation that
we designed inside InDesign and then we
| | 00:10 | exported it out as a PDF.
| | 00:12 | I'm viewing it here in Acrobat.
| | 00:14 | You could also be looking at this
either in Adobe Reader or even Apple Preview.
| | 00:17 | If you are using one of the Adobe
PDF viewers here you can enter in Full
| | 00:21 | Screen mode by pressing Command+L or
Ctrl+L on Windows, and that puts your
| | 00:26 | document on Full Screen mode.
| | 00:27 | So we're looking at our title slide
here, and you can see there is a slide
| | 00:30 | number here, we've got some navigation
buttons at the bottom right-hand corner,
| | 00:33 | and if I roll over that I get a rollover effect.
| | 00:36 | This first button is dim.
| | 00:37 | It doesn't have the rollover because
it's the first slide in the presentation,
| | 00:41 | so there is no need to
have a navigation clue there.
| | 00:44 | When we click the button we get a wipe
transition from left to right, seeing the
| | 00:47 | new page come in, run a new slide,
slide number updates there as well.
| | 00:52 | Go ahead and step through and you can
see it's a typical slide deck presentation.
| | 00:56 | We've got a nice reflection effect.
| | 00:57 | You're going to learn how to create that
inside this project, and step through here.
| | 01:02 | And in this particular page there is a
Drop Shadow effect, we did that within --
| | 01:06 | inside InDesign, we didn't have to go
to Photoshop to add that Drop Shadow,
| | 01:09 | we'll talk about that.
| | 01:11 | And we get to this page, these are all
the links to the websites, and if you see
| | 01:14 | if I rollover then I get a little
finger that gives me a W in it to let me know
| | 01:17 | it's an external link.
| | 01:18 | If I wait a second I get a tooltip
telling me the URL, we'll learn how to create
| | 01:22 | those inside InDesign as well.
| | 01:23 | And then when we get to the last slide,
it's the Thank You slide and the last
| | 01:27 | button dims there to indicate that
you are on the last slide as well.
| | 01:29 | So that's a preview of the document that
you are going to be creating along the way.
| | 01:32 | You're going to be learning all sorts of
features like master pages, and styles,
| | 01:36 | and guides, and how to
place images and so forth.
| | 01:38 | So there you have it.
| | 01:39 | Let's get started on creating
this step-by-step in the next video.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Choosing a document size| 00:00 | So let's get started by creating a
new document for our slide presentation.
| | 00:03 | Let's go ahead and click the New
Document link here in the Startup Screen.
| | 00:07 | This brings up the New Document dialog,
and we need to choose a Page Size or a
| | 00:10 | Slide Size for our document.
| | 00:11 | Now there is a Page Size pop-up list,
where you can actually choose from
| | 00:15 | some pre-built sizes.
| | 00:16 | You'll notice that there is actually
some screen size resolutions here as
| | 00:19 | presets for you to choose from.
| | 00:20 | I recommend that instead of using
Letter, or Legal, or those types of print
| | 00:24 | measurement systems, let's pick a
screen size as the size for our document.
| | 00:28 | Most projectors today can do at least
1024x768, so that's usually what I recommend.
| | 00:33 | You can use higher resolutions, but
you'll run the risk of them not being
| | 00:36 | proportion to the projector that
you might be displaying it from.
| | 00:38 | I am going to choose 1024x768 pixels.
| | 00:42 | That automatically sets my
document to those dimensions.
| | 00:45 | Now my measurement system currently is
set in points, but we know that a point
| | 00:49 | is the same as a pixel in this context here.
| | 00:51 | I am going to have the
Orientation to be set to Wide.
| | 00:53 | It's already chosen that
based on the preset we chose.
| | 00:56 | So it's going to be 1024 Wide x 768 High.
| | 01:00 | I am going to turn off Facing Pages,
because we only want to see one page at a time.
| | 01:04 | Facing Pages would create spreads.
| | 01:05 | We just want to see single
page spreads if you will.
| | 01:07 | And let's change the number of
pages to 2, just to get us started.
| | 01:10 | So let's go ahead and click OK,
and we've got the start of our slide
| | 01:14 | presentation created at the
correct orientation and pixel dimension,
| | 01:18 | so 1024x768.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding layers to stay organized| 00:00 | Something I would like to recommend
to InDesign users is to take advantage
| | 00:03 | of document layers.
| | 00:04 | We are going to create layers to keep
our slide presentation here organized.
| | 00:08 | I want to create a layer for images.
| | 00:10 | I create another layer for text.
| | 00:12 | I create a layer for navigation elements and
so forth, and maybe even a layer for notes.
| | 00:16 | You'll see every document by
default has a single layer called Layer 1.
| | 00:19 | Its highlight color is blue.
| | 00:21 | Let's go ahead and
customize the name of this layer.
| | 00:23 | You do that by double-clicking on the
name of the layer in lower Layers panel.
| | 00:25 | I'm going to call this first bottom
layer Navigation, and this is what we are
| | 00:30 | going to put to our buttons and
navigation elements that are going to show up on
| | 00:34 | every single page here.
| | 00:35 | So I'll call it Navigation, we'll
leave the highlight color Blue. Click OK.
| | 00:37 | I am going to create a new layer
by clicking the New Layer button.
| | 00:41 | This creates a new layer too.
| | 00:42 | We'll go ahead and double-click on that.
| | 00:43 | This is going to be our Images layer,
so I'll name it Images, and I don't
| | 00:48 | want the Images layer to be Red, so
I'm going to change that to Orange for
| | 00:50 | the highlight color.
| | 00:51 | Go ahead and click OK.
| | 00:53 | Create another new layer, layer three.
| | 00:55 | We'll call this text by double-clicking
on the name again in the Layers panel.
| | 00:59 | We are going to make our Text layer
Green, and we'll create one more layer, and
| | 01:04 | this time we'll leave it Red as the
highlight color, and we'll call it Notes.
| | 01:09 | Now you will notice that the
Layers panel is the same for every page.
| | 01:13 | When I double-click on a page to turn to
its page, all the layers are available.
| | 01:17 | So these are document wide
layers, which is kind of nice.
| | 01:21 | So if I get my frame tool here.
| | 01:22 | Let's just pretend I'm creating a
text frame that's going to be a note.
| | 01:25 | You will see that the layer color is
what indicates the highlight color of
| | 01:30 | the bounding box, so because it's
drawn on the Notes layer, the bounding box
| | 01:34 | for that frame is Red.
| | 01:35 | I go and get my Pointer tool here.
| | 01:38 | If I turn the layer off, you can
see that frame on my page disappears.
| | 01:42 | You get a little page
thumbnail showing where that box is.
| | 01:44 | If I go back to page 1, and draw
another box here, I just press the letter M to
| | 01:49 | switch to the frame tool here.
| | 01:51 | Go ahead and draw another box.
| | 01:52 | You will see that both pages have
boxes on them, and if I turn off the Notes
| | 01:56 | layers, you see that turns off the
Notes layer for the entire documents.
| | 02:00 | You can see both page thumbnails update
to reflect that layer has been turned off.
| | 02:04 | So it's a great way to keep organized.
| | 02:06 | If you accidentally draw something or
place something on the wrong layer, let's
| | 02:09 | go ahead and turn the Notes
layer back on. Not a big deal.
| | 02:12 | An object can be changed
which layer it's placed on.
| | 02:15 | There is a little what we call a
chiclet here in the upper right-hand corner of
| | 02:18 | the Layers panel indicating that
selected object is on that layer.
| | 02:23 | You can just click on that and drag it
to whatever layer you want it to be on.
| | 02:26 | So if I want that to be a placeholder
for an image frame, I'll just drag that.
| | 02:30 | You will notice that when you let go,
the bounding box has changed to Orange
| | 02:33 | now, because it's on the Images layer.
| | 02:35 | So again, good idea to create a layer set,
then keep all your related content on
| | 02:40 | its own relevant layer, and it makes it
easier to keep track and turn things on
| | 02:44 | and off and create variations.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a title slide master page| 00:00 | By default every page in InDesign
has a master page applied to it.
| | 00:04 | It's called the A-master page
that's present in every document.
| | 00:07 | You can see that the A is applied to these
page thumbnails here in my two page document.
| | 00:12 | We are going to turn the
A-Master into our Title master.
| | 00:16 | So if you are familiar with a product
like PowerPoint or Keynote, you know that
| | 00:18 | there are master slides.
| | 00:20 | We are going to use master
pages as the same type of metaphor.
| | 00:23 | To edit a master page, you double-click
on its thumbnail in the Pages panel.
| | 00:27 | While it looks identical to the page
we are just on, there are a couple of
| | 00:31 | visual clues, one, the master page is
highlighted in the pages panel, and also
| | 00:35 | on the bottom left-hand corner it tells
you that you are on the A-Master instead
| | 00:38 | of page 1 or page 2.
| | 00:40 | So let's go ahead and bring in
our background of the title slides.
| | 00:42 | We'll do File > Place or Command+D or
Ctrl+D and then in our Links folder here
| | 00:47 | we've got a background JPEG that
we are going to go ahead and place.
| | 00:50 | That loads the image into a loaded cursor here.
| | 00:54 | I'm going to start in
the upper left-hand corner.
| | 00:56 | I'm just going to drag it.
| | 00:59 | New to CS4 is something
called proportional place.
| | 01:02 | You can see I can't drag
this to any arbitrary rectangle.
| | 01:04 | It's always scaling the image and
keeping the original proportion of the file.
| | 01:08 | So I'm just going to scale out from
left to right until it hits the right-hand
| | 01:11 | edge there, and I can see it's 200%.
| | 01:13 | It's not really important right now,
but I couldn't let go the mouse to place
| | 01:16 | that image and we've got our background here.
| | 01:18 | Now you can see over in the Pages
panel, both pages one and two have that
| | 01:22 | background image applied to them, because
they are both tagged with the A-master page.
| | 01:27 | To finish this off, we are going to add
some guides and change the margins to this.
| | 01:30 | So I'm going to drag out
a horizontal ruler guide.
| | 01:33 | If your rulers are not on right now,
invisible, you can either go to the View
| | 01:38 | menu and choose Show Rulers.
| | 01:40 | Mine are turned on, so it says Hide Rulers.
| | 01:42 | Or you can use the keyboard
shortcuts Command+R or Ctrl+R.
| | 01:44 | I am going to grab in the horizontal
ruler by clicking and dragging down a
| | 01:49 | horizontal guide, and we are going to
drag it to where the current margin guide is.
| | 01:53 | So it's 732 points, good.
| | 01:56 | Then I'm going to drag a guide to the
center of the page as well, just so we
| | 01:59 | have a visual guide there.
| | 02:00 | So that would be about 512 points.
| | 02:02 | In this case pixels, great.
| | 02:04 | Last step is to change our
margin guides for the title slide.
| | 02:08 | It has to be a little bit
looser from the edges there.
| | 02:11 | So to do that you go to Layout,
Margin and Columns, and let's change our top
| | 02:16 | margin here to 90, change our bottom
margin to 105, change the left margin to
| | 02:24 | 90, and change the right margin to 30.
| | 02:27 | Because I have the Preview checkbox
turned on, you will see that as I tabbed
| | 02:32 | from field to field, the guides actually
updated in the background, just to make
| | 02:35 | sure visually that it's correct.
| | 02:37 | If you made a mistake, you can go
ahead and correct the number here, or just
| | 02:40 | go ahead and click OK.
| | 02:41 | So that way we've customized our
master page to have a background image, new
| | 02:46 | margins, and some guides.
| | 02:47 | And now when I double-click on a regular
page to exit the master page, you
| | 02:50 | will see that they all have the same
guides and same background image, just like
| | 02:54 | the master page that's been applied to them.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding placeholder text| 00:00 | It's a good idea to give our title
slide a placeholder title text as well.
| | 00:04 | So let's go ahead and do
that by editing our master page.
| | 00:07 | We will double-click on the master page
icon in the pages panel, and before we
| | 00:11 | create a text frame on this master page we
want to make sure we target the right layer.
| | 00:15 | So I'm going to click on the
text layer in the Layers panel.
| | 00:17 | I'll get my Text tool, and I'll start
dragging from margin to margin here.
| | 00:21 | Here's a little power tip.
| | 00:22 | You will see that my top of the text
frame that I'm creating here isn't lined up
| | 00:26 | with the top margin.
| | 00:27 | As you are dragging, if you hold down
your Spacebar, you can reposition that
| | 00:31 | text frame until it's lined up, and
then when you got it in the right position,
| | 00:34 | let go the Spacebar, and
then you can keep dragging.
| | 00:36 | Kind of a nice tip is if you are
creating any frame in InDesign, whether it be
| | 00:40 | text or graphic, as you are dragging,
if you realize you got in the wrong spot
| | 00:44 | to start, just hold down the Spacebar,
move it into the correct position, and
| | 00:47 | let go the Spacebar and keep going.
| | 00:49 | So let's put in some placeholder text here.
| | 00:51 | We'll call it Title Slide.
| | 00:52 | I'm going to go ahead and select that
text, Command+A or Ctrl+A to select all
| | 00:57 | the text, and I want to change my font
obviously, as this is too small, and the
| | 01:00 | default text here is Times.
| | 01:02 | I want it to be much larger
and be a bolder typeface here.
| | 01:05 | Command+6 or Ctrl+6 on Windows
actually puts your focus in the font field in
| | 01:11 | the Control panel here.
| | 01:12 | I'll just mouse over here, so
you can see what I'm talking about.
| | 01:15 | Times is now selected.
| | 01:16 | If I just type the name of the typeface I
want, it will jump to that one in the list.
| | 01:20 | I'm going type My for Myriad Pro,
and it automatically jumps to that.
| | 01:24 | When I hit the Tab key, you will see that it
actually applies Myriad Pro to my selected text.
| | 01:30 | I want this to be bold, so I'll go
ahead and click on that pop-up menu, and
| | 01:33 | choose Bold, and then I'll
choose 48 as my point size here.
| | 01:38 | Now if I go ahead and deselect the
text here by clicking, I see my title
| | 01:41 | slide text is Black.
| | 01:42 | I want that to be White.
| | 01:44 | So I'm going to reselect the text by
clicking-and-dragging, and we'll go over to
| | 01:47 | our Swatches panel here.
| | 01:49 | If you double-click on a panel title,
that will open the panel, but it's
| | 01:53 | actually easier if you just single-click on
the darker gray area in a panel strip here.
| | 01:57 | That will expand the panel group as well.
| | 02:00 | So my text attribute here is chosen.
| | 02:02 | I'm going to choose paper from my text
color there, and then I want to get out
| | 02:06 | of my Text tool, and go back to my Pointer tool.
| | 02:08 | So power tip there is just hit
the Escape key on your keyboard and that
| | 02:12 | switches you out of your Text tool and
back the Selection tool, and it has the
| | 02:16 | frame selected there.
| | 02:17 | So there is our title slide placeholder
text in the formatting and position that
| | 02:22 | we wanted it in, and then we'll of
course edit that for the real slide later.
| | 02:25 | I am going to go ahead and collapse the
Swatches panel, and we'll go back to our
| | 02:29 | regular page by double-clicking on
page 1, and you can see the title slide is
| | 02:32 | there on page 1 and page 2, because
they are both using the same master page.
| | 02:37 | Coming up to the next video we are
actually going to talk about creating a
| | 02:40 | second master page for our content slides.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating auto page numbers| 00:00 | It's pretty common to see footers or
header information on a slide, maybe like a
| | 00:03 | page number, or a copyright notice
or a logo or something like that.
| | 00:07 | We are going to go ahead and add page
numbers or slide numbers to our master
| | 00:11 | page, so that we can automatically have
the slide have the correct page number
| | 00:15 | on it, as we create multiple pages here.
| | 00:17 | So to begin let's go edit the master
page by double-clicking on the Master Page
| | 00:21 | icon in the Pages panel.
| | 00:22 | Go ahead and target the
text layer. That's fine.
| | 00:25 | It's already chosen there,
and we'll go ahead and zoom in.
| | 00:28 | I'm going to hold down the Command key
and the Spacebar or the Control key and
| | 00:32 | the Spacebar on Windows.
| | 00:34 | If you are on the Mac and you see Spotlight
show up, don't worry about that. Just ignore it.
| | 00:37 | We'll go ahead and zoom in on that area
there and we Command+Minus or Ctrl+Minus
| | 00:40 | just to have a little bit- Zoomed in too far.
| | 00:42 | I'm going to get my Text tool, and
I'll press T on the keyboard to select my
| | 00:46 | Text tool, and I'm just going
to drag at the text frame here.
| | 00:49 | Roughly so that's centered on that
intersection there, the grid lines where we
| | 00:53 | created earlier with the guides.
| | 00:54 | All right, I have got my text frame
here, and now I want to insert a special
| | 00:58 | character that will create
automatic page numbers for me.
| | 01:01 | Easiest way to do that is to Ctrl-click
or a right-click if you have a
| | 01:04 | right-click two-button mouse, and we
are going to choose Insert > Special
| | 01:08 | Character > Markers > Current page
number, and there is actually keyboard
| | 01:12 | shortcut for that if you're
someone who dreams in keyboard shortcuts,
| | 01:15 | Command+Option+Shift+N and that inserts that.
| | 01:17 | Now, why is it showing A instead of a number?
| | 01:19 | Because we are on the A master page.
| | 01:22 | So, that's the current page, being
fed into that current Page Marker.
| | 01:26 | So, I want this to be centered text.
| | 01:28 | I'm going to go to my Control panel.
| | 01:29 | I'm going to go ahead and Center that
so that it ends up right in the middle of
| | 01:33 | that text frame, and we are
going to go ahead and format that.
| | 01:35 | Select the text again.
| | 01:36 | Command+6 puts your focus into
the Font Field in the Control panel.
| | 01:40 | You can just type in Myriad Pro, hit
Return, and that actually applies that.
| | 01:45 | No, I think I want that to be bold
as well, so I'm going to change it
| | 01:47 | from Regular to Bold.
| | 01:49 | And I want it to be vertically
centered inside that text frame as well.
| | 01:53 | So again, I want to get back to
my Pointer tool, my Selection tool.
| | 01:57 | I'm going to hit the Escape key to
switch from my Text tool back to my regular
| | 02:01 | Selection tool, and in the Control
panel, here you will see I have a Align
| | 02:05 | center Text Frame button, and that
just vertically aligns the center in that
| | 02:09 | text inside that frame.
| | 02:11 | I think I want to make that page
number a little bit more subtle, so I'm
| | 02:14 | going to tint it back.
| | 02:15 | I'm going to ahead and double-click on
the text again, to select that letter.
| | 02:19 | And let's go to our Swatches panel, and
you will see right now the tint is 100%,
| | 02:23 | I have got 100% black, RGB black here.
| | 02:26 | I'm going to click on the Tint value,
the Tint Label here in the Swatches panel.
| | 02:29 | Just type in 50% and hit Enter, and just to
tint that page number back. All right, great!
| | 02:35 | We will go back to Fit to
Window, Command+0 or Ctrl+0.
| | 02:38 | You can see a tiny A there.
| | 02:40 | I take this opportunity to
actually teach you a new preview trick.
| | 02:44 | Right now, you are seeing the guides,
and yes, there is menu commands to turn
| | 02:47 | guides on and off, but it's much quicker
to actually just switch to the Preview Mode.
| | 02:51 | Right now, we are in the Normal Mode,
and that's where you see all your Margin
| | 02:54 | guides and your Ruler guides and what now.
| | 02:56 | If you just press the W key on your
keyboard, it temporarily hides all of that
| | 03:01 | visual distraction noise on your screen.
| | 03:03 | So that you can clearly
see the A page number there.
| | 03:06 | I'm going to go ahead and
press W again. It's a toggle.
| | 03:08 | It goes back and forth
between Normal and Preview.
| | 03:11 | I find, I often edit and design in the
Preview Mode, only switching back to the
| | 03:16 | Normal Mode, when I actually need to
see the guides for a short period of time.
| | 03:19 | I find it a cleaner way to design there.
| | 03:21 | All right, so let's collapse our
Swatches panel by clicking in the gray area, to
| | 03:25 | the right of the panel names, and we
can see our Page Thumbnails clearly.
| | 03:29 | When I double-click on page one to go
back, you will see instead of the A, I see
| | 03:32 | the 1, when I double-click on page
two, I see it update into page two.
| | 03:35 | So, that's how you can create
automatic page numbering or slide numbering by
| | 03:39 | creating a text frame with that special
Marker Character on the actual master page.
| | 03:43 | Since every page in this document
has been tagged with the master page A,
| | 03:48 | they're automatically
getting that page number as well.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding placeholder slide navigation buttons| 00:00 | So our title slide is almost complete.
| | 00:01 | It's looking pretty good.
| | 00:02 | The last thing we want to add to
it are some Navigation buttons.
| | 00:05 | Things that the viewer or the reader,
if they are looking at this in a PDF
| | 00:09 | or whatever, can click on to go to the next
slide, and the previous slide, and whatnot.
| | 00:12 | Now, a button can be anything.
| | 00:14 | It can be an image that you have placed.
| | 00:15 | It can be a logo that you brought in
from the Illustrator, or it can just be
| | 00:19 | some simple frame or shape that
you drew in InDesign directly.
| | 00:23 | Now, I actually happen to have a
just a temporary document here that I've
| | 00:25 | created shortly before recording this
video, and I have some triangles that I
| | 00:30 | just drew with the Pen tool.
| | 00:30 | Notice that they are exactly in the
position that I want to use them in, and if
| | 00:34 | you are following along with
exercise files, these are where I want these
| | 00:37 | buttons to end up on your slide as well.
| | 00:39 | I want to take advantage of this time
to show you a feature in InDesign that
| | 00:42 | often goes unnoticed.
| | 00:43 | It's called Snippets.
| | 00:45 | And I want to do is
select these two buttons here.
| | 00:48 | These are just triangles that I'm going
to use as buttons later on, and when you
| | 00:51 | got to File > Export, one of the file
formats you can choose is something called
| | 00:55 | as InDesign Snippet, and it gives
you are file extension of .idms.
| | 01:00 | Now, this is just a special file type.
| | 01:01 | It's only in relevant to InDesign.
| | 01:03 | What it does is it saves your
selection as an External File that you can then
| | 01:07 | reuse in any other InDesign document.
| | 01:10 | You can actually send it to someone, and
they can reuse it just like any other asset.
| | 01:13 | I am going to go ahead and hit Cancel,
because I have already got something
| | 01:15 | here saved for us to place, but I would go
ahead and call these buttons.idms or whatever.
| | 01:20 | That's kind of the
workflow of how you create them.
| | 01:22 | You just make a selection and do a
File > Export and choose InDesign Snippet.
| | 01:26 | Now, that we are back in our title
slide here, we want to Import that Snippet,
| | 01:30 | those buttons and place them on our master page.
| | 01:33 | So, I'm going to go to the master page
by double-clicking on the thumbnail in
| | 01:36 | the Pages panel, and we'll use our
Place command, File > Place or Command+D or
| | 01:40 | Ctrl+D, and there in my Links
folder is buttons.idms file.
| | 01:44 | Go ahead and click open, and it
brings it into the loaded gun here.
| | 01:48 | Now when I click, it just gets placed.
| | 01:50 | That Snippet file gets placed
wherever I clicked. That's fine.
| | 01:53 | That's probably where you expected.
| | 01:55 | There's actually a hidden preference
here in InDesign that makes Snippets even
| | 01:59 | more useful depending on
what you want to accomplish.
| | 02:01 | So I'm going to go and delete that and
to make sure that the Snippet comes in on
| | 02:05 | the right layer, we want them
to come on the Navigation layer.
| | 02:08 | So I'm just going to target
the Navigation layer first.
| | 02:09 | I'm going to open up my Preferences file.
| | 02:11 | It's Command+K on the Mac or Ctrl+K on Windows.
| | 02:15 | And in the File Handling section of
Preferences, there is a section here
| | 02:19 | called Snippet Import.
| | 02:21 | The default is Position at Cursor Location.
| | 02:23 | That's what you just saw.
| | 02:24 | They got loaded into a cursor, you
clicked and they just got dropped on the
| | 02:27 | page, wherever you clicked.
| | 02:29 | This time I'm going to choose Position at
Original Location, go ahead and click OK.
| | 02:33 | I'm going to use our File > Place
command again, and we are going to go and
| | 02:38 | place that same button.idms folder.
| | 02:40 | Go ahead and click Open.
| | 02:41 | Now, it doesn't matter where I click.
| | 02:43 | If I click over here, it doesn't matter,
because they will end up in the exact
| | 02:47 | same position they were when they
were saved as a Snippet to begin with.
| | 02:51 | So it makes it a really neat way to
share content between doc, and you can
| | 02:55 | create this in a library if you will,
of reusable content, just by create
| | 02:59 | selections of anything, and it turns
out that when you create these Snippet
| | 03:02 | files, their original XY or position
information is saved within the Snippet file.
| | 03:07 | So, you can take advantage of that
original position information if you choose
| | 03:10 | so, just by changing that preference.
| | 03:13 | Okay, so there we have it.
| | 03:13 | We have our triangles that we drew with
the Pen tool here, placed as a Snippet,
| | 03:18 | exactly in the right location on our
title slide, will turn those into actual
| | 03:22 | buttons that you can click on
later on, but right now, they are just
| | 03:24 | placeholders and they are
exactly where we want them to be.
| | 03:26 | Let's go back to the regular page
by double-clicking on Page 1 icon.
| | 03:30 | And you can see those buttons are
there of course, because they are on the
| | 03:33 | master page that had been applied to this page.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a content slide master page| 00:00 | So we have our title slide and
master page all spread away, but most
| | 00:04 | presentations, there are other types of
slides in there, they are not all title slides.
| | 00:07 | So let's create a content
slide master page as well.
| | 00:10 | And to do that, we'll just go ahead
and double-click on the regular title
| | 00:14 | slide, master page here, Master Page A, and we
are going to duplicate this and customize it.
| | 00:18 | So to do that, let's right-click or
Ctrl-click on the page thumbnail for the
| | 00:22 | A-Master Page, and we'll say
Duplicate Master "Spread A-Title".
| | 00:27 | We have a new master page
called B-Master by Default.
| | 00:29 | We can go and right-click or Ctrl-click
on that Thumbnail, and say Master
| | 00:34 | Options for B-Master.
| | 00:35 | Let's go and give this a different name,
instead of Master let's call it 1 Col,
| | 00:40 | for 1 column, so it would be our
content slide for a 1 column page.
| | 00:45 | Go ahead and click OK.
| | 00:46 | And now, let's go ahead and customize this.
| | 00:48 | I will go ahead and delete the
background image, go ahead and click on the image
| | 00:51 | there and hit Delete, or the Backspace key.
| | 00:54 | And let's go ahead and place our other
graphics in here, Command+D or File,
| | 00:58 | Place, and I have a Gradient backdrop that
I want to use instead of that pink backdrop.
| | 01:03 | Go ahead and click open.
| | 01:05 | And we'll go ahead and drag this from
the upper left-hand corner, and all the
| | 01:08 | way over to the right-hand
side of the slide there. Great!
| | 01:11 | And then we have a Header Graphic
that we want to put there as well.
| | 01:14 | So I'll go ahead and deselect by
clicking anywhere other than that graphic.
| | 01:17 | Go ahead and File > Place again,
Command+D, File > Place or Ctrl+D. And I'll
| | 01:21 | choose the Header file in my Links folder.
| | 01:24 | Go ahead and click Open there, and
we'll go ahead and drag the Header
| | 01:27 | file across as well.
| | 01:29 | So this is starting to look
more like a content slide.
| | 01:31 | I'm going to go ahead and deselect that.
| | 01:33 | I happen to be in the Preview Mode here,
so I'm going to press W to go back to
| | 01:36 | the Normal View where I can see my
guides again, and we need to adjust our
| | 01:40 | Margin guides again.
| | 01:42 | So we go to Layout > Margins and Columns,
and we want our top to be 45 Points,
| | 01:47 | our bottom should stay the same, and
our left should be 30 to match the right.
| | 01:51 | And because I have got the Preview
checkbox turned on, as I go from field to
| | 01:54 | field by hitting the Tab key, again, I can see
where my guides are, and they are looking good.
| | 01:58 | All right, click OK.
| | 01:59 | This is where I want my title for the
slide to be, the Slide Title text here, so
| | 02:03 | I'm going to go ahead and click on this
text frame that was the placeholder text
| | 02:07 | for the title slide.
| | 02:08 | I'm going to put that in a position
there, I'm going to stretch out by clicking
| | 02:11 | that middle handle here and dragging
it to the width of the margins, and if I
| | 02:15 | double-click on this middle handle,
what that will do is shrink the text frame
| | 02:19 | down to be only as tall as it
needs to be to contain that text.
| | 02:23 | I want this title slide header here
to be centered in this Pink Header Bar
| | 02:27 | vertically, so I'm going to click on
one of the characters here just once
| | 02:31 | with my Selection tool.
| | 02:32 | Start dragging up with the Shift key
down, and you will see a red line appear
| | 02:36 | when it's perfectly centered.
| | 02:37 | That Smart Guide is kicking in, letting
me know that I have got that perfectly
| | 02:41 | vertically centered within that
pink bar, so that's nice. Great!
| | 02:45 | There is my title slide.
| | 02:46 | We are going to customize this a little bit.
| | 02:48 | Make sure that this text is 36 points.
| | 02:51 | I just double-clicked on the text frame
to select that text, and automatically
| | 02:55 | switch to my Text tool.
| | 02:56 | I'm going to go ahead and change the
header of the slide to 36 points, and I can
| | 03:00 | go back and get my Selection tool. Great!
| | 03:02 | I now need a consistent start point for
my content, so I'm going to drag out a
| | 03:06 | horizontal guide from the top Ruler Bar
here and drag it down, and you will see
| | 03:11 | that it's jumping sometimes
to decimal point increments.
| | 03:14 | If you want to stop that from
happening, if you hold down your Shift key as
| | 03:17 | you drag your guides, they will snap
to tick-marks on the rulers, and you get
| | 03:22 | whole values there.
| | 03:23 | So I want a guide at 120 points.
| | 03:25 | I'm just holding a Shift key down until
I get my little display cursor telling
| | 03:28 | me that I'm at that point.
| | 03:29 | I'll go and let go.
| | 03:30 | And I have got the guide where I wanted.
| | 03:31 | Go and deselect the guide
by clicking somewhere else.
| | 03:34 | Next, we are going to duplicate this
text frame and put it in the content area.
| | 03:38 | So to do that, I'm going to go and
click on that text frame once with
| | 03:40 | the Selection tool.
| | 03:41 | I'm going to hold down the Option key
on the Mac or Alt key on Windows, and you
| | 03:43 | will see that turns into a duplicate
cursor, so I can start dragging with the
| | 03:48 | Option or Alt key down, and drag out a copy.
| | 03:51 | If I hold down the Shift key
as I drag, it keeps it lined up.
| | 03:54 | So I have got that right where I
wanted now, lined up with that content area.
| | 03:57 | And I can drag the Middle Text
Handle down to fill up the margins here.
| | 04:02 | So I have got my content slide here,
and placeholder text here, but it's white
| | 04:06 | against this light background, so we are
going to go to the Swatches panel, I'll
| | 04:09 | go ahead and click in the dark-gray area.
| | 04:11 | Click on the T in the Swatches area, so
I can switch between frame attributes or
| | 04:16 | text attributes, I'm going to click on
the T and choose the RGB Black swatch
| | 04:20 | there from my text color.
| | 04:22 | And the last thing I need to do is
actually just change the type size here, so
| | 04:25 | it's not the same as the Title Header above.
| | 04:27 | I'll go and double-click on that text
to select it, and change it from 36 to
| | 04:32 | 32, and I'll just click the down-
arrows here in the Control panel, and I want
| | 04:36 | the Leading value not to be Auto,
because that automatically changes as I
| | 04:40 | change my type size, I want to be a
fixed amount, so I'm going to make it the
| | 04:42 | same as my type size here.
| | 04:44 | So I'm going to type in 32,
and hit Enter to apply that.
| | 04:47 | And there I have it.
| | 04:49 | I have got my Placeholder Body Text,
and my Placeholder Header for the Slide
| | 04:53 | Title, and my Header
Graphic and my Background Graphic.
| | 04:56 | The last thing I'll do is I'll just
name this subhead by double-clicking and
| | 04:59 | re-typing that, so I'm clear
what that is. Same thing here.
| | 05:03 | This isn't title slide;
| | 05:04 | this should be Slide Title.
| | 05:07 | Me being a little specific,it's a
polite way of saying being anal.
| | 05:10 | Okay, so there I have it.
| | 05:12 | I have got my content all set, and
that's my complete edits on the B-Master Page.
| | 05:17 | I'm going to go ahead and double-click
on the page 2, and you will see that
| | 05:20 | that still looks like page 1, because they
both the have the A master page applied to them.
| | 05:25 | So to fix that, I'm going to drag the
thumbnail for the B-Master Page, to page 2
| | 05:30 | and let go, and now page 2 has
been tagged with the B page instead.
| | 05:34 | So, I have got a title slide and a
content slide in a basic template here.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating paragraph styles| 00:00 | Before you get too far along in the
creation of any sort of template, whether
| | 00:03 | it be for a slide presentation or for
a book or a brochure, you should ask
| | 00:08 | yourself this one question.
| | 00:09 | Am I going to want to change my
mind about how a certain text looks?
| | 00:12 | If the answer to that question is yes,
and here's the hint, it always is, you
| | 00:16 | should definitely invest in learning
how to use in creating styles, paragraph
| | 00:20 | styles and character styles.
| | 00:22 | Basically the nutshell is that the
styles give you the ability to change your
| | 00:25 | mind quickly and affect every
paragraph or even word, down to the individual
| | 00:30 | character that's based on a particular
style, just by redefining a style once.
| | 00:35 | So we went ahead and we made a title
slide and put some placeholder text there.
| | 00:39 | We made a content slide, master pages for
each and we put some placeholder text there.
| | 00:43 | But when I start actually creating
multiple versions of these pages and
| | 00:47 | start customizing the text there, this would
all be done using what's called Local Formatting.
| | 00:52 | If I want to change my mind, like I want
the text for subheads to be a different
| | 00:55 | color, I would have to go change that
in every single slide, unless I thought
| | 00:59 | ahead to actually create
paragraph and character text styles.
| | 01:02 | So that's what we're going to do here.
| | 01:03 | Let's go to our master page A by
double clicking on the A master page
| | 01:06 | thumbnail in the Pages panel.
| | 01:07 | I'm going to go ahead and double click
in this text frame and select that text.
| | 01:12 | Defining styles doesn't have to be complicated.
| | 01:14 | You can go ahead and create
your text the way you always do.
| | 01:17 | Make it look the way you want it to look,
and then capture that look into a style.
| | 01:22 | So let's do that by going to our Window
menu, pulling down to Types & Tables and
| | 01:28 | open up the Paragraph Styles panel.
| | 01:32 | There it is and at the bottom
there is a new style button.
| | 01:35 | I'll go ahead and create that.
| | 01:37 | We'll click the button.
| | 01:38 | This just gives you a generic Paragraph Style 1.
| | 01:40 | Not very useful in my opinion.
| | 01:42 | You're going to want to name your style.
| | 01:43 | So I'm going to undo that, Command+Z or
Ctrl+Z.Instead, there is a key in most
| | 01:48 | applications, most Adobe applications,
that we call the make better key.
| | 01:51 | It's the Option key on the
Mac or the Alt key on Windows.
| | 01:53 | I'm going to hold down the Option
key and click on the new style button.
| | 01:57 | This time that brings up a
Paragraph Style dialog box.
| | 02:00 | We can actually give it a name.
| | 02:01 | So I'm going to call this Headline, it's
the largest piece of text in the presentation.
| | 02:06 | This checkbox, Apply Style to Selection,
very important, leave that on, because
| | 02:11 | you're wanting the paragraph that you're
using to base your style on to actually
| | 02:14 | be tagged with that style
as a result of clicking OK.
| | 02:18 | There it gives you the style definition,
it just reconfirms all those choices
| | 02:21 | that you made earlier to make
your text look a certain way.
| | 02:24 | Let me go ahead and click OK. Great!
| | 02:26 | There is my Headline style
showing up in my Paragraph Styles panel.
| | 02:29 | It also shows up in my
Control panel shortcut list here.
| | 02:34 | My text is still selected there.
| | 02:35 | I'm going to hit the Escape key.
| | 02:37 | That takes me out of the Text tool
and switches me to the Selection tool.
| | 02:41 | I'm going to go back to the B master page,
where I've got two other pieces of text here.
| | 02:45 | I'm going to go ahead and double
click on Slide Title to select that text.
| | 02:50 | Again, the secret handshake here, hold
down the Option key on Mac or Alt key on
| | 02:54 | Windows and click on the new
icon on the Paragraph Styles panel.
| | 02:57 | This time we'll call this Slide Title.
| | 03:00 | See, kind of a pattern here, huh? Great!
| | 03:03 | Apply to Selection, yes, click OK.
| | 03:05 | I've got that captured as a style.
| | 03:07 | Same thing with Subhead.
| | 03:08 | We'll double click on the text Subhead,
Option-click or Alt-click on the new
| | 03:11 | icon and we'll call this Subhead.
| | 03:14 | Apply to Selection checked, click OK. Great!
| | 03:17 | Now, what usually comes after a subhead
in a typical slide deck is a bullet point.
| | 03:22 | So I'm going to hit the Return key to
start a new line here and we'll go ahead
| | 03:25 | and type in 'This is the first bullet.'
| | 03:29 | I want this to look a little bit
different, so I'm going to triple click to
| | 03:31 | select to select that whole line, and
instead of it being bold, we'll go back to
| | 03:35 | our Character Formatting in the
Control panel here by clicking on the A. I'm
| | 03:38 | going to change it from Bold to Regular. Great!
| | 03:40 | I want the text size to be a little bit
smaller, so I'm going to make it 24 point.
| | 03:44 | Go ahead and leave the leading alone for now.
| | 03:46 | If I go back to the Paragraph
attributes in the Control panel, there is a nice
| | 03:51 | little button here called Bullets &
Numbering or Bulleted List, we'll go ahead
| | 03:55 | and click on that and it creates an
instant bullet there for me. Great!
| | 03:59 | This is what I want it to look like.
| | 04:00 | I've done all the hard work, now I
just need to capture that as a style.
| | 04:03 | So again I triple click to select
the whole paragraph and I'm going to
| | 04:07 | Option-click or Alt-click on the new
button in the Paragraph Styles panel and
| | 04:10 | we'll call this Bullet.
| | 04:13 | Notice that it's based on Subhead,
because I had hit the Carriage Return after
| | 04:17 | the Subhead line, and so that next
paragraph is going to Subhead too.
| | 04:21 | I went ahead and reformatted
that text to be looked different.
| | 04:24 | The fact that it's based on
Subhead is cool, because they both share
| | 04:28 | certain attributes.
| | 04:29 | Like for instance, they're both using
Myriad Pro as the base font between both styles.
| | 04:34 | If I ever go back and edit the Subhead
style and change the font of that to say
| | 04:40 | Minion Pro or something like that, then
any style that is based on Subhead would
| | 04:44 | also get that font change.
| | 04:45 | So it's kind of a nice way to base
other styles on a parent style so that they
| | 04:50 | share their updates, if that's
your desired behavior there. Great!
| | 04:54 | I'm going to go ahead and click OK.
| | 04:55 | There is my Bullet style, and just for
kicks I'll do a second line and say 'This
| | 05:00 | is the second bullet.' Great!
| | 05:05 | I'm going to go ahead and hit the Escape
key again to go back to the Selection tool.
| | 05:08 | You'll notice that the styles are
listed in the Paragraph Styles panel in the
| | 05:11 | order that they were created.
| | 05:13 | I tend to be a little bit more specific.
| | 05:16 | I like my styles listed in the relative
hierarchy in terms of a presentation deck.
| | 05:21 | So I would want the largest style,
the Headline style, to be listed first,
| | 05:24 | followed by the Slide Title, followed by
the Subhead, and the Bullet, and so forth.
| | 05:28 | So you can actually reorder your
style list in InDesign, a lot of people
| | 05:31 | didn't realize that.
| | 05:32 | You just click on the name of the style and
drag it in the list where you want it to appear.
| | 05:35 | So I'm going to move Headline to the top,
Slide Title below that, Subhead's in
| | 05:39 | the right spot, and Bullet is after Subhead.
| | 05:42 | So there you have it.
| | 05:43 | Now we've got Paragraph Styles all
captured and recorded and tagged to our
| | 05:47 | placeholder text here.
| | 05:48 | That way in the future if we ever need
to change our mind and make the text look
| | 05:52 | a little bit different or give it a
different theme, we don't have to edit every
| | 05:55 | single slide, we just need to edit
those styles and it will ripple through the
| | 05:58 | entire document and update that.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Overriding master page items| 00:00 | Now that we've our master pages setup
for a title page and a content page, it's
| | 00:05 | now time to learn how to edit these
pages now that you've got them applied.
| | 00:09 | So here I have my B master page
applied to Page 2 and I want to change the
| | 00:14 | slide title for Page 2, I want it to be a
real slide instead of just this placeholder text.
| | 00:18 | So I want to double click
on that text edited, right?
| | 00:22 | Well, the problem is that
text is on a master page.
| | 00:25 | I need to go to the
master page to edit that text.
| | 00:28 | So this is the B master page.
| | 00:29 | If I actually go to the B master page
though and edit that text and change the
| | 00:32 | slide title text here to say
User Generated Content or something.
| | 00:36 | Well, that means every page that has the
B master page applied to it is going to
| | 00:40 | now be labeled User Generated Content.
| | 00:43 | So the trick is I want to be able to
customize just this one particular page.
| | 00:47 | To do that, you need to learn
how to override master page items.
| | 00:50 | If you look you'll see there is a dotted line
around this text frame instead of a solid line.
| | 00:56 | That indicates that that is
currently located on the master page.
| | 00:59 | If it was on this page, it
would just have that solid line.
| | 01:02 | To override an item, you hold down the
Command key and the Shift key on the Mac
| | 01:07 | or Ctrl+Shift on Windows and click
on the item that you want to override.
| | 01:11 | You'll see when I did that, I Command
+Shift-clicked or Ctrl+Shift-clicked
| | 01:14 | on that page item, it changed from
the dotted line to the solid line, and I
| | 01:17 | now have the local copy of this, if you
will, the ability to edit that text directly.
| | 01:23 | I'm not affecting the master page content.
| | 01:26 | I have overridden it for this page only.
| | 01:28 | So I'll type in User Generated Content
and I'll hit the Escape key to lock that
| | 01:34 | in and switch to the regular Selection tool.
| | 01:37 | So there I have customized this one slide.
| | 01:40 | Same thing with the
subhead and these bullet points.
| | 01:43 | That again is master page content.
| | 01:46 | So I want to override this text
frame as well, so I can edit it directly.
| | 01:50 | Again, Command+Shift-click or Ctrl+
Shift-click on that text frame there, and
| | 01:54 | you'll see that I get the bounding box
being a solid line, indicating that that
| | 01:58 | is now a frame on this actual page.
| | 02:00 | So we can change the Subhead and
call that JPEG Magazine, JPG Magazine.
| | 02:06 | Select this text here and customize that.
| | 02:10 | Community submits photos to be judged or
whatever point I'm trying to make there.
| | 02:19 | So that's overriding master page items
so that you can edit them locally on the
| | 02:24 | page that you are wanting to edit.
| | 02:26 | Same thing with the title slide.
| | 02:28 | If I double click on Page 1, that text
frame, title slide, is actually on the
| | 02:32 | master page A right now.
| | 02:34 | If I want to override this, I'll
Command+Shift-click or Ctrl+Shift-click.
| | 02:38 | That brings that up to this local page here
and we'll call it Digital Publishing Trends.
| | 02:43 | Again, hit Escape to get out of this
Text Selection tool and go back to the
| | 02:47 | regular Selection tool there.
| | 02:48 | So that's going to make it a lot
easier to customize and edit each individual
| | 02:52 | page once you've got your
template master pages in place.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Duplicating and moving pages| 00:00 | So there is not a lot of pages in this
slide presentation yet, so we're going to
| | 00:03 | go ahead and start duplicating
pages and moving them around.
| | 00:06 | I'll give you a couple
of tips on how to do that.
| | 00:08 | Best place to do this type of
activity is in the Pages panel itself.
| | 00:11 | You see each page is represented by a thumbnail.
| | 00:14 | If you Ctrl-click or right click if
you have a two button mouse on an actual
| | 00:17 | page thumbnail, you get a contextual
menu that's relevant to pages here.
| | 00:21 | We're going to go ahead and choose the
Duplicate Spread command, and that goes
| | 00:24 | ahead and inserts the page
at the end of the document.
| | 00:28 | Now, that may not be where you want it.
| | 00:30 | We'll talk about that in a second.
| | 00:31 | So for instance, let's just go ahead
and duplicate a couple more of these.
| | 00:35 | If you select Multiple, so if I hold
down the Command key on the Mac or the Ctrl
| | 00:38 | key on Windows I can select multiple
pages and duplicate all them in one step.
| | 00:43 | So go ahead and right click or Ctrl-
click and say Duplicate Spreads, and I've
| | 00:46 | got those duplicates here.
| | 00:48 | Now, if I want to insert a title slide right
after Page 4, so it's going to be Page 5 here.
| | 00:55 | If I Ctrl-click or right click on the
actual page thumbnail of the title slide
| | 00:58 | and choose Duplicate Spread, well,
it goes to the end of the document.
| | 01:01 | That's not where I wanted it.
| | 01:02 | So I'm going to go ahead and undo that.
| | 01:04 | Instead, you can pull out copies of
any page and put them where you want them
| | 01:08 | as you create them by holding down the
Option key on the Mac or the Alt key on Windows.
| | 01:13 | So I'm going to select Page 1
here just by clicking on it.
| | 01:16 | Option+Drag or Alt+Drag on Windows,
start pulling out a copy, and then just
| | 01:20 | decide, look for the black line
where you want to insert that.
| | 01:22 | I want to put it before Page 5, so I'm
going to see the black line there and
| | 01:26 | then just put the hand to the left of Page 5.
| | 01:29 | When I let go, that's where
that title slide gets inserted.
| | 01:32 | So you can control where the duplicate
pages go as you create them by holding
| | 01:37 | down that make better key.
| | 01:38 | Hold down the Option key on the Mac or
the Alt key on Windows as you drag a page
| | 01:41 | around the Pages panel.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Redefining a paragraph style| 00:00 | You can see in this document
I've actually got the start of my
| | 00:03 | slide presentation going.
| | 00:04 | I've got an opening slide and I've got
an end slide and I've got some slides in
| | 00:08 | between that I'm starting
to populate and customize.
| | 00:11 | I decide that you know, I want my
subheads not to be black, I want them to be
| | 00:15 | kind of a dark maroon color.
| | 00:17 | So I'm going to go ahead and select this text
and double click on it to make it selected here.
| | 00:21 | I'm going to go to my Swatches panel
and I'm going to choose this dark red, or
| | 00:25 | maybe this medium red as the text color.
| | 00:27 | I'll go ahead and hit the Escape key
to exit out of the text frame there.
| | 00:31 | You are like great, that looks wonderful.
| | 00:33 | I like that for my Subhead look and feel.
| | 00:35 | But then I go to Page 3, and you'll see
that Subhead is still black. Now why is that?
| | 00:40 | Because Page 2 here,
where I customized this text.
| | 00:43 | I'm going to go ahead and just click once in it.
| | 00:45 | What we did is what InDesign calls a
local style override, where this JPG
| | 00:50 | Magazine Subhead here, it was getting
its appearance through the Subhead style
| | 00:53 | that we had created and
applied to that paragraph.
| | 00:56 | You'll notice now that it has a
little + sign at the end of the style name.
| | 01:01 | That's your clue that
you've done a local override.
| | 01:03 | You've applied formatting to this
text that was not included in the
| | 01:07 | original style definition.
| | 01:09 | What you want is to have this local
change be added to the style definition
| | 01:14 | and have every paragraph that's
been tagged with the Subhead style to
| | 01:17 | automatically update itself.
| | 01:18 | There is a real quick easy way to do this.
| | 01:20 | I'm going to go ahead and just click
anywhere in the paragraph that has this
| | 01:24 | local formatting change, and I'm going
to hold down the entire left-hand side of
| | 01:27 | my keyboard, Command+Option+Shift or on
the Windows machine Ctrl+Alt+Shift, and
| | 01:32 | type R for Redefine.
| | 01:34 | So Command+Option+Shift+R, Ctrl+Alt+Shift+R
and watch what's going to happen.
| | 01:38 | The Subhead loses its + sign.
| | 01:40 | If I go to another page, double-click,
you'll see that every paragraph that's
| | 01:46 | been tagged with the Subhead style has
been changed to that colored version now.
| | 01:51 | Now, you may have noticed something else,
all the bullets changed as well, and
| | 01:56 | that's because the Bullet style
happens to be based on the Subhead style.
| | 02:00 | So any attribute that the Bullet and
Subhead styles share, if I change the
| | 02:05 | definition of the Subhead style, that's
going to update the Bullet style as well.
| | 02:09 | So I want to just fix that really quickly.
| | 02:11 | I'll go ahead and triple click on this
paragraph and we're going to make the
| | 02:14 | bullet text black again, so that it's unique.
| | 02:18 | Again, I did this as a local style
override, so the Bullet style now shows a +
| | 02:22 | sign in the Control panel here. That's okay.
| | 02:25 | I'm going to go ahead and redefine
the Bullet style to match where my
| | 02:29 | cursor currently is.
| | 02:30 | What's that keyboard shortcut?
| | 02:31 | Command+Option+Shift+R,
Ctrl+Alt+Shift+R on Windows.
| | 02:35 | That redefines the Bullet style to
match my current selection and my current
| | 02:39 | insert point there, and you'll see that
all the bullets now are back to being black.
| | 02:43 | So it's very fluid, very quick and
easy to go ahead and change your mind.
| | 02:48 | Just go ahead and click in a paragraph
that you want to change, change it any
| | 02:51 | way that you want to.
| | 02:52 | Then if you want to make that change
ripple through your entire document,
| | 02:56 | just redefine the style by
using that keyboard shortcut,
| | 02:59 | Command+Option+Shift+R, Ctrl+Alt+Shift+R.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating navigation buttons| 00:00 | You can see we've got our slide
deck here pretty well developed.
| | 00:04 | We've got content in all the pages, and
we've got this navigation bar at the bottom.
| | 00:08 | But right now these buttons really aren't
buttons, they are just static little triangles.
| | 00:12 | Let's turn them into buttons that
actually do something when the user is going
| | 00:14 | to click on them in the final output piece here.
| | 00:17 | So if you remember these buttons live
on a master page, not on the actual page
| | 00:21 | itself, so let's go to the master page, the A
master page by double clicking on the Page icon.
| | 00:25 | That takes us to the A Title master
page here, and that's where I can actually
| | 00:30 | select these triangles here.
| | 00:32 | I am going to go ahead and zoom in on
those, just select these two triangles
| | 00:35 | here and do a Command+(+) or Ctrl+(+) on
windows, couple of times, just to get them
| | 00:40 | in our view a little bit bigger. Okay.
| | 00:42 | So I'll deselect by clicking off of
them and then we'll select this right
| | 00:45 | pointing button, and we are going
to bring open our Buttons panel.
| | 00:48 | We'll go ahead and click in this light gray
strip here where buttons is to expand that.
| | 00:53 | If you don't have the Buttons panel on
your screen, it can be found under Window
| | 00:56 | > Interactive > Buttons.
| | 00:58 | That will bring open this panel.
| | 01:00 | In InDesign CS4 anything can be a button.
| | 01:03 | You just click on it and go to the
Buttons panel and turn on the Normal state by
| | 01:08 | clicking on the word Normal in the panel.
| | 01:10 | This is now a button with just one
visual appearance for the Normal state here.
| | 01:15 | If you wanted to have a rollover
appearance, so that when you mouse over to
| | 01:18 | change its color, or change its
opacity, or add a drop shadow, whatever you
| | 01:22 | wanted to do, you can do that too.
| | 01:24 | Just by clicking on the word Rollover,
you've now created a second version of
| | 01:28 | this graphic, which can be edited
independently of the first version.
| | 01:33 | So I have got the Rollover
state selected in the Buttons panel.
| | 01:35 | I'm going to go to my Swatches panel
while I have got this selected here,
| | 01:38 | and we'll scroll down.
| | 01:40 | I'm going to use this light pink.
| | 01:41 | Right now that's the Stroke color, so
I'm going to switch those two and take the
| | 01:46 | Stroke back to None.
| | 01:47 | I switched them by clicking that little double
arrow between the Stroke and Fill proxy there.
| | 01:52 | I want the Stroke to be None.
| | 01:55 | So all I'm doing is changing the Fill
color to pink in the Rollover state.
| | 01:59 | Go back to the Normal state where it's gray.
| | 02:01 | So I can actually click back and forth
and see the two appearances in the actual
| | 02:06 | document page there.
| | 02:07 | Now, when the user clicks on the button,
we actually want something to happen,
| | 02:11 | and that's when you
assign Actions to this button.
| | 02:14 | There is an Event you can choose.
| | 02:15 | The default is On Click.
| | 02:16 | I actually like to change it to On Release.
| | 02:19 | I typically find that in most
applications the event is usually happening after
| | 02:24 | you let go of the mouse button, so
I'm going to change that to On Release.
| | 02:27 | On the plus button here under Actions, I'm
going to choose Go to Next Page. There it is.
| | 02:33 | I'm done.
| | 02:34 | Before we move on we might
want to name this button.
| | 02:37 | It's not necessary, but if you take this
to PDF, you actually can have names and
| | 02:41 | tooltips on your interactive elements
here, so instead of Button 9, I'm going to
| | 02:45 | call this Next Page, to
give it a descriptive name.
| | 02:50 | Left pointing arrow here, again,
we're going to turn it into a button by
| | 02:52 | clicking on the word Normal, and the
word Rollover in the Buttons panel.
| | 02:57 | We'll go back and choose the Fill
proxy in the Swatches panel here and choose
| | 03:01 | that light pink again for the Fill color.
| | 03:03 | I do not want the Tint to be 50%, so
I'm going to click on that Tint label
| | 03:07 | and make that 100%. There we go.
| | 03:10 | So there is Normal, there is a Rollover.
| | 03:13 | Again, I got the solid pink
as the Fill for my over state.
| | 03:16 | We want this button to do something.
| | 03:17 | We're going to choose the Event of On Release.
| | 03:20 | It's already there.
| | 03:22 | For the Button Action, we want it to go
to the previous page, and there I did.
| | 03:27 | I have nice interactivity,
didn't have to write any code.
| | 03:30 | We're going to go ahead
and give this button name.
| | 03:32 | You guessed it, Previous Page. That's it.
| | 03:37 | I'm pretty much done with
creating my interactive buttons here.
| | 03:40 | I've given them Rollover appearances and
given them Button Actions as well. Okay.
| | 03:45 | So let's zoom back out, Command+0 or Ctrl+0
to fit the spread to the window here.
| | 03:50 | We'll go ahead and close the Swatches
panel and the Buttons panel, and we do
| | 03:54 | have to fix one minor issue here.
| | 03:56 | So these buttons that I just
created here were on the A master page.
| | 04:00 | The way I created this document, I
had created another master page by
| | 04:05 | simply duplicating the A master page and
customizing a little bit to be the content slide.
| | 04:09 | Now, these triangles here, those are
not buttons yet, those are just the
| | 04:14 | triangle still, the paths that we have
duplicated from duplicating the master page.
| | 04:17 | So I'm going to go and delete these.
| | 04:18 | I'm going to select them and Delete them.
| | 04:20 | Pretty easy problem to fix.
| | 04:21 | We're going to go to the A master page,
we'll select these two by holding down
| | 04:26 | the Shift key and clicking on both of them.
| | 04:28 | I'm going to copy them, Edit > Copy.
| | 04:31 | We'll go to the B master page.
| | 04:33 | Rather than pasting-- Pasting always
pastes what's ever on the clipboard and
| | 04:37 | puts it in the middle of your view.
| | 04:39 | In this case it would be the middle of the
page because it's centered in the screen here.
| | 04:42 | Instead, you are going to
use Edit > Paste in Place.
| | 04:45 | It's got its own keyboard shortcut.
| | 04:46 | It's Command+Option+Shift+V or Ctrl+Alt+Shift+V,
or just Edit > Paste in Place,
| | 04:51 | and it pastes those buttons exactly in
the same location on the B master page,
| | 04:56 | as they were on the A master page.
| | 04:57 | So now I have got the same buttons with
the same behaviors applied to every page
| | 05:02 | in my document, because all these pages
in this document are either using the A
| | 05:06 | master page or the B master page.
| | 05:07 | So there you have it.
| | 05:09 | Very simple to create interactive buttons.
| | 05:12 | These will become interactive buttons
when you export this either to as a PDF
| | 05:16 | file or as a Flash file that would
be played back in the Flash player.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Customizing the buttons for the first and last slide| 00:00 | There is one nice refinement I'm
going to make to my slides here.
| | 00:04 | We have buttons here at the bottom
of every page that I can click on.
| | 00:08 | So this goes to the next page,
and this goes to the previous page.
| | 00:11 | But on the first page, I don't
really want this button to look like it's
| | 00:15 | clickable, because there is
no other page before this.
| | 00:18 | Same thing with the last page, if I
scroll through the bottom of the Pages
| | 00:21 | panel, and double-click on the last
page, I want that last button here to be
| | 00:26 | disabled as well because there
is no other page to click to.
| | 00:28 | And you could have this maybe
perhaps loop or just be dim.
| | 00:32 | So I'm going to go to choose the dim option.
| | 00:33 | So how do we do that?
| | 00:34 | Well, I can't select these buttons yet,
because these buttons live on the master page.
| | 00:39 | So what I want to do is override this
version of the button just for this page.
| | 00:44 | If you remember how to override a
master page item, you hold down Command+Shift
| | 00:47 | or Ctrl+Shift on Windows and click on
the page item that you want to override.
| | 00:52 | I now have a version of this
graphic that is specific to this page.
| | 00:56 | To make this look like a disabled button, I'm
going to go ahead and convert it from a button.
| | 01:01 | You can see in the Buttons panel here.
| | 01:02 | It's got a rollover state, and it's got that
button action, back to just being a regular object.
| | 01:07 | I can do that very quickly at
the bottom of the Buttons panel.
| | 01:10 | There is a single button here that
says Convert Button to an Object, go
| | 01:13 | ahead and click on that.
| | 01:14 | It gives me a warning saying are you
sure, this is a destructive, are you going
| | 01:17 | to get rid of this information?
| | 01:18 | Yes, that's what I want.
| | 01:19 | Go ahead and click OK.
| | 01:20 | Now the Buttons panel is blank.
| | 01:21 | It's empty, because it's just an object now.
| | 01:23 | It hasn't been a button anymore.
| | 01:25 | When I click on that, it's just a triangle.
| | 01:27 | So I'm simply going to go to my
Swatches panel and I'm going to Tint it back
| | 01:30 | even further, maybe 20%.
| | 01:33 | To give it the illusion when I de-select
that this is a dim button.
| | 01:37 | And then in the final output the PDF or
the SWF, when I mouse over that, I'm not
| | 01:41 | going to get a little hand
indicating that it can be clicked on.
| | 01:45 | So let's go repeat that for the first page.
| | 01:47 | We'll go ahead and collapse
the Swatches panel temporarily.
| | 01:50 | We'll scroll up in the Pages
panel and go to the first page.
| | 01:53 | We want to override this first
button to create a local copy of that.
| | 01:58 | So Command+Shift, Ctrl+Shift on
Windows, click on it to override it, and
| | 02:02 | bring up the local copy.
| | 02:04 | Again, we are going to go the Buttons panel
and say hey, convert that back to an object.
| | 02:07 | So it's not a button
anymore, go ahead and click OK.
| | 02:10 | And we'll go ahead and collapse the
Buttons panel now by clicking on its gray
| | 02:14 | strip here, and reopen Swatches,
and we'll Tint that back 20%.
| | 02:18 | I'm going to go ahead and click to de-select it.
| | 02:20 | Now what the effect all we have done
is created these dimmed inactive button
| | 02:25 | appearances so that they can't
be clicked on in the final output.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Applying page transitions| 00:00 | When we click on these buttons at the
bottom of the page to advance to the next
| | 00:03 | slide we may want a nice slide
transition to happen between the pages, instead
| | 00:09 | of just being a very
abrupt shift between each page.
| | 00:11 | It's very easy to do that now in InDesign CS4.
| | 00:14 | We're going to right-click or Ctrl-click
on a page thumbnail inside the Pages
| | 00:17 | panel, say the first one here.
| | 00:19 | Now we're going to choose a new command
here called Page Transitions, and then Choose.
| | 00:23 | This will bring up a nice little
dialog where it actually gives you a little
| | 00:27 | preview of what these
twelve page transitions are.
| | 00:31 | If you mouse over them, you'll
actually get a little animated preview.
| | 00:33 | So you can kind of get an idea of what
would happen in the actual final output.
| | 00:37 | Now it turns out that eleven of these
transitions are supported in PDF, so
| | 00:43 | they'll show up in Acrobat Reader, or
Adobe Reader, or Acrobat Professional.
| | 00:47 | There is only one transition
here that is not supported in PDF.
| | 00:50 | It's SWF Only, so a Flash Player Only, and
that's labeled as such the Page Turn one.
| | 00:54 | And we'll talk about that later on.
| | 00:56 | So you can kind of get an
idea of which one you want.
| | 00:58 | I'm going to choose the Wipe Transition.
| | 01:00 | The default direction is down.
| | 01:01 | We'll be able to change that in just a moment.
| | 01:03 | So I'll choose Wipe by clicking the
Radio button, and by default this check box
| | 01:07 | is chosen the Apply to All Spreads option.
| | 01:10 | Most of the time that's what you want.
| | 01:11 | Every once in a while you will have
different page transitions for each page or
| | 01:15 | between groups of pages.
| | 01:16 | But for this, we're going to keep it simple
and have every page have the same transition.
| | 01:19 | So when this is chosen, you didn't have
to worry about selecting all the pages
| | 01:23 | before you went to the dialog.
| | 01:25 | It's just going to do it no
matter what page you had selected.
| | 01:27 | I'm going to go ahead and click OK.
| | 01:29 | And when you do that, the Page
Transitions panel pops open, so you can actually
| | 01:32 | edit some of the attributes.
| | 01:34 | The default Direction is Down.
| | 01:35 | If you want the Wipe to be to the right,
I'll choose a different direction here,
| | 01:39 | so I'll choose Right.
| | 01:40 | That will update the preview, and if
you mouse over the preview, you'll get a
| | 01:43 | little preview of that
different direction there.
| | 01:45 | Now when you are using the
panel that is page-specific.
| | 01:48 | I only have page 1 targeted here.
| | 01:51 | So there is this button here at the bottom of
the Pages panel that says Apply to All Spreads.
| | 01:55 | This is a way to keep all your
pages in sync in terms of all having the
| | 01:59 | same page transition.
| | 02:00 | So I'm going to go ahead and click
that button, and when all the pages are in
| | 02:04 | sync that button is dimmed out. It's gray.
| | 02:06 | So that's your visual clue that
certain pages are not having the same Page
| | 02:10 | Transition effect, now they do, because
we've synchronized them. And that's it.
| | 02:14 | When we export this to SWF or PDF,
those page transitions will be honored and
| | 02:18 | will become part of the final exported piece.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding hyperlinks| 00:00 | At the end of this presentation,
there is a list of links that the viewer
| | 00:04 | might want to be able to click on to get
information about the examples within this presentation.
| | 00:09 | It's pretty easy in InDesign to
create hyperlinks to either external
| | 00:12 | websites, or links to other documents,
other pages within a current document,
| | 00:15 | or even in emailing.
| | 00:17 | I am going to show you how
to create a URL hyperlink.
| | 00:19 | It's pretty easy, just double-click on
the text that we want to create a link for.
| | 00:23 | So in this case, this text Issuu, and
we're going to bring up in the Hyperlinks
| | 00:26 | panel, and if you know the
URL that you want to link to.
| | 00:29 | There is a URL field here
that you can just click in.
| | 00:32 | The http:// is already entered in there for you.
| | 00:35 | So we'll just complete the address.
| | 00:37 | We'll do www.issuu.com.
| | 00:40 | That's the website for Issuu, and I'll
just press Enter, and that applies that
| | 00:45 | URL to that selected text and
created a hyperlink for me in the process.
| | 00:49 | Now you'll see by default it puts a
visible black rectangle around the linked text.
| | 00:56 | I don't want that appearance,
some people might, some people don't.
| | 00:59 | So I'm going to go to the flyout
menu for Hyperlinks, or you can just
| | 01:02 | double-click on the link itself.
| | 01:05 | If you were to going to go to the
flyout menu, you would choose Hyperlink
| | 01:07 | options, I'll go ahead and double-click.
| | 01:08 | It's just easier and change the
Appearance from Visible Rectangle to
| | 01:13 | Invisible Rectangle.
| | 01:15 | You'll still get the cursor feedback
in the SWF or the PDF that you exported
| | 01:19 | in InDesign, when you roll over this you'll
get the finger indicating that it's clickable.
| | 01:23 | So I don't feel like I need that black
rectangle around there, obscuring the text there.
| | 01:27 | Get up to this one more time for scribd.
| | 01:29 | Go ahead and select that text.
| | 01:31 | We'll go to the Hyperlinks panel,
we'll just go ahead and complete that URL
| | 01:34 | www.scribd.com, press the Return key,
and again it gives us that rectangle.
| | 01:41 | So I'm going to go and double-click
and choose Invisible Rectangle again, and
| | 01:46 | go ahead and click OK.
| | 01:47 | Now for some reason, you wanted your
hyperlinks to have a particular appearance
| | 01:51 | other than a rectangle around them,
you want them to be a different color, or
| | 01:54 | have an underline around them.
| | 01:55 | You could actually create a
Character Style and automatically apply that
| | 01:58 | Character Style to your
hyperlinks to get that appearance.
| | 02:01 | We're going to skip that for now, but
just know that that option is there, and
| | 02:04 | that's why that's available under
the Edit Hyperlink dialog box here.
| | 02:07 | We'll go ahead and click
OK, and there we have it.
| | 02:10 | We have now got hyperlinks, the rest
of these were already created for you.
| | 02:13 | In this particular document, it's
just step and repeat, select the text
| | 02:17 | and complete the URL.
| | 02:18 | If it's a complex URL, like this one
here is a little long one, you can just go
| | 02:22 | to your Browser, navigate to the page
or turn your link to, and just copy that
| | 02:26 | URL to the Clipboard and just
paste it into the URL field here.
| | 02:29 | But other than that, simple user
interface for adding hyperlinks to your
| | 02:34 | presentation here, and then when you
export them, they'll be clickable in
| | 02:37 | the final output.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Testing hyperlinks before exporting| 00:00 | For those of you who have been using
InDesign for a while and already knew that
| | 00:03 | you could create hyperlinks in a
document there is a nice new feature in CS4
| | 00:07 | that you may not be aware of, and that
is you can actually test your hyperlinks
| | 00:10 | before you actually go through
the process of exporting to PDF.
| | 00:14 | It can be a real time-saver instead of
getting your PDF testing the hyperlinks,
| | 00:17 | and the PDF realizing there is a
mistake and having to go back and fix them in
| | 00:21 | InDesign and then re-export the PDF.
| | 00:23 | Here's how you do it, very quick and easy.
| | 00:25 | Just go ahead and click in the text
where you want to test, and actually you
| | 00:28 | don't even need to do that.
| | 00:28 | You can just do it directly from the
Hyperlinks panel, but just to be sure
| | 00:31 | that you've got the right hyperlink assigned
to the text that you think you've got here.
| | 00:35 | So Sharing, under Issuu, yes, that's
been tagged with the Issuu hyperlink.
| | 00:39 | I'm going to go ahead and test
that link itself by using the Go to
| | 00:43 | destination button.
| | 00:45 | So that's this right pointing arrow at
the bottom of the Hyperlinks panel, and
| | 00:48 | if it's an internal link, it will just
turn to the page within this document, or
| | 00:53 | open up the external document if it's
representing another InDesign document.
| | 00:57 | If it's an external URL like a
hyperlink, if you click that button, then that
| | 01:01 | will actually launch your
default Browser and test the URL there.
| | 01:05 | So here you see it correctly open up the Issuu
website, so we know that that is a valid URL.
| | 01:10 | We can go back to InDesign
and just test another one here.
| | 01:13 | We'll click in scribd and see that's got
the correct hyperlink associated with that.
| | 01:17 | There is the tooltip telling me what
the URL is and again, just to be sure,
| | 01:21 | we'll test it by clicking the Go to
destination button, and again, just a nice
| | 01:25 | quick way to verify your hyperlinks
before you actually go to the trouble of
| | 01:29 | exporting to your final format,
whether that be PDF or Flash.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exporting to PDF| 00:00 | Ok, we are done!
| | 00:02 | We are ready to export our presentation
in its final form, in this case to a PDF.
| | 00:07 | We've done all the design work, all the
production work, we've wired up all the buttons.
| | 00:11 | They are clickable.
| | 00:11 | They take the person to next page.
| | 00:13 | We have these nice page transitions
going to happen between each page-click and
| | 00:16 | we have our hyperlinks all hooked up as well.
| | 00:18 | It's now ready to export to the
final format and test the final result.
| | 00:22 | For those of you who've been following
along and wondering why you didn't see
| | 00:25 | the page transitions inside InDesign,
it's because you do need to do that final
| | 00:29 | export step to see in its finished form.
| | 00:31 | You get the Preview panel in the
Page Transitions panel and you can click
| | 00:36 | in between the button states, but to
really experience the document in its
| | 00:39 | presentation mode, if you will, you
should do a file export to either PDF or SWF.
| | 00:44 | In this case we are going to do PDF.
| | 00:45 | So, File > Export, and from our
Format list we'll choose Adobe PDF.
| | 00:50 | We'll give our presentation a
name, so Trends_Presentation.pdf.
| | 00:54 | Go ahead and save that to the desktop,
and what we'll do here is bring up the
| | 00:59 | Export PDF dialog box once we click OK.
| | 01:01 | We are going to do to all the pages of course.
| | 01:03 | A couple of things that you want
to make sure you've got turned on.
| | 01:06 | Compatibility at the top, I tend
to go with Acrobat 8 (PDF 1.7).
| | 01:10 | You get a lot of file size
optimization benefits if you go that route.
| | 01:14 | You can certainly choose an earlier
flavor of PDF if you need to for some
| | 01:18 | reason, but I'm just going to go with PDF 1.7.
| | 01:21 | You want to turn on the View PDF after
Exporting, so you can see the finished
| | 01:24 | result when you are done.
| | 01:26 | And then here is the most important part.
| | 01:28 | You need to turn on the interactive stuff.
| | 01:30 | Yours might be turned off by default.
| | 01:32 | So make sure you turn on Hyperlinks,
and you turn on Interactive Elements.
| | 01:36 | If you don't turn on Interactive Elements you
will not get the clickable part of the button.
| | 01:39 | You'll get the appearance of the normal state.
| | 01:41 | But you won't get the rollover effect
and you won't get the button actions if
| | 01:45 | you don't turn these on, and you
also won't get the page transition.
| | 01:47 | So these two must be checked.
| | 01:49 | I am going to go ahead and hit the
Export button, and it does its thing.
| | 01:53 | If you push the blue bar, it
goes faster. Just kidding.
| | 01:56 | That's a joke.
| | 01:57 | And then it opens up in Acrobat
Professional or Adobe Reader depending on what
| | 02:01 | you have in your system
when the export is finished.
| | 02:03 | Let's go ahead and test our presentation here.
| | 02:05 | If I mouse over the first button,
remember we made that dim because we are on
| | 02:10 | the first page, so I don't get the finger here,
I mouse over that button. Hey, look at that.
| | 02:14 | It changes to the pink, rollover effect.
| | 02:16 | I get the finger letting me know it's clickable.
| | 02:17 | I go ahead and click, it goes the
next page and that's expected, but wait a
| | 02:22 | minute, what about that page
transition, I don't see the wipe.
| | 02:25 | In order to see the page transitions in
a PDF, you need to be in the Full-screen
| | 02:29 | mode of either Adobe
Reader or Acrobat Professional.
| | 02:33 | So there's a way to get
this into Full Screen mode.
| | 02:35 | The easiest way is just Command+L or
Ctrl+L on Windows, and that's the keyboard
| | 02:39 | shortcut to put yourself into Full Screen mode.
| | 02:41 | That hides all the Acrobat or Reader
Chrome, all that UI and puts your document
| | 02:46 | as large as it can be to fit the screen.
| | 02:48 | If it's not the same proportion, that black
bar is the remaining portion of the screen.
| | 02:53 | Now when I click the button to go to the
next page, you will see that wipe transition.
| | 02:59 | So what's nice about the PDF flavor of
export, compared to say the Flash flavor
| | 03:03 | of export is the PDF kind of serve dual purpose.
| | 03:06 | It has a presentation mode,
put it in Full Screen mode.
| | 03:09 | You can use as a presentation, but it
also has a really high quality print
| | 03:13 | experience if you want your
audience to be able to print your handout.
| | 03:17 | And we'll just click through and pretty
straightforward, it's your presentation.
| | 03:20 | Now, you can also use your arrow keys.
| | 03:22 | You don't need the buttons.
| | 03:23 | If you are driving your own
presentation, you can just use the Right Arrow.
| | 03:25 | It says if you are clicking that
right button, just depends if you are
| | 03:29 | sending this presentation to someone else and
they don't know about that keyboard shortcut.
| | 03:32 | There is the Links page.
| | 03:34 | As we rollover each link, we
get the link with the w in it.
| | 03:37 | It gives you the tooltip
letting you know what the URL is.
| | 03:40 | And of course, if you click on one of
these links, because we are on Acrobat,
| | 03:43 | Acrobat gives you a security warning
saying hey, you are trying to access the
| | 03:46 | Internet from this document. Do you want this?
| | 03:48 | You can go ahead and click Allow.
| | 03:50 | You can also remember this action for
this site, so that any time you click on
| | 03:53 | this link again, you won't get
intercepted by this security dialog.
| | 03:56 | I'll go ahead and click Allow, and
it switches over to your Browser and
| | 04:00 | takes you to that link.
| | 04:01 | I can go back to the presentation.
| | 04:04 | At any point, if you want to exit the
Full Screen mode, you just hit the Escape
| | 04:07 | key on your keyboard and you are back
into the normal viewing mode of your PDF.
| | 04:12 | So there you have it, Export PDF,
make sure you turn on those Interactive
| | 04:15 | Elements, and when you are in Reader or
Acrobat Professional and you want to see
| | 04:20 | those presentation transitions, make
sure you enter the Full Screen mode.
| | 04:24 | Command or Ctrl+L to get yourself there.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
4. Advanced PDF PresentationsSetting initial view options with Acrobat Professional| 00:02 | Okay, we are looking at a
presentation that was authored in InDesign and
| | 00:05 | exported to PDF and it's got the
interactive buttons and the rollovers that you
| | 00:10 | can click to go to the next page.
| | 00:12 | And in the InDesign document, we did
specify page transitions, but as you can
| | 00:17 | see, as we click the buttons to go
from page to page, I'm not seeing the wipe
| | 00:21 | transition that's supposed to be in this PDF.
| | 00:23 | And as a remainder, that's because in
PDFs you only see the page transition
| | 00:28 | effects when the PDF is in the
Full-screen mode of either Adobe Reader or
| | 00:32 | Acrobat Professional.
| | 00:34 | Now in InDesign, you cannot specify
the initial view for your PDFs when you
| | 00:39 | export them, but you can set the
initial view of the PDF if you use Acrobat
| | 00:44 | Professional to do so.
| | 00:45 | So here I have the PDF in Acrobat Professional.
| | 00:49 | We'll go to the File menu and choose
Document Properties, just down here.
| | 00:53 | It's also Command+D or Ctrl+D. This
will bring up the dialog where you can set
| | 00:58 | all sorts of options for the PDF.
| | 01:01 | Description, we can add metadata, add a
password on the Security tab and whatnot.
| | 01:04 | In the Initial View tab, that's what we
want to talk about here, you can choose
| | 01:08 | this checkbox that says
Open in Full Screen mode.
| | 01:11 | You can also set the default
magnification and Page view, so on the Page layout,
| | 01:16 | I want to see just one page, Single
Page and for Magnification, I want it to fit
| | 01:20 | the page to whatever size
screen the viewer has this on.
| | 01:24 | So there is our settings, Open in
Full Screen mode, set the layout and the
| | 01:27 | magnification, I'm going
to go ahead and click OK.
| | 01:30 | Now, in order for this to be preserved,
you need to save this PDF over itself to
| | 01:34 | capture those Initial View settings.
| | 01:36 | Let's go to File > Save As and I'm going
to go ahead and save it to the Desktop.
| | 01:40 | Since I'm on the Mac, I can just do Command+D
and that will take us to the desktop there.
| | 01:44 | If you are on Windows, you would have a
different dialog box and now you could
| | 01:46 | navigate to the desktop and so forth.
| | 01:48 | Initial_View_Start.
| | 01:50 | Let's go ahead and rename this Initial_View_End
and we'll go ahead and hit Save.
| | 01:54 | Okay, I'm going to close this
document and there it is on my Desktop.
| | 01:57 | I'm going to reopen it just by double clicking.
| | 02:01 | And because of security issues for
Acrobat and PDFs, it opens up this document
| | 02:06 | and says hey, this document is
trying to go on Full Screen mode.
| | 02:09 | That's because we set that in that initial view.
| | 02:11 | It says do you want to make
sure you really want to do that.
| | 02:15 | There are some potential security issues there.
| | 02:16 | So in this case, it's fine.
| | 02:18 | It's not a big deal.
| | 02:19 | I'm going to remember my
choice for this document.
| | 02:21 | Now that only sets this flag for the local
version of this document on your machine.
| | 02:26 | If you send this to someone else,
they will get this warning dialog box the
| | 02:30 | first time they opened the document as well.
| | 02:32 | But at least it's in their face.
| | 02:34 | You can say remember my choice for this
document, hit Yes and then as soon as we
| | 02:37 | do this, the document
will be in Full Screen mode.
| | 02:40 | All the UI for Acrobat or Adobe Reader
goes away and now, when I use my buttons
| | 02:45 | and actually click the button to go to
the next page, you see that nice wipe to
| | 02:48 | the right, page transition.
| | 02:51 | So there you have it.
| | 02:52 | You can have your document
open up in Full Screen mode.
| | 02:56 | I just approved that.
| | 02:57 | That checkbox is sticky.
| | 02:58 | Let's go ahead and close the document.
| | 02:59 | Let's reopen it again, double-click
and this time, because I turned on that
| | 03:04 | Remember my setting for this
document, I wasn't intercepted by that
| | 03:07 | security warning dialog box.
| | 03:09 | So there you have it, a way to make
sure you can see your page transitions
| | 03:13 | when you are viewing the PDF in Full
Screen mode, in either Adobe Reader or
| | 03:17 | Acrobat Professional.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding a button to enter Full Screen mode| 00:00 | When you use page transitions in an
InDesign document then export that to PDF,
| | 00:06 | those transitions are
honored in PDF, they work great.
| | 00:09 | But as a reminder, the only place you
see those transitions is when you have the
| | 00:13 | document in the Full Screen mode in
either Adobe Reader or Acrobat Professional.
| | 00:17 | We covered that in the last video.
| | 00:19 | I had to set the initial view for your
PDF by using Acrobat Professional and
| | 00:23 | setting the Initial View Options
in the Document Properties dialog.
| | 00:27 | This video is going to take a
different approach to solving that issue.
| | 00:29 | We are going to create a button that
the presenter can click on, on the actual
| | 00:33 | slide to put the document
in the Full Screen mode.
| | 00:36 | It's a little bit more
visual solution to the problem.
| | 00:39 | Let's begin by actually creating a button here.
| | 00:41 | We are going to draw some
artwork here and turn it into a button.
| | 00:43 | I'm going to get my Zoom tool, I'll
press the letter Z on my keyboard and I'm
| | 00:47 | just going to click and drag like that
to zoom in on that particular area, so we
| | 00:50 | can get nice and big.
| | 00:51 | And I'm going to go back to
my regular Selection tool.
| | 00:54 | I'll press the V key to go back
to the regular Selection tool here.
| | 00:58 | I am in the Preview mode currently.
| | 01:00 | I'm going to press the W key to go back
to the Normal view and now I can see the
| | 01:04 | guides and we are going to draw our shape here.
| | 01:07 | So I'm going to get my Rectangular
Frame tool, just click on that as a tool and
| | 01:11 | let's just draw a little
rectangle here like so, and looks good.
| | 01:17 | I am going to get my Selection tool
again and I'm going to increase the Stroke
| | 01:21 | Weight here to 3 points and I don't
want it be solid black, so we'll go ahead
| | 01:28 | and bring up our Swatches panel.
| | 01:30 | I'm going to give that Tint say 50%.
| | 01:32 | It's kind of matches the off state or the
normal state of the Triangle button here.
| | 01:37 | Okay, so we are going to
create a second rectangle.
| | 01:40 | I'm just going to go ahead and
copy this and edit and paste.
| | 01:43 | So Edit > Copy and then Edit >
Paste in Place, and that just gives a
| | 01:48 | second rectangle here.
| | 01:49 | I'm going to go ahead and grab this
corner handle and just stretch it out a
| | 01:52 | little bit to make it seem like hey,
when you click this button, it's going to
| | 01:55 | go in the Full Screen mode.
| | 01:56 | All right, so this button is
looking a little bit too big altogether.
| | 02:00 | So let's just bring it down a little bit
and make this part a little bit smaller
| | 02:05 | and okay, we are getting
some close to what I like.
| | 02:08 | Just tighten this up a little bit.
| | 02:09 | All right, in this particular rectangle,
we are going to have the tint be just
| | 02:13 | a little bit softer.
| | 02:14 | So I'll go back to the Swatches panel,
click on Tint, I've got my stroke proxy
| | 02:18 | chosen here, I'm going to make it 20% and
this obviously needs to be back behind there.
| | 02:23 | So I'm going to send it to back and that
could be under Object > Arrange > Send to Back.
| | 02:29 | Okay, so there is my normal state of
this button that I've created here.
| | 02:33 | I'll go ahead and select those
too by drag, selecting around them.
| | 02:37 | I'm going to go ahead and group
them, Command+G or Ctrl+G on Windows.
| | 02:40 | So now it's a single graphic here and
I'm just going to line it up so that the
| | 02:44 | vertical center has lined with the
vertical center of the Next Page icon, or
| | 02:49 | Next button here that we've got.
| | 02:51 | Okay, so that's looking good.
| | 02:52 | Let's turn it into an actual button now.
| | 02:54 | I'm going to go ahead and collapse the
Pages panel by clicking on the light gray
| | 02:58 | area next to the tabs and we'll go ahead
and open up the Buttons panel by double
| | 03:02 | clicking and let's turn this into a button.
| | 03:04 | I am going to click on the word Normal
in the Buttons panel and we are going to
| | 03:07 | give it a rollover appearance as
well by clicking on the word, Rollover.
| | 03:11 | We just want this button to look slightly
different when we go into the Rollover state.
| | 03:15 | So to edit this, I'm going to go ahead
and get my Direct Selection tool, that's
| | 03:18 | the A key on my keyboard and now I can
click exactly on the object that I want
| | 03:23 | to modify in that appearance state.
| | 03:26 | Now I don't actually want this
rectangle to be shown in the rollover, so I'm
| | 03:29 | just going to go ahead and delete it
and then I'm going to click on this
| | 03:31 | rectangle to select it and I
want its tint to be 100%, okay.
| | 03:37 | So that kind of indicates
that's the Full Screen mode.
| | 03:40 | So there's the Normal state, there's
the Rollover state for this button.
| | 03:43 | You kind of learn something new here
actually that the objects in each state
| | 03:47 | don't have to match.
| | 03:48 | You can have different shapes, a
different number of objects in each state and
| | 03:52 | all those objects can be edited independently.
| | 03:55 | Just use your Direct Selection tool to
select that particular object in that
| | 03:57 | state that you want to edit separately.
| | 03:59 | All right, so we got a Normal state
back here, just click on that to go back
| | 04:02 | to the Normal state.
| | 04:03 | Go back to our regular Selection tool
and now we just need to assign a button
| | 04:08 | action that's relevant to this.
| | 04:09 | I am going to give this button a name
that's a little bit more descriptive.
| | 04:12 | Instead of Button 9, I'm going to
call it Full Screen and On Click.
| | 04:17 | When the use clicks this, I want a
certain button action to work and the action
| | 04:21 | that's relevant here is called View Zoom.
| | 04:23 | It's not necessarily intuitive but it's
the last one here at the bottom of the list.
| | 04:28 | This is relevant to PDF export only.
| | 04:30 | It doesn't mean anything when
you export it to Flash or SWF.
| | 04:34 | So just for PDF options here, View Zoom.
| | 04:37 | And the default option for the
Zoom attribute here is Full Screen.
| | 04:40 | You can actually choose several others
here that are relevant to PDF, Fit to
| | 04:44 | Window, Actual Size and whatnot but a
Full Screen is the relevant option here
| | 04:48 | for this particular exercise. That's it.
| | 04:50 | I've got my button.
| | 04:51 | It's got its rollover and appearance
states here and I've got an On Click button
| | 04:55 | action of enter a Full Screen mode.
| | 04:58 | Now we just need to export this to PDF.
| | 05:00 | I'm going to go ahead and Fit
to Window, Command+0 or Ctrl+0.
| | 05:02 | I'm going to bring up the Export command,
File > Export, choose Adobe PDF from
| | 05:08 | the File Format, go ahead and give this a name.
| | 05:11 | I'll call it FullScreenMode.
| | 05:16 | To save it to the Desktop here, go ahead
and hit Save and again, the options we want.
| | 05:20 | Make sure Compatibility.
| | 05:21 | Again, I like to choose the
most recent version just for file
| | 05:24 | size benefits there.
| | 05:26 | You can certainly choose a
different earlier version if you wish.
| | 05:29 | I'm going to choose All of my pages
and most importantly, turn on Interactive
| | 05:34 | Elements to make sure I get my buttons.
| | 05:36 | The buttons won't work if you don't
have that turned on and I want to View the
| | 05:38 | PDF after I've exported it
to make sure this all works.
| | 05:41 | I'm going to go ahead and hit Export.
| | 05:42 | It takes a second to spit this out.
| | 05:45 | Now when it's done, Acrobat Professional,
at least, on this machine will launch.
| | 05:50 | It might be Adobe Reader on your machine,
depending on what you have installed.
| | 05:53 | You can see it's opened up.
| | 05:55 | It's not in Full Screen mode but I have
got my nice little button here and when
| | 05:58 | I roll over it, it gives me the
rollover behavior to kind of give me a visual
| | 06:02 | clue that maybe clicking on
this will do something interesting.
| | 06:05 | And of course, when I click on that,
I'll get this dialog box saying are you
| | 06:09 | sure you want to do this? Yes.
| | 06:10 | Remember my choice for this document so I
don't have to see this dialog box again.
| | 06:13 | I'm going to go ahead and
click Yes. And there it is.
| | 06:16 | My button works to go into
Full Screen mode. Kind of cool.
| | 06:19 | When I mouse back over it, again I
get the rollover and it's actually
| | 06:22 | an automatic toggle.
| | 06:23 | So if I click on that button again, it
takes me back to the Normal mode and just
| | 06:29 | approve that dialog box setting.
| | 06:31 | When I click on this button again, I
enter Full Screen mode without getting
| | 06:35 | intercepted with that
dialog again. So you have it.
| | 06:37 | Just a different way to solve the problem.
| | 06:38 | I like this method because it gives us a
nice visual button that the end-user or
| | 06:43 | presenter can actually click on and
it kind of points them in the right
| | 06:46 | direction that this document
even has this Full Screen feature.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding a tool tip to a button in Acrobat Professional| 00:00 | Here's our PDF presentation or
slide deck here that's been authored
| | 00:05 | inside InDesign or exported to PDF,
we are viewing this now inside
| | 00:07 | Acrobat Professional.
| | 00:09 | One of the things that you might want
to consider adding to your interactive
| | 00:12 | documents, to your presentations here
if you have Acrobat Professional, is some
| | 00:16 | descriptive tooltips.
| | 00:17 | So for instance, if I mouse over this
button, I do get the Rollover effect and
| | 00:23 | as long as I understand what the
graphic change means, then I'll know this is
| | 00:26 | a Full Screen button.
| | 00:27 | But we might want to actually give the
viewer or the reader of this document
| | 00:31 | some more information.
| | 00:32 | So you could provide a tooltip that
would show up on rollover when you pause for
| | 00:36 | a second over that button and tell
you what that button is actually for.
| | 00:40 | So to do that, you need to take
advantage of a tool that's not usually
| | 00:44 | visible by default.
| | 00:45 | It's called the Advanced Editing
toolbar and I'm going to go up here to the
| | 00:48 | toolbar at the top of my screen and
right-click or Ctrl-click anywhere on this
| | 00:52 | toolbar here and open up the Advanced
Editing option in the contextual menu that appears.
| | 00:58 | Inside of this new set of tools that
you have available now, when you click
| | 01:01 | on this particular tool here, the
Select Object tool and when you click on
| | 01:05 | that tool, it actually shows you some
overlays of the interactive elements
| | 01:09 | that are on the page.
| | 01:10 | So these are your two buttons.
| | 01:11 | If I click on this button here, and it
tells me that's the Full Screen button.
| | 01:14 | That's the name of the button that we
gave it inside InDesign when we were
| | 01:18 | creating the document in the first place.
| | 01:19 | If I double-click on this selected
object with this tool, it brings up the
| | 01:24 | Button Properties dialog, and right
there you'll see there is a Tooltip field
| | 01:27 | where you can type whatever message you want.
| | 01:29 | So I'm going to say Click to
enter Full Screen Mode and see Page
| | 01:37 | Transitions, because that's the
whole point of going into the full screen
| | 01:39 | mode for this document.
| | 01:40 | Then I'm also going to give them some
descriptive text of how to get out of
| | 01:44 | this Full Screen mode.
| | 01:45 | So press the Escape key, Escape key,
to exit Full Screen Mode. Great!
| | 01:55 | I'm going to go ahead and close this.
| | 01:57 | Let's go back to our regular Hand tool
and then when I mouse over this and pause
| | 02:01 | for a second, there's that custom
tooltip that we just add for that button.
| | 02:05 | You can add a tooltip to anything.
| | 02:07 | You can drag out a little hot zone or
click any particular image or object and
| | 02:11 | if it doesn't already have some sort of
descriptive tooltip information, you can
| | 02:15 | just simply add that by creating
your own custom tooltip message there.
| | 02:19 | So it's kind of handy.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating bookmarks in InDesign| 00:02 | When I'm sent a PDF from someone
especially very long PDF, I often will take a
| | 00:06 | look in the Bookmarks pane to see if
there are some navigation links there for
| | 00:10 | the actual document that's been sent to me.
| | 00:12 | I am here in Acrobat
Professional, same thing for Adobe Reader.
| | 00:15 | On the left hand side, there is a
Bookmarks button and when you click that, that
| | 00:19 | opens up the Bookmarks pane.
| | 00:20 | You can see this particular document
has several bookmarks listed here and they
| | 00:25 | just happened to be the name of the
slides and you can just click on either one
| | 00:29 | of these to navigate to that specific page.
| | 00:31 | So if there is a particular section you
are interested in like what are all the
| | 00:34 | links to all the example websites.
| | 00:36 | Okay, there is a Links page and there it is
and I can just jump to that page directly.
| | 00:39 | So the question is where do
these bookmarks come from?
| | 00:43 | Do they just magically appear?
| | 00:44 | Is there some way to get Acrobat to
create them automatically? Yes or no.
| | 00:48 | If I have got a PDF that doesn't have
them, I can use Acrobat Professional to
| | 00:53 | add bookmarks using the user interface
inside Acrobat Professional, but one of
| | 00:57 | the advantages of exporting the PDF
from InDesign is you can actually create
| | 01:01 | the bookmarks in InDesign and then include them
in the PDF when you export it out of InDesign.
| | 01:07 | So let's go learn how to do that.
| | 01:10 | I'm going to go ahead and close this
PDF and here we are back in InDesign.
| | 01:13 | Here is this document where
we want to add these bookmarks.
| | 01:17 | To get started, you need to open up
the Bookmarks panel and that's under the
| | 01:20 | Window menu, under Interactive,
Bookmarks and right now this document
| | 01:24 | doesn't have any bookmarks so the panel is
empty but it's very easy to create a bookmark.
| | 01:28 | All you do is select either the object or the
text range that you want to put an anchor in.
| | 01:34 | Another name for a bookmark is kind of
a text anchor or an object anchor and it
| | 01:37 | just becomes a reference that you can
then use later on to target that anchor.
| | 01:41 | I am going to get my Text tool and
select this text, Digital Publishing
| | 01:45 | Trends and I'm going to go the
Bookmarks panel and just click the New button
| | 01:49 | and by default, the name of the bookmark is
the text that you actually have highlighted.
| | 01:54 | Now most of the time, you will just go
ahead and leave it as is, but if it was a
| | 01:58 | really long paragraph, you may
want your bookmark not to be so long.
| | 02:01 | You might give it a shorter name.
| | 02:02 | Or in this case, since it's the title
slide, I'm just going to go ahead and
| | 02:05 | call it the title slide.
| | 02:07 | Hit Return and that locks in that name
for that bookmark, or that text anchor
| | 02:12 | and you can see a little Anchor
icon there in the Bookmarks panel.
| | 02:15 | Okay, we are ready to go to the next page.
| | 02:16 | So I'll just double-click on Page 2 in
the Pages panel and here, I have got a
| | 02:20 | pretty long headline here, so I'm just
going to choose the key aspects of it.
| | 02:24 | I am going to make Print
and Web the text selection.
| | 02:26 | I'm going to go ahead and click the New
button in the Bookmarks panel and there
| | 02:29 | it is, there is my anchor. I'm done.
| | 02:31 | I'm going to go to Page 3 and we'll do
Complimentary Cross Media, select that,
| | 02:35 | create a bookmark for that.
| | 02:37 | Again, press Enter to be done
and just double-click on Page 4.
| | 02:40 | I'll go Web to Print, select that,
New Bookmark, hit Enter or Return to
| | 02:46 | lock that in, on page 5.
| | 02:48 | Now here is something interesting, the
main title of this slide is Print plus
| | 02:53 | Digital and if I look at page 6, that's
the main title for this slide as well.
| | 02:57 | So it's kind of like two children
slides here, one talking about magazines and
| | 03:01 | one talking about newspapers.
| | 03:02 | So you can actually create sub-bookmarks
or child bookmarks if you will.
| | 03:08 | So let's create the main category first.
| | 03:11 | We are going to go Print plus Digital,
we'll go ahead and select that text and
| | 03:14 | click the New button in the
Bookmarks panel to create Print plus Digital.
| | 03:17 | I'm going to press Enter to lock that in.
| | 03:20 | By default if you have no bookmark
selected, then the next bookmark you create
| | 03:25 | just gets created as a top level bookmark,
but if you actually select a bookmark
| | 03:28 | first in the Bookmarks panel just
by clicking on it to highlight it.
| | 03:32 | And now I'm going to select this
other text, Newspapers, and click the New
| | 03:36 | button in the Bookmarks panel.
| | 03:37 | It becomes a child of the parent row here.
| | 03:41 | So Newspapers is now a sub-bookmark of
Print plus Digital and this -- you can
| | 03:45 | kind of visualize, this is how they
are going to be listed in that Bookmarks
| | 03:48 | panel inside the PDF when you view it
in Adobe Reader or Acrobat professional.
| | 03:53 | So you are kind of building exactly
what the user experience is going to be in
| | 03:56 | that panel, matching it in the
Bookmarks pane inside InDesign.
| | 04:00 | Okay, let's go to the next slide, Page
6 and here we are going to go select the
| | 04:04 | text, Magazines and again, I want this
to be a child of Print plus Digital so
| | 04:08 | that's still selected.
| | 04:09 | I'm going to click the New button and
now Magazines becomes a child of Print
| | 04:13 | plus Digital, press Enter
to lock that in and I'm done.
| | 04:16 | All right, deselect.
| | 04:17 | Let's go back to Page 7 and we'll
go back to a top level bookmark, User
| | 04:22 | Generated Content, go ahead and click the
New button again, Enter and lock that in.
| | 04:26 | Just got a couple more pages to go.
| | 04:28 | On Long Tail, I don't have
to highlight all the text.
| | 04:30 | I'm just going to highlight the word
Long Tail, make that the bookmark, clicking
| | 04:34 | the New button, hitting Enter.
| | 04:35 | You can see it's a pretty fast process here.
| | 04:37 | I'm just going to select Sharing,
New, Enter and two more to go.
| | 04:42 | Page 10, Rich Interactive Documents,
hit New Bookmark for that, press Enter and
| | 04:47 | one more on Page 11, Links and click New.
| | 04:51 | Now you might choose to call this
Examples instead, again you can customize it.
| | 04:56 | It doesn't have to be a match, I'll just
leave it at Links for now and there I have it.
| | 04:59 | I have actually created these bookmarks.
| | 05:02 | Now, it turns out that bookmarks
inside InDesign, inside the panel are
| | 05:06 | actually useful here too.
| | 05:08 | You can actually use the bookmarks to
navigate within an InDesign document as well.
| | 05:13 | So imagine you would have 200 page
document, right, and these page thumbnails
| | 05:18 | while descriptive by giving you a
little preview of what the page is, sometimes
| | 05:22 | they are so small that you can't
distinguish one page from another.
| | 05:24 | Like if you look at page 5 and page 6,
now I can't really tell what's the
| | 05:29 | difference between those two pages?
| | 05:30 | I mean this one has a little bit more
text but the image looks pretty same.
| | 05:33 | So what you can do is use the
bookmarks as a way to kind of name pages if you
| | 05:38 | will, and create a really quick
way to navigate from page to page.
| | 05:41 | So you don't have to remember what
content is on a specific page number.
| | 05:45 | You don't remember it by number.
| | 05:46 | You can now associate a
name to that page instead.
| | 05:50 | So anytime you want to jump around to a
specific page based on a name, you just
| | 05:54 | double-click on the name of the page.
| | 05:56 | So if I double-click on User Generated
Content in the Bookmarks panel, it takes
| | 05:59 | me to that text anchor and puts the
cursor at the start of that anchor.
| | 06:03 | This is the page I wanted to be on, I
just do Command+0 or Ctrl+0 to Fit to
| | 06:06 | Window and I've jumped
right to that specific page.
| | 06:09 | The nice thing about bookmarks as you
are designing in InDesign, if you are ever
| | 06:13 | moving these pages around, the
anchor updates itself automatically.
| | 06:17 | It knows that the anchor is associated
with a specific piece of text or wherever
| | 06:22 | that text ends up on
whatever page it belongs to.
| | 06:25 | So if Page 7 suddenly was moved
to the end and it became Page 12,
| | 06:30 | double-clicking on User Generated
Content would still take you to that page.
| | 06:33 | In this case, it would be Page
12 if I'd actually done that.
| | 06:36 | So pretty useful internally to
InDesign as well, but now that we've got the
| | 06:40 | bookmarks created in the Bookmarks
panel inside InDesign, we can now export
| | 06:45 | them, File > Export to PDF and we'll
choose Adobe PDF for a file format.
| | 06:49 | I will go ahead and name these
Bookmarks.pdf and we'll save it to our Desktop
| | 06:54 | and let's go ahead and click Save.
| | 06:57 | And one important checkbox here.
| | 06:59 | It's an option in your Export PDF
dialog box, there is an additional checkbox
| | 07:03 | here called Include Bookmarks.
| | 07:05 | Make sure you turn that on if you want
those to appear in that Bookmarks panel
| | 07:09 | inside Adobe Reader or Acrobat Professional.
| | 07:12 | Let's go ahead and click Export.
| | 07:13 | We'll view the PDF after exporting, so
we can see our result. It does its thing.
| | 07:17 | Once it's finished exporting, it will
open in Reader or Acrobat Professional and
| | 07:21 | we can click on the Bookmarks panel
here to open it up, the button there and
| | 07:25 | there is all those bookmarks that we
created in the InDesign document, they are
| | 07:29 | now included in the final PDF and
become a very easy way to navigate within a
| | 07:34 | long document inside Adobe Reader or
Acrobat Professional. So very useful.
| | 07:40 | That's how you create and include
bookmarks in an exported PDF out of InDesign.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Making a button to go to a specific page in a PDF| 00:02 | In this version of our digital
document we want to have a slightly different
| | 00:05 | navigation scheme, where people can
click on specific buttons here to go to a
| | 00:10 | specific page in the PDF.
| | 00:12 | We have been using these buttons here
at the bottom to go just to the next page
| | 00:16 | or the previous page, and that's kind
of nice for just a basic linear flow from
| | 00:20 | left to right or backwards.
| | 00:21 | But here I want the user to be able to go
to the specific example that interests them.
| | 00:25 | So we want to turn each one of these
things into buttons and create a go to page
| | 00:30 | action that tells which page the
button should go to when it's been clicked.
| | 00:34 | So let's go try setting this
up and see if there is an issue.
| | 00:36 | Let's click on the first one here, and this
is going to be a button that goes to Page 2.
| | 00:41 | We can go double click on Page 2 to
see that's the page we want it to go to.
| | 00:45 | So yes, there it is.
| | 00:47 | So let's turn this group of
objects here into a button.
| | 00:50 | To do that, let's go to our Buttons panel.
| | 00:52 | We'll go ahead and expand that to bring it open.
| | 00:53 | If it's not open on your end, then you
would just go to Window > Interactive
| | 00:56 | and choose Buttons.
| | 00:58 | To turn it into a button, we just click on the
word Normal and we click on the word Rollover.
| | 01:02 | Now, this is what I want the
Rollover appearance to look like, the Normal
| | 01:05 | appearance actually.
| | 01:06 | I want the buttons to look like they are
being lit up as you mouse over them, so
| | 01:10 | I'm going to change them the initial
Opacity of the Normal state to 25%.
| | 01:14 | Real easy to do that.
| | 01:15 | In the Control panel, there
is a little Opacity field here.
| | 01:18 | We can just click on this little icon
to select all the text in that field.
| | 01:22 | We'll type in 25% and hit Enter, and now
I've got a really nice Rollover effect,
| | 01:26 | where it's dim when we click on the
Rollover state, we can see that that's going
| | 01:29 | to be lit up as they mouse over it. Great!
| | 01:32 | Next step is to assign a Button Action
to this so that when the user clicks on
| | 01:37 | it, it does something
interesting, like go to page.
| | 01:40 | Oh, there is the issue.
| | 01:42 | We're exporting this document as a PDF,
and this particular Button Action is
| | 01:47 | only supported by the Flash Player.
| | 01:48 | So if I'm exporting to PDF, this action
isn't going to work for our final output.
| | 01:54 | That's okay.
| | 01:54 | We have a workaround.
| | 01:56 | We can use something call Go To Anchor instead.
| | 01:59 | Now, Go To Anchor is kind of a
slightly different term to referencing Text
| | 02:04 | Anchors or Object Anchors that you
can create with the Bookmarks panel.
| | 02:07 | If you've never done that before, let's
just take a quick detour and show you that.
| | 02:11 | I'm going to go back to the Window menu,
over to Interactive, and choose Bookmarks.
| | 02:15 | Now, this document already has a
bunch of bookmarks created in it already.
| | 02:19 | It's very easy to create a bookmark.
| | 02:21 | All you do is you select the text or
object that you want to create an anchor for.
| | 02:26 | So we'll just do this one real quick.
| | 02:27 | I will select this
Digital Publishing Trends text.
| | 02:30 | It's a matter of just clicking the
New button in the Bookmarks panel and
| | 02:34 | it creates an anchor.
| | 02:35 | You can now reference that anchor as a
Button Action or in other parts of the
| | 02:40 | interface here, and this is going to
know that this particular anchor was
| | 02:44 | created for Page 1, because
that's the page we're on right now.
| | 02:46 | So I'm going to go ahead and undo that
because we don't need that particular
| | 02:50 | anchor, we've already got all the
anchors I need here, and we'll just go
| | 02:52 | ahead and deselect that.
| | 02:53 | Let's go back to our button and the
anchor we've created for Page 2 here is.
| | 02:59 | Let's just double check, Print and Web.
| | 03:01 | If I rollover that, I actually get a
little tooltip telling me which page that
| | 03:04 | anchor is associated with.
| | 03:06 | So if you ever get stuck later on when
you're starting to choose which anchor
| | 03:09 | you want to assign to a button, having
the Bookmarks panel open is a good way to
| | 03:13 | kind of just double check your
work before you make your choice.
| | 03:16 | Let's go back to the Buttons panel.
| | 03:18 | We've got our button selected.
| | 03:19 | We've got Go To Anchor, Go To
Text Anchor as our Button Action.
| | 03:23 | The Text Anchor we really want to
choose is Print and Web. Great!
| | 03:28 | Under the Zoom we actually have some
options for when you export this to PDF.
| | 03:32 | We're going to change that Zoom from its
default value, Inherit Zoom, to Fit In Window.
| | 03:36 | We want to make sure the whole
slide or the whole page is seen in the
| | 03:39 | final result there. That's it.
| | 03:41 | We've got our button all setup to
go to a specific page for PDF export.
| | 03:46 | Let's repeat this for all the other buttons.
| | 03:48 | Let's go ahead and click
the second button, the knot.
| | 03:51 | We want this to go to Page 4, and that
would be this page here, Web to Print.
| | 03:57 | So let's go back to our main page
here and select the button again.
| | 04:00 | To turn it into a button, we'll
click on Normal, click on Rollover.
| | 04:04 | Let's go back to the Normal state.
| | 04:05 | We want the Opacity to be 25%. Great!
| | 04:09 | We are going to add the Go To Anchor
Button Action, and for the Text Anchor
| | 04:14 | we'll choose Web to Print, and
change the Zoom to Fit In Window.
| | 04:18 | We'll do this a couple of times.
| | 04:19 | I won't do it for the whole document, but
we'll do one more just kind of a review.
| | 04:22 | Go to The New York Times.
| | 04:24 | We want this when we click on this
button to go to the newspapers page, that's
| | 04:29 | Page 5, and we can just double check to make
sure that it is indeed the page we want to go to.
| | 04:32 | Double click on Page 5, yup, there is The New
York Times page that we want to take a look at.
| | 04:36 | So let's go back to our title page,
there is the button that we want to turn
| | 04:40 | into something we can click on.
| | 04:41 | Click on Normal, click on
Rollover in the Buttons panel.
| | 04:44 | In the Normal state, we want the
Opacity to be 25% again. Great!
| | 04:50 | Choose the Button Action Go To
Anchor, and from our Text Anchor choose
| | 04:55 | Newspapers, because that's that
anchor that will take us to Page 5.
| | 05:00 | From Zoom we'll choose
Fit In Window again. Okay.
| | 05:02 | I'm just going to do those
three for this particular video.
| | 05:05 | You guys get the idea here, instead of
watching me just repeat the whole thing.
| | 05:09 | I do have one issue that I want to
address, and that is if I were to click
| | 05:14 | on this button in the final PDF,
that's going to take me to the page
| | 05:17 | associated with this.
| | 05:18 | So in this case it's Page 5.
| | 05:20 | But if I wanted to get back to the
main page, you see there is not a bunch
| | 05:23 | of buttons at the bottom that go all to a
specific page, I have the previous and next.
| | 05:28 | But I want to be able to click on one button to
get me back to the homepage or the first page.
| | 05:33 | You can see I have got a placeholder
graphic here, this little home icon that I
| | 05:36 | want to be able to click on to go back
to that first page in the document so I
| | 05:40 | can choose any one of those other
thumbnails, if I want to go from a random way
| | 05:44 | of navigating in the document.
| | 05:45 | So these are great for linear and going
to the next page or the next page or the
| | 05:49 | previous page and so forth in a linear fashion.
| | 05:52 | Having a home button to go back to the
first page is going to give me a really
| | 05:55 | quick easy way to jump back and
forth around in anyway I want.
| | 05:59 | So that icon is not on this actual page.
| | 06:02 | It's on the master page applied to this page.
| | 06:05 | You can see that on Page 5
it's got a B master page.
| | 06:08 | So let's go edit the B master page by double
clicking on the thumbnail for the B master page.
| | 06:14 | There is that little house icon.
| | 06:15 | Let's turn it into a button by clicking
on the word Normal in the Buttons panel.
| | 06:19 | Clicking on Rollover.
| | 06:21 | We want to change the Rollover
appearance, so we'll go to the Swatches panel.
| | 06:24 | I'm just going to choose this pink
color and change the Tint back to 100% to
| | 06:29 | give it a different appearance.
| | 06:30 | Click on Normal to go back to the Normal state.
| | 06:33 | Then for the action, we
want it go to the first page.
| | 06:37 | I don't have to use an anchor in this
example, because PDF does support the
| | 06:40 | notion of Go To First Page and Go To
Last Page when you're creating these Button
| | 06:43 | Actions within InDesign.
| | 06:45 | So we'll Go To First Page and I'm done.
| | 06:47 | I want to change the Zoom to match Fit In
Window, so it matches all the other buttons.
| | 06:52 | I'm now ready to export this to a
PDF, just collapsing those panels.
| | 06:56 | Double click on Page 1 to go back to
Page 1, and we'll close the Bookmarks panel
| | 07:00 | just to get it out of the way.
| | 07:02 | Take a big breath, ready to export this.
| | 07:04 | File > Export, choose Adobe PDF,
and I'm just going to Save it to the
| | 07:08 | Desktop here real quick. All right, great.
| | 07:11 | I want to view the PDF after I have exported it.
| | 07:13 | I want to make sure I choose
Bookmarks Hyperlinks in Interactive Elements.
| | 07:17 | Again, that's going to give us the
buttons in our final PDF output, we've got to
| | 07:21 | make sure that's checked.
| | 07:22 | Go ahead and click Export, and in just
a second it will spit out that PDF and
| | 07:27 | launch it in either Adobe Reader or
Acrobat Professional, depending on what you
| | 07:31 | have on your machine.
| | 07:32 | So you can see these buttons are not
really buttons, so they're still lit up.
| | 07:35 | That's because we didn't go and convert
all of those to buttons. That's okay.
| | 07:39 | These will give us that nice light up
experience when you rollover them, kind of a nice effect.
| | 07:44 | When I click on this icon, this button,
it takes me to that specific page, and
| | 07:48 | now I've got a way to go back to the
homepage by clicking on the home button in
| | 07:51 | the bottom right hand corner.
| | 07:53 | So I can just go back and forth in
anyway I want to in the document, or I can
| | 07:59 | use the next and previous buttons
if I want to do it that way instead.
| | 08:02 | So there you have it, a nice work
around to go to a specific page by using
| | 08:07 | the Go To Anchor Button Action in
conjunction with Anchors or Bookmarks
| | 08:12 | inside InDesign.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating "remote rollovers" with Show/Hide Button| 00:00 | In this version of our digital
document we want to hide certain pieces of
| | 00:06 | content until they've been revealed
by the presenter or by the viewer.
| | 00:10 | So in this case, this title slide
just has this single piece of text, this
| | 00:15 | Digital Publishing Trends.
| | 00:16 | But when I mouse over it, it turns out
that it is a button, and when I click it,
| | 00:19 | what's going to happen is that all
these other buttons are going to be revealed
| | 00:23 | by clicking this one.
| | 00:25 | So some people call this a remote rollover.
| | 00:27 | When you rollover this trigger object, it
causes some other target objects to change.
| | 00:32 | In this case they become visible.
| | 00:34 | Now, I have a secret button here, a hidden
button just below Digital Publishing Trends.
| | 00:38 | This is just a black rectangle
on top of a black background.
| | 00:41 | When I click on that, that
hides all those other buttons.
| | 00:45 | You will notice that when I mouse over
the area where there is buttons, there is
| | 00:47 | no rollovers here, so they really are
hidden and aren't considered part of the
| | 00:51 | content until they've been revealed.
| | 00:52 | So how do we accomplish this
using InDesign to create this effect?
| | 00:57 | Let's go see how to do that.
| | 00:59 | So here we are in the InDesign document,
and I have got all these buttons setup
| | 01:04 | to do individual things.
| | 01:06 | So when I click on this button,
it will go to a specific page.
| | 01:09 | So we've already got those authored.
| | 01:11 | The trick is we want to assign the
visibility of these buttons to show up when
| | 01:15 | we click on this text in the final PDF.
| | 01:17 | The very first important step you've
got to do is to tell these buttons to be
| | 01:23 | hidden initially when you
open the PDF at runtime.
| | 01:26 | So we're going to go ahead and Drag+Select.
| | 01:28 | I'm just going to click out here in the
gray area and just drag across all nine
| | 01:32 | of these buttons to select them all.
| | 01:34 | In the Buttons panel there is a flyout menu.
| | 01:37 | This is a little bit obscure, and it's
unfortunate that it's so hidden because a
| | 01:40 | lot of people miss it.
| | 01:41 | But from the flyout menu of the Buttons
panel is an attribute here called Hidden in PDF.
| | 01:46 | What that means is included in the PDF,
its going to be in the output, but it's
| | 01:51 | going to be hidden initially until
it's triggered by some other user action.
| | 01:55 | In this case it's going to be this button
click that we're going to create in just a minute.
| | 01:58 | So I want to choose Hidden in PDF.
| | 02:00 | Doesn't look like anything has
happened in the InDesign document, there is no
| | 02:03 | other clue in the UI that you've done this.
| | 02:06 | So you just kind of have to sneak a
peek underneath this flyout menu for the
| | 02:09 | Buttons panel and you can see it's
been checked now to be Hidden in PDF.
| | 02:12 | So you've got to know, it's
kind of a power user type feature.
| | 02:16 | Next, we need to create the link
between this object, which we want it to be a
| | 02:20 | button, and these
objects here that we've hidden.
| | 02:23 | So this is just a piece of text now.
| | 02:25 | Let's turn it into a button.
| | 02:26 | We'll click on the word Normal in the
Buttons panel, and we'll click on the word
| | 02:29 | Rollover to turn into a
button that's got two states.
| | 02:32 | We want that Rollover to get a slightly
different appearance, like we've been doing before.
| | 02:36 | So we'll just go ahead and double click
on this text, and change the Tint value
| | 02:41 | say to 20% in the Swatches panel here.
| | 02:45 | Hit Enter to apply that.
| | 02:46 | I'm going to hit the Escape key on my
keyboard to jump back to my Selection
| | 02:49 | tool, and then there is the
appearance for the Rollover of that text.
| | 02:52 | There is the Normal and there is the Rollover.
| | 02:54 | I've got the Normal state selected here.
| | 02:57 | I now want to use a specific
Button Action to pull off this effect.
| | 03:01 | I'm going to go ahead and name
this button Reveal All, just to keep
| | 03:06 | myself organized here.
| | 03:07 | So when I click on the Reveal All
button, bring all these other buttons up in
| | 03:10 | the current view there.
| | 03:12 | For the Action we're going
to choose Show/Hide Buttons.
| | 03:15 | What this does is reveals a list of
all the other buttons that are on this
| | 03:20 | particular screen, on this
particular page in the document.
| | 03:24 | Now, what we want to do is select all
the buttons that we want to hide initially.
| | 03:29 | Just for review, so if I click on these buttons
here, they all have a name, Home 05, Home 04.
| | 03:34 | These are names that I gave these
buttons in the document that if you're
| | 03:38 | following along you will see.
| | 03:39 | When you click on these
buttons, they've got names already.
| | 03:41 | So it's Home 01 through 09 is
kind of the naming structure there.
| | 03:45 | So I go back to this Trigger button
that I want to use to hide all of them.
| | 03:48 | I just want to select all the Home 02,
03, 04, and so forth, through 09.
| | 03:53 | I'm just holding the Command key to
select discontinuously, so you can skip
| | 03:58 | items in the row there.
| | 03:58 | So Command-click or Ctrl-click on Windows,
all the buttons that you want to grab
| | 04:03 | and change their status of.
| | 04:05 | Then what we're going to do is we're
going to click on this Show button.
| | 04:08 | So on click of Digital Publishing Trends
show all of the selected buttons. Awesome!
| | 04:16 | Now, we want to have a way to hide all
these buttons again, in case I want to
| | 04:19 | get myself reset to the initial state here.
| | 04:22 | So to pull that off, I'm just going to
create kind of an invisible button, if you will.
| | 04:25 | I'm going to grab a Rectangle tool here
in my Tool panel, and I'm just going to
| | 04:30 | drag out a black rectangle that
I'll turn into a button as well.
| | 04:34 | Click on the Normal state in the Buttons panel.
| | 04:36 | I don't need a Rollover appearance here,
because I want this to be kind of secret.
| | 04:39 | I'm going to change the
name of the button to Hide All.
| | 04:45 | For this Button Action, we're going to tell it
to Show/Hide Buttons again. It's kind of nice.
| | 04:50 | InDesign remembers the last
selection you had in this button list.
| | 04:54 | So my home buttons are still selected,
so what I want to do is turn on the Hide
| | 04:59 | option for the selected buttons.
| | 05:01 | That means when I click on this button, hide
all these other buttons up here in the top row.
| | 05:06 | So little kind of weird to get used to
in terms of the interface here inside
| | 05:10 | InDesign, but once you kind of
understand the mechanics here.
| | 05:13 | The tricky part is to make sure you
give your buttons meaningful names.
| | 05:16 | When you create a new button, it's
just called Button 1, Button 2, Button 3.
| | 05:19 | You're going to find that
that's not very helpful.
| | 05:21 | You really want to give your buttons
specific and unique names so you can
| | 05:25 | identify them later on when you're targeting
them in various Button Actions. All right.
| | 05:28 | So this document is ready to export to PDF.
| | 05:31 | Let's go preview our work.
| | 05:33 | Command+E or Ctrl+E for File > Export,
or you can choose File > Export from the
| | 05:37 | menu, and we're going to go ahead and
choose Export to PDF, and we'll go ahead
| | 05:42 | and name this ShowHide, just to
keep ourselves organized. Great!
| | 05:48 | All the options should be set
already, but just making sure.
| | 05:51 | Bookmarks, Hyperlinks,
Interactive Elements, yes.
| | 05:53 | View the PDF after exporting
it, go ahead and click Export.
| | 05:57 | If everything is done right, what we
should see when this PDF opens up is we'll
| | 06:00 | just see the black background with
Digital Publishing Trends. Perfect!
| | 06:03 | We don't see those initial buttons here.
| | 06:06 | We want to do the big reveal.
| | 06:08 | As the presenter I want to control
when those things appear, so I want to use
| | 06:12 | the Show/Hide Button Action here.
| | 06:14 | By clicking this button, I get those
buttons to appear and they all work individually.
| | 06:18 | It's all great.
| | 06:19 | So if I click that, it takes me to that page.
| | 06:21 | If I click the home button, it
takes me back to this page here.
| | 06:24 | Then I have that secret reset button
basically, and it gives me the finger when
| | 06:28 | I rollover that little area.
| | 06:30 | When I click on that, that
hides all my buttons again.
| | 06:33 | So you can do some pretty amazing
things with this Show/Hide Button
| | 06:37 | Action inside InDesign.
| | 06:38 | It's your building block to do
what is commonly referred to as remote
| | 06:43 | rollovers in interactive PDF.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
5. Creative Effects for PresentationsAdding a drop shadow| 00:00 | If you're like me, every once in a
while you're going to be asked to put
| | 00:03 | together a slide deck for someone
else, and more often than not, you just
| | 00:06 | get sent images that you had no part in
creating, and you try to make the best of them.
| | 00:11 | So when you're getting a collection of
images from Photoshop and Illustrator and
| | 00:15 | maybe just JPEGs or whatever, they may
or may not have the appearance that you
| | 00:19 | want in your final slide deck already.
| | 00:22 | So these images here, they have a
reflection built into them, the artist put
| | 00:26 | them in the Photoshop file, and this is just
to place JPEGs, so that effect is already there.
| | 00:31 | This image here, I want it to make it
pop-off a little bit off the background
| | 00:35 | and look like it's floating above there.
| | 00:37 | So normally you would create a Drop Shadow.
| | 00:39 | What a lot of people don't realize is
that you do not need to select this image
| | 00:43 | and edit it in Photoshop
just to add that Drop Shadow.
| | 00:45 | You can do that directly in
InDesign, and it's very simple.
| | 00:49 | In the Control panel at the top,
there's this little Effects icon, this is
| | 00:52 | just a little shortcut menu for the Effects
panel, which is located under the Window menu.
| | 00:57 | Window > Effects, and there is this larger
panel that basically has all the same attributes.
| | 01:03 | There's the Effects icon
to kind of connect the two.
| | 01:05 | So let's close that.
| | 01:06 | If all you want is a very quick Drop
Shadow, you can just select any object,
| | 01:10 | choose the Effects icon, and pull down
the Drop Shadow, this will bring open
| | 01:13 | the Effects dialog.
| | 01:14 | You will need to turn on the Preview
checkbox if you want to see the result of
| | 01:18 | your work as you go.
| | 01:19 | This dialog box remembers the
last settings used, so it's slightly
| | 01:23 | different than the default.
| | 01:24 | The default Angle is the same here, 135 degrees.
| | 01:27 | I think the default Opacity is 75%.
| | 01:28 | I find that to be a little bit strong most
of the times, so I've changed it to 50 here.
| | 01:33 | But then you can also increase the Size
by using these spinners, clicking them
| | 01:37 | up or down to make them larger or smaller.
| | 01:39 | Then you can also choose the Offset
by using X and Y values there as well.
| | 01:43 | So I'm pretty happy with this effect,
we'll go ahead and click OK, and you
| | 01:46 | can see it's that easy to add a simple Drop
Shadow to your particular selected object.
| | 01:52 | There's all sorts of other effects
there that you can play around with.
| | 01:55 | You can add an Inner Shadow, a Glow,
a Bevel and Emboss, depending on what
| | 01:59 | you're trying to achieve.
| | 01:59 | You've got a lot of creative power there.
| | 02:02 | So this is just a simple one,
to create a simple Drop Shadow.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a reflection effect for placed images| 00:00 | Another popular effect in
presentations these days is this Reflection Effect,
| | 00:06 | where this image here would look like
its sitting on a shinny surface upright,
| | 00:09 | and then you get a nice
reflective surface effect.
| | 00:13 | I am a little jealous of keynote,
because it's just a simple checkbox to get
| | 00:16 | that effect in Apple Keynote.
| | 00:18 | But you can create the
same effect inside InDesign.
| | 00:20 | You don't have to actually select this
image and pop it over into Photoshop and
| | 00:23 | kind of create it there.
| | 00:24 | You can actually do it all
within InDesign without leaving.
| | 00:27 | So let's go ahead and begin and learn
how to create that Reflection Effect.
| | 00:31 | We're going to begin by copying this image.
| | 00:33 | Edit > Copy, and we're going to
paste a copy of it on top of itself.
| | 00:37 | That's the Paste in Place command.
| | 00:39 | So go ahead and do that.
| | 00:40 | It doesn't look any different, but
there's an exact copy on top of that.
| | 00:43 | Then I'm going to make sure that the
Anchor Point or the Transformation Point is
| | 00:48 | the center of the graphic, the
reference point there, which it is by default.
| | 00:51 | Then I'm going to right click on the
image and say Transform > Flip Vertical, so
| | 00:56 | it just flips it within itself.
| | 00:58 | Now I'm going to go ahead and move this down.
| | 01:00 | I'm going to hold down the Shift key
as I drag, so it says in alignment.
| | 01:03 | I'm going to snap it to the
bottom of that other image.
| | 01:06 | Then typically, there's a little subtle
gap there, so I'm going to just use my
| | 01:09 | Arrow key on the keyboard, my Down
Arrow and hit that twice, just to get a
| | 01:12 | little bit of a gap there.
| | 01:14 | Then what typically happens is you crop this.
| | 01:16 | So let's crop it about halfway, like so.
| | 01:19 | Then next we want to have it fade off.
| | 01:23 | Now, in Photoshop you would create
something like a layer mask and put like a
| | 01:26 | Gradient on the layer mask to
mask that off to transparency.
| | 01:29 | You can actually create the same effect,
same illusion in InDesign directly by
| | 01:34 | using something called
the Gradient Feather Effect.
| | 01:37 | It's located here under the
Effects icon in the Control panel.
| | 01:40 | It's also available in the
Effects panel, if you've got that open.
| | 01:43 | I'm going to chose Gradient Feather.
| | 01:45 | What's cool about Gradient Feather is
it's actually a nondestructive layer mask,
| | 01:49 | and it updates based on the shape of the frame.
| | 01:51 | So if I resize this frame, this
layer mask or this frame mask is going to
| | 01:55 | update itself as well.
| | 01:56 | So basically everywhere it's black,
it's going to be Opaque, 100% Opaque, and
| | 02:00 | everywhere it fades off to white here,
where that checkerboard is, that's
| | 02:03 | creating a transparency mask
for the content in that frame.
| | 02:07 | You can go ahead and customize this.
| | 02:09 | I'm going to change the Angle to 90
degrees just by typing 90 in the Angle
| | 02:13 | field, and there you can see
it's fading off the transparency.
| | 02:15 | You can also adjust where the fade off occurs.
| | 02:18 | So if I want to bring that in a little bit.
| | 02:19 | If I want to change the
midpoint, I can do that as well.
| | 02:22 | It's completely up to you.
| | 02:24 | You customize this as much as you want.
| | 02:25 | While I'm at it here, I'm going to go to
the Transparency label on the left hand
| | 02:29 | side of the screen here in the dialog
box, and I'm going to lower the overall
| | 02:32 | Opacity of the entire object,
typically it's not full force.
| | 02:36 | It's a little bit less Opaque than the
object that's being reflected, so I'm
| | 02:39 | going to take it down to
say 50%, hit the Tab key.
| | 02:43 | I have got the Preview checkbox turned
on, so I'm actually seeing my updates.
| | 02:46 | That's off by default, so
this is what you might be seeing.
| | 02:48 | Turn the Preview check box on so
you can actually see it in real time.
| | 02:51 | I am going to go ahead and click OK.
| | 02:53 | Like I said before, the
Gradient Feather is a dynamic effect.
| | 02:57 | So if I actually resize the frame,
the Gradient Feather actually
| | 03:01 | recalculates itself.
| | 03:02 | So you have a lot of creative
freedom here, nondestructive effects here.
| | 03:05 | You can update it anytime.
| | 03:07 | Speaking of updating, you may actually
want to use this effect on other objects.
| | 03:11 | Anytime you want to reuse a collection of
choices, we typically call that a style.
| | 03:16 | You record that as a style, you give it a
name, then you can apply it to other objects.
| | 03:20 | This would be an Object Styles.
| | 03:21 | So under the Window menu, I'm going to
pull down to Object Styles, and I'm going
| | 03:24 | to create a new Object Style
based on my selected object.
| | 03:27 | If I hold down the Option key on the
Mac or the Alt key on Windows and click on
| | 03:31 | the New button in the Object Styles
panel, this gives me a chance to name the
| | 03:35 | style as I create it.
| | 03:36 | Normally, we just create Object Style 1.
| | 03:38 | We want to name this Reflection.
| | 03:39 | So we hold down the Option or Alt key.
| | 03:41 | I'm going to apply it to my Selected
object as I create it. Yes, click OK.
| | 03:45 | There you have it.
| | 03:46 | Now, I'll pretend that I didn't have
the reflection on this particular object
| | 03:50 | here, I'll just give it an Object Style,
None, and you can see that effect goes away.
| | 03:54 | Then when I click on the Reflection style, it
automatically formats that for me, kind of cool.
| | 03:58 | Then the nice thing about this being
an effect applied to the objects in
| | 04:03 | InDesign directly as opposed to
rendering this effect in Photoshop is if I
| | 04:08 | duplicate this slide-- let's do a Fit To
Window, Command+O or Ctrl+O on Windows.
| | 04:12 | If I were to duplicate this slide in
InDesign, I may want to modify the text,
| | 04:17 | because it's a different slide on a
different subject, and I may want to update
| | 04:20 | the link to this particular image here.
| | 04:22 | I want my Reflection effect to update
automatically for the new version of
| | 04:26 | the graphic as well.
| | 04:27 | So let's see how easy that is.
| | 04:28 | Let's go to the Links panel.
| | 04:29 | There is the TimesReader graphic.
| | 04:32 | Let's go and select it just
to verify. Yes, there it is.
| | 04:35 | We're going to go ahead
and click on the Parent row.
| | 04:37 | This image is actually
used twice in the document.
| | 04:39 | So we're going to click on the Parent row.
| | 04:41 | This is a new feature in CS4,
InDesign CS4 where you can roll up multiple
| | 04:46 | instances of the same graphic into a
single row, so it doesn't take up as much space.
| | 04:49 | But if I twirl it down I can see
all the different versions of it.
| | 04:52 | I'm going to click on the Parent row
here and choose the Relink button at the
| | 04:56 | bottom of the panel, and we're going to
relink to a different item in the Links
| | 05:00 | folder here for this exercise project.
| | 05:02 | I'm going to choose FLYP.PDF
instead of TimesReader.PSD.
| | 05:06 | Go ahead and hit Open, and notice that
it updates the image in the mainframe but
| | 05:10 | automatically updates the
reflected image as well.
| | 05:13 | So very cool, easy way to create that
reflection technique, and it stays live
| | 05:18 | and editable at anytime
throughout your editing experience.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating the sense of a timeline with page transitions| 00:00 | Something you might want to consider
when you're creating a presentation is to
| | 00:05 | make sure you don't cram a slide
with a bunch of information, too much
| | 00:08 | information for people to
absorb while you are talking.
| | 00:11 | The other point too is that the slide
is supposed to be a visual backup to what
| | 00:14 | you are saying, not something that
someone is just going to be reading, and they
| | 00:17 | are not listening to you.
| | 00:18 | So here is a very simple example of
a slide and there is hardly any real
| | 00:23 | information here, this is
just to illustrate the point.
| | 00:25 | Even with just placeholder text,
there is a lot going on here.
| | 00:28 | What are you trying to communicate?
| | 00:29 | Are you trying to communicate that
there are four phases, that there are
| | 00:33 | specific things happening in each phase,
when the phases are scheduled to be occurred?
| | 00:37 | Now, you may just want to present
this information in a complete different
| | 00:40 | way, and take advantage of Page Transitions
to create the sense of time and a Timeline.
| | 00:45 | So you can build up to your flow of information.
| | 00:49 | So I'm actually going to delete this
slide in a second, but what we've done in
| | 00:53 | this particular document is taken
those bubbles, those pods if you will, and
| | 00:58 | duplicated that page, and enlarged
these pods like 200%, centered-in the screen
| | 01:03 | and then showed the next phase,
just a hint of it to the right.
| | 01:07 | So this is going to be phase one
obviously, this is going to be phase two, and
| | 01:11 | then we just lower the
opacity of this duplicate pod here.
| | 01:14 | So this is 15% opacity, this is 100%,
and then each subsequent page,
| | 01:19 | we just shift the next phase over the
phase that we are going to be talking
| | 01:23 | about on that active slide.
| | 01:24 | That becomes the center pod.
| | 01:26 | The phase that came before, and the phase
that comes after it is just 15% opacity.
| | 01:32 | We just kind of repeat that effect
until we get to all of the phases, and of
| | 01:35 | course the last phase doesn't
have anything to the right of it.
| | 01:38 | So again all we did is just simply
take the same concept that distribute that
| | 01:42 | over multiple slides, so that when the
viewer is looking at your slide, they
| | 01:47 | are just focusing on that one
particular point that you are talking about at
| | 01:51 | that point in time.
| | 01:53 | Then to communicate when these changes
are happening, we put our Transitions
| | 01:57 | slide in the middle to kind of
communicate that there is a Timeline, and then we
| | 02:01 | shift this and map these
phases over the sense of time.
| | 02:06 | This object here is just a
stroke with an arrowhead into it.
| | 02:09 | If I go to the Strokes panel, you can
kind of see that you can actually choose a
| | 02:14 | starting ornament at the end of any stroke line.
| | 02:16 | So it's just a really thick stroke
at 40 points with an arrowhead at the
| | 02:19 | end, and then there is just text
placed on top of that at different degrees
| | 02:24 | of opacity or tint.
| | 02:26 | So that's kind of
redistributing the content across slides.
| | 02:30 | Now, to create a more fluid flow
throughout the presentation, well let's go
| | 02:34 | ahead and export this right now and see what
it would look like without Page Transitions.
| | 02:38 | Let's go ahead and delete the first
slide, we don't need that anymore because
| | 02:41 | we've redistributed the
content across multiple pages here.
| | 02:44 | So I'm going to hold down the Option
key on the Mac, the Alt key on Windows.
| | 02:47 | I have got the Page 1 slide selected,
hold down the Option key or Alt on
| | 02:51 | Windows and hit the Delete key, and
that just deletes that page without
| | 02:54 | throwing up a the dialog box.
| | 02:57 | Let's export this to PDF,
Command+E or File > Export.
| | 03:00 | We'll choose PDF as our format, and I'm
going to say No Transitions, and we'll
| | 03:07 | save that to the Desktop and go ahead and save.
| | 03:08 | I'll go ahead and do all the
page range, and this looks good.
| | 03:13 | I'm going to choose Interactive
Elements, and Bookmarks, and Hyperlinks, View
| | 03:16 | PDF after exporting.
| | 03:17 | It's kind of my habit there, I've
got to go ahead and click Export.
| | 03:21 | Let's take this into Full Screen mode,
Command+L on the Mac, Ctrl+L on Windows,
| | 03:26 | and we'll just hit our Right
Arrow or the Page Down key.
| | 03:29 | You can see this is just a very harsh
transition, very subtle especially with
| | 03:32 | this placeholder text where the
placeholder text is same on every slide.
| | 03:35 | The only thing that's changed in this phase 1,
phase 2, which you guys get the idea here.
| | 03:40 | So I want to create a more
elegant transition of these slides.
| | 03:44 | So I'm going to Escape that to get out
of Full Screen mode, we'll close this
| | 03:48 | document, and jump back over to InDesign.
| | 03:51 | To create this more fluid flow, we are
going to use our Page Transitions panel.
| | 03:56 | Under the Window menu >
Interactive > Page Transitions.
| | 04:00 | For the first four slides, we want
them to slide to the left as a shift
| | 04:06 | from focus to focus.
| | 04:07 | So I'm going to select these four
slides by holding down the Shift key, and
| | 04:11 | clicking on the first one
and clicking on the last one.
| | 04:13 | For the transition, we want a Push
transition, and we want them to push to the left.
| | 04:18 | So each new pod is pushing the old pod to
the left, and getting it out of the way.
| | 04:22 | On this slide, when we switch to the
Timeline slide, we want the Timeline slide
| | 04:26 | to push this previous slide up out of the way.
| | 04:30 | So doing the transition and
changing focus a little bit.
| | 04:33 | So for this transition, we are going
to change it to Push, if I change the
| | 04:36 | direction from left to up.
| | 04:39 | Then the last slide, we want to
convey the sense of time again, we want the
| | 04:44 | Timeline to move from left to right.
| | 04:46 | So we are going to change the
transition from None to Push again, but this time
| | 04:51 | change the direction to the Right. Great!
| | 04:54 | So we have authored our transitions here.
| | 04:57 | Let's go ahead and re-export the document.
| | 05:00 | We'll do File > Export this time.
| | 05:01 | It's Command+E or Ctrl+E on Windows, and
let's say Transitions this time. Click Save.
| | 05:08 | We have got all the same options as before.
| | 05:10 | So we'll go ahead, and hit the Export option.
| | 05:12 | Again, we'll take this into Full
Screen mode, if you are using Adobe Reader
| | 05:15 | or Acrobat Professional, Command+L or Ctrl+L
on Windows to take that into Full Screen.
| | 05:20 | And now let's use our Page Down or Page
Up buttons to kind of navigate through,
| | 05:24 | and you will see the difference.
| | 05:25 | So that when it slides to left, you get
a nice sense of change from phase 1 to
| | 05:29 | phase 2, same thing with phase 2
to phase 3, phase 3 to phase 4.
| | 05:35 | Here, we are doing a transition of
concept, so introducing Timeline.
| | 05:39 | You might pause for effect as you are
presenting, and then the last slide here,
| | 05:43 | the Timeline moves in from left to right.
| | 05:45 | So hopefully, that gives you some
creative inspiration on how you can use
| | 05:49 | Page Transitions to convey meaning
and instead of just being gratuitous
| | 05:52 | effects, it can actually be used
to add value and information to the
| | 05:56 | presentation of your data.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
6. Creating an Interactive Mood BoardWhat we're going to build| 00:00 | All right, let's a took a look what we
are going to be building in this chapter.
| | 00:02 | We are going to building an
interactive mood board and for those of you who
| | 00:05 | don't know what that term is, it's a
style guide, a set of pages that show the
| | 00:10 | colors and fonts and imagery you might
be using for say a redesign, and in this
| | 00:14 | case it is a redesign of a magazine.
| | 00:16 | So, we are going to be seeing logo
studies and color palettes and fonts that
| | 00:20 | they want to use and whatnot.
| | 00:21 | We want to make this a little bit more
engaging than just a static set of pages.
| | 00:24 | We are going to be building this
throughout various videos in this chapter, and
| | 00:29 | then we are going to export
this in one of two flavors.
| | 00:32 | It's a PDF, an interactive PDF,
which is what we are seeing here.
| | 00:35 | Then an interactive Flash version that
would play back in the Flash Player as well.
| | 00:39 | And what's great about this is that you
can actually export both of these from
| | 00:43 | the same source file straight out of InDesign
without having to touch any other application.
| | 00:47 | So, here I'm on my PDF version and you
can see I have got the roll over buttons
| | 00:52 | for next and previous.
| | 00:54 | There is the page with the logo
studies and there is the page with final logo
| | 00:58 | and there is some descriptive text at
the beginning at the top of each page.
| | 01:01 | And this is a hyperlink to the actual
website, little tooltip there telling you
| | 01:05 | where it's going to go.
| | 01:06 | On this page we are seeing the color
palette that our directors thinking about
| | 01:09 | using for the magazine.
| | 01:11 | And in this particular display
these colors values might be a little
| | 01:15 | distracting, so we can actually turn those off.
| | 01:18 | And maybe I want to see the colors
with a black stroke around them because
| | 01:22 | sometime that alters the perception of the
color, and then we want to turn off those strokes.
| | 01:27 | This is all being done on this one page.
| | 01:29 | We are not switching to a different
page here, or just changing the content on
| | 01:33 | this page with these what
we call remote rollovers.
| | 01:36 | So kind of a fun way to make the mood
board a little bit more interactive.
| | 01:40 | Let's check out the last page here.
| | 01:41 | Here is the fonts that the
person is thinking about using.
| | 01:45 | What's kind of fun about this page is
when you roll over, you actually see the
| | 01:47 | typeface reversed out.
| | 01:49 | So white against a black background.
| | 01:51 | You can actually click on the name of
the font to see the rest of the characters
| | 01:55 | and numerators inside that particular face.
| | 01:59 | If you click on the characters,
you actually make them disappear.
| | 02:02 | So we can actually go and turn all these
on for each of the fonts, just kind of fun.
| | 02:07 | And then we have a master toggle
switch here that can turn all of them off or
| | 02:10 | all of them back on.
| | 02:11 | So kind of neat way to engage and have
a little bit more fun in an interactive
| | 02:16 | version of your mood board
instead of just the static version.
| | 02:19 | Now what's nice about the PDF version is
that it's a very nicely printable design.
| | 02:25 | All right, so you can send the PDF, they
have an interactive experience with there.
| | 02:29 | But if they want to print out a
guy, they can certainly do that.
| | 02:32 | Let's switch over to the Flash version,
and you will see the look and feel is
| | 02:36 | pretty much identical.
| | 02:38 | We have a couple added features
that are not in the PDF version.
| | 02:41 | One of them is this
interactive page curl, page turn effect.
| | 02:45 | So I can actually
interact with the pages that way.
| | 02:47 | That's not supported in PDF yet.
| | 02:49 | So this is only for the Flash version of this.
| | 02:53 | The other thing is that you can actually
just use your right and left arrow keys
| | 02:56 | to shift from page to page in the Flash version.
| | 02:58 | That's kind of nice.
| | 03:00 | And again, when you go to the page that has
this content on it, you can turn the strokes off.
| | 03:05 | You can turn them on.
| | 03:07 | You can turn the labels off and
on just like you could in the PDF.
| | 03:10 | And we didn't actually have to do
anything different in the InDesign file we
| | 03:14 | just exported the PDF and
exported the same file as a SWF file.
| | 03:17 | So you get two for the price of one.
| | 03:20 | The only difference is the initial state.
| | 03:22 | The initial view is slightly difference
so in this case all the characters are on.
| | 03:26 | In this case, we are going to
turn them off with that toggle.
| | 03:28 | But once you click on the individual
targets here, you have got the same
| | 03:32 | behavior that you saw in
the interactive PDF version.
| | 03:35 | So, there you have it.
| | 03:36 | That's a preview of what we are
going to be building in this chapter.
| | 03:38 | Let's go ahead and get
started in the very next video.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using Proportional Place to scale images while placing them| 00:00 | Here we are in our
interactive mood board document.
| | 00:03 | This is our starting document.
| | 00:04 | You can see we have got a couple of
blank pages here where we are going to place
| | 00:07 | some content, but the rest of the
content has already been place for you and
| | 00:10 | we'll just go ahead, and
learn how to make it interactive.
| | 00:12 | Let's begin by going to page three and
we are going to place the final version
| | 00:17 | of the logo that the art director
is recommending to the client here.
| | 00:21 | This is the one we are going to run with.
| | 00:22 | So File > Place, and we are going to go
to our Links folder, and the version we
| | 00:27 | want is check_final.ai.
| | 00:29 | I'm going to go ahead and click Open here.
| | 00:32 | Now when you click with the loaded gun,
this is called a Loaded Place Gun, and
| | 00:36 | this is what you get when you grab an
image or an Illustrator file like this.
| | 00:39 | Normal behaviors, when you click with
the loaded gun, InDesign creates a frame,
| | 00:44 | the size of the image that you are placing.
| | 00:45 | A lot of times that's what you want.
| | 00:47 | In this case, when an image is actually
larger than you intend to use it, this
| | 00:51 | can actually kind of be annoying,
especially for new users, because the first
| | 00:55 | thing you think to do is okay I
want to make this thing smaller.
| | 00:57 | So you go grab a corner
handle with your Selection tool.
| | 01:00 | You drag the frame smaller and you
realize that you are not actually
| | 01:03 | scaling that graphic.
| | 01:04 | You are actually clipping it.
| | 01:05 | You are resizing the frame that graphic sits in.
| | 01:09 | So that's called a Resize instead of a Scale.
| | 01:11 | So I'm going to undo that.
| | 01:13 | You kind of have to know the secret
handshake right at the beginning of using InDesign.
| | 01:16 | You have to hold down the Command key
or the Ctrl key on Windows to scale a
| | 01:20 | frame and its contents and of course
if you want to do it proportionally,
| | 01:23 | you add Shift to that.
| | 01:24 | So Command+Shift/Ctrl+Shift and grab a
corner handle, and you will scale this
| | 01:29 | image proportionally.
| | 01:32 | The image inside of frame gets
smaller as well as the frame itself.
| | 01:36 | So that's standard behavior there.
| | 01:38 | I'm going to go ahead and delete this.
| | 01:39 | I'm going to replace it, Command+D, Ctrl
+D. To introduce a new feature in CS4,
| | 01:44 | instead of just clicking, what I want
you to do is click and drag with loaded
| | 01:48 | gun instead, and watch what happens.
| | 01:50 | It only draws a proportionally sized frame.
| | 01:53 | So a frame that's proportionally
sized to the content you are placing.
| | 01:56 | You will also get a little tooltip
telling you that when it's scaling or how
| | 01:59 | much it's scaling as you drag.
| | 02:01 | So I'm going to drag from the left
margin over to the right margin, because
| | 02:04 | that's how big I want to use it, and
when I let go, I get a frame exactly the
| | 02:08 | size I want it, and the content
fits that frame proportionally.
| | 02:12 | So I get exactly what I want the first
time, and I don't have to mess around
| | 02:15 | with trying to resize or rescale.
| | 02:17 | So I'm just going to shift that up.
| | 02:18 | That looks about right, and there you have it.
| | 02:20 | That's the Proportional Place
command found in InDesign CS4.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Placing multiple files as a grid of images| 00:00 | We are ready to place the other logo
studies that led up to this final logo.
| | 00:05 | We are going to put those on
page 2, which is currently blank.
| | 00:07 | Let's go ahead and double-click on page
2 and we want to place six iterations of
| | 00:12 | that logo that led up to
the final version there.
| | 00:14 | So we are going to go use a
command known as Multi File Place.
| | 00:18 | This isn't new to CS4;
| | 00:19 | it was introduced in CS3.
| | 00:21 | Let's go ahead and File > Place, and
there is the six images that I want to choose.
| | 00:25 | I'm going to hold down the Shift key.
| | 00:26 | I'm going to click on the first one,
hold down the Shift key and click on the
| | 00:29 | last one and that will select
everything in between the two clicks.
| | 00:31 | Go ahead and click Open, and then
that puts all six of these images in the
| | 00:36 | loaded place gun cursor.
| | 00:37 | You can see there is a number there
telling me that there are six items in the list.
| | 00:40 | Just some quick shortcuts,
in case you don't know these.
| | 00:43 | You can use your arrow keys to cycle
through the items in the list, so you can
| | 00:47 | make sure the one that you want to place
first is the current one in the loaded gun.
| | 00:51 | If there is a logo in here that you
didn't want to include, you accidentally
| | 00:55 | had selected it in the dialog box, you
can just hit the Escape key to drop it
| | 00:59 | from the loaded gun.
| | 01:00 | You can see now there are only
five images in the cursor there.
| | 01:03 | Of course, I didn't want to do that.
| | 01:04 | So I'm going to undo, and you can see
when I do Command+Z or Ctrl+Z on Windows,
| | 01:09 | it reloads that deleted image back into the gun.
| | 01:11 | So it says number six. Very good.
| | 01:14 | So when you have a loaded gun, you
can just click and drag and you get the
| | 01:17 | Proportional Place feature that we
talked about earlier, and then it reloads the
| | 01:22 | gun with the next image in the queue here.
| | 01:24 | So I have got five left.
| | 01:26 | I could go ahead and proceed to place
all five manually by clicking-and-dragging
| | 01:29 | and clicking-and-dragging all the way
through, but I'm going to undo that and
| | 01:32 | that reloads the gun.
| | 01:33 | I want to place all six of these
images at the same time with one click in a
| | 01:38 | nice evenly distributed gird.
| | 01:40 | The secret to that is to hold down
Command+Shift or Ctrl+Shift on Windows,
| | 01:45 | and you can see the place gun cursor
changes into what we call the Grid Place Cursor.
| | 01:50 | I am going to go ahead and start
dragging with this loaded cursor.
| | 01:54 | Once I drag, I can go ahead
and let go all the modifier keys.
| | 01:56 | I don't need to hold those down anymore.
| | 01:58 | I'm keeping the mouse down, and you can see
it's creating a grid, a 3 column by 2 row grid.
| | 02:06 | You might be getting different defaults.
| | 02:07 | It's remembering the last thing you did.
| | 02:09 | The arrow keys on your keyboard can be
used to modify the number of rows and columns.
| | 02:13 | So if I use the Right arrow, I'm adding columns.
| | 02:17 | If I use my Left arrow, I'm removing columns.
| | 02:20 | Up and Down arrows, add or remove rows.
| | 02:23 | You can see they are all equally spaced.
| | 02:26 | If you want to change the spacing, just
add the Shift key and use the arrow keys
| | 02:30 | to change the amount of space
between each column and row.
| | 02:33 | Right now I have got the spacing correct, so
I'm going to leave it, but you get the idea.
| | 02:37 | So let's go back to just having two rows.
| | 02:39 | I'm going to use my Down arrow until I
get two rows, and I'm going to drag over
| | 02:43 | to the right-hand margin.
| | 02:44 | You can see what it's doing is
it's dividing the space that you drag.
| | 02:49 | So, here is my entire area that I'm
dragging, and subdividing that area that I
| | 02:53 | have dragged out into these
equally spaced grid cells.
| | 02:56 | Then watch what happens.
| | 02:57 | When I let go of the mouse, you will have to
use the sound effect where it doesn't work.
| | 03:02 | You can see it placed all six images
equally distributed in that nice grid.
| | 03:07 | Very powerful feature of
quickly placing multiple images into a
| | 03:11 | evenly distributed grid.
| | 03:12 | I am going to go ahead and click on the
selected items, hold down the Shift key
| | 03:15 | and just shift them up a little bit, so
they are kind of more optically centered
| | 03:19 | at that blue line up there. Great!
| | 03:21 | There you have it.
| | 03:22 | The Grid Place feature, discovered
by holding down Command+Shift with the
| | 03:26 | loaded place gun or Ctrl+Shift on
Windows, and it lets you place all of these
| | 03:30 | images in one step.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding the URL hyperlink| 00:00 | All right, let's begin
making this document interactive.
| | 00:02 | We'll begin by creating a URL for this
text down here that's checkmagazine.com.
| | 00:08 | We want that to be a clickable link in the
final output so that you can go to that website.
| | 00:12 | You can see that this element is
actually on a master page, and we can tell that
| | 00:16 | because it's got a dashed frame edge
line there instead of the solid line, like
| | 00:20 | this Masthead Studies text frame over here.
| | 00:21 | So, let's take a look at our Pages
panel and we can see that that's applied to
| | 00:25 | master page A. So, we'll go, edit
master page by double-clicking on its
| | 00:29 | thumbnail on the Pages panel.
| | 00:31 | There is our text here, we'll go ahead
and double-click to select that text and
| | 00:35 | apply a hyperlink to it.
| | 00:36 | We go to the Hyperlinks panel, and
we'll just go ahead and type in the
| | 00:39 | hyperlink that we want to use, so
www.checkmagazine.com, and we'll press enter
| | 00:46 | and that is now a hyperlink.
| | 00:48 | By default, it puts a visible
rectangle around that hyperlink text.
| | 00:52 | We don't want that visible rectangle there.
| | 00:54 | So we are going to double-click on the
hyperlink inside the Hyperlinks panel and
| | 00:57 | change that to an
invisible rectangle and click OK.
| | 01:01 | So, there you have it. It totally works.
| | 01:03 | So when we go back to the regular page
by double-clicking the page thumbnail,
| | 01:07 | that footer will have that
same URL on every single page.
| | 01:10 | We are going to collapse
the Hyperlinks panel there.
| | 01:13 | Then when we export that to PDF or SWF, that
will be a clickable region. So, that easy.
| | 01:17 | Just select the text, enter the URL you
want in the URL field in the Hyperlinks
| | 01:21 | panel, press Return and
that's all there is to it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Assigning actions to the navigation buttons| 00:00 | Let's continue adding some more
interactive elements to this document.
| | 00:03 | We are going to make these
navigational buttons function so that when you
| | 00:06 | click to each button, this one will go to the
next page, this one go to the previous page.
| | 00:10 | Again, these buttons are
residing on a master page.
| | 00:13 | So we'll go to the only
master page in the document.
| | 00:15 | Here, we'll double-click on the A
master page in the Pages panel, and there is
| | 00:19 | the little triangle there that
I want to turn into a button.
| | 00:21 | Let's do that by going to our Buttons panel.
| | 00:23 | Again, it's as simple as just clicking
the word Normal, clicking on the word
| | 00:27 | Rollover to active those state
appearances for that button object, and then
| | 00:31 | once we have a Rollover object here,
a rollover state, we can give it a
| | 00:35 | different fill color.
| | 00:36 | So I'm going to go to my Swatches panel,
clicking on that gray area there and
| | 00:39 | I'm going to make the fill color this
orange, and I'm going to go ahead and
| | 00:43 | just choose orange.
| | 00:44 | I don't want that Tint to be 50%.
| | 00:45 | So I'll that 100, and we'll
go back to the Normal state.
| | 00:49 | Of course, we want this button to do
something, so we are going to add an
| | 00:51 | action, On Release, Go To
The Next Page, and that's it.
| | 00:56 | That's all there is to it.
| | 00:57 | We may want to change the zoom level,
I'm going to make it to Fit In Window,
| | 01:00 | just to make sure if we are viewing this
in a PDF that it resets the page to fit
| | 01:05 | inside the current screen size.
| | 01:07 | Same thing for the left pointing button.
| | 01:09 | We'll make that the Previous Page button.
| | 01:11 | Again, we just click on the word Normal.
| | 01:13 | We click on the Rollover in the Buttons panel.
| | 01:16 | Let's go change the fill color to this
nice orange color, and again let's change
| | 01:20 | the Tint to back to 100%, and then
click on the Normal state to just to return
| | 01:24 | to appearance there, and we want
this to go to the previous page.
| | 01:29 | Now, it makes sense to go ahead and
change the zoom to Fit in Window here again.
| | 01:33 | We should probably give our
button names logical names.
| | 01:35 | So instead of Button 14, Button 13,
whatever, let's go ahead and name this
| | 01:39 | Previous, hit Return, and then we'll
click on this button and will name it Next.
| | 01:45 | Okay, that's all there is to it.
| | 01:47 | Because that's on a master page,
we can go back to a Normal page.
| | 01:50 | Let's collapse these panels by
clicking on the dark gray area.
| | 01:52 | When we go to our regular page,
since those button are on a master page,
| | 01:58 | those buttons will just function
and work on every single page in the
| | 02:01 | exported final output.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using groups to create different button state appearances| 00:00 | In this video we are going to do a slight
different tweak to the creation of buttons.
| | 00:05 | Let's take a look at what our end goal is.
| | 00:07 | We are going to roll over these text
objects here, where it's black text
| | 00:10 | against the white background, and when
I roll over it, it turns into reversed
| | 00:14 | out text on a black bar.
| | 00:15 | Same thing for all of these here.
| | 00:17 | So what ends up happening in the
InDesign document, this is actually a state
| | 00:22 | that has one object in it and then on
the Rollover state it's actually got two
| | 00:25 | objects in it, a black
rectangle behind a white text frame.
| | 00:30 | So let's jump over to InDesign and
actually learn how to create these.
| | 00:35 | You can see on these buttons, these four,
so the Myriad Pro, the Chaparral Pro,
| | 00:39 | Letter Gothic and Myriad Pro Regular here.
| | 00:41 | These have already been turned into buttons.
| | 00:44 | So we are going to learn
how to do that with these two.
| | 00:45 | Let's go ahead and zoom in.
| | 00:48 | I'm going to get my Zoom tool by
pressing the letter Z, and I'm just going to
| | 00:50 | zoom in on this Blackoak
text for a couple clicks here.
| | 00:55 | Then I'll get my Hand tool.
| | 00:56 | H for the Hand tool.
| | 00:57 | I'm just going to move that into position.
| | 00:59 | So let's begin, I'm going to get my
Selection tool and I'm going to click once
| | 01:03 | on the white text here, and I'm going to
Shift-click on the black object behind.
| | 01:08 | So I've got them both selected.
| | 01:09 | Then I'm going to go to my Buttons
panel, and I'm going to go ahead and
| | 01:12 | convert this into a Button.
| | 01:13 | You can just click on the word Normal here.
| | 01:16 | But something interesting happens.
| | 01:17 | The Buttons panel now blinks.
| | 01:19 | You are like, what's going on there, and
if you take a close look at the screen here.
| | 01:23 | What ended up happening is that each
object in the selection became its own button.
| | 01:28 | So I ended up with two buttons,
and that's not what I wanted.
| | 01:30 | So I'm going to undo that.
| | 01:32 | What we want is these two objects
to be treated as a single button.
| | 01:35 | So to do that you just need to
group these two objects together first.
| | 01:38 | We'll just Command+G or Ctrl+G on Windows.
| | 01:42 | Now we are representing this as a
single object that's just made up of two
| | 01:46 | children objects inside it.
| | 01:48 | Now when we go to the Buttons panel and
click on the word Normal, I get a single button.
| | 01:52 | We'll go ahead and go over
to the Rollover state. Great!
| | 01:55 | This is what I want it to look like, in the
Rollover state with this black bar effect.
| | 02:00 | In the Normal state though we don't
actually want the black bar at all and we
| | 02:03 | want the text to be black
against a white background.
| | 02:06 | So let's go ahead and fix that
situation, I'm going to go ahead and get my
| | 02:10 | Direct Selection tool by
pressing the letter A on my keyboard.
| | 02:14 | That switches me to my Direct
Selection tool and these two objects are now
| | 02:17 | sub-selected or directed selected. I'm
going to hold down the Shift key and
| | 02:20 | just click on the black bar to just select
that one object and now I can just hit Delete.
| | 02:26 | I'm going to just delete that object there.
| | 02:28 | I still have my other text frame,
but it's white text against a white
| | 02:31 | background, the paper color there at the page.
| | 02:33 | So I'm just going to go ahead and
double-click on that text to select it, and
| | 02:37 | then we'll go to our Swatches panel, and go
ahead and change the Text Color to RGB Black.
| | 02:43 | I'm going to go ahead and press the
Escape key to switch out of my Text
| | 02:48 | Selection tool back to
my regular Selection tool.
| | 02:51 | You can see I have got a button now,
where in the Normal state there is only one
| | 02:55 | object and in the Rollover
state there is that Group object.
| | 02:58 | So each state can actually contain a
different number of objects, each with
| | 03:03 | their own attributes.
| | 03:05 | The trick there is just to make sure you start
with the group when you turn it into a button.
| | 03:09 | So you end up with a single object
instead of having two individual button
| | 03:13 | created for you, because
you had two items selected.
| | 03:16 | So just repeat this real
quick for this object over here.
| | 03:19 | This Adobe Garamond Pro, we want
to make that its own button as well.
| | 03:22 | So we'll Shift-click on these two objects.
| | 03:24 | We are going to group them
Command+G or Ctrl+G on Windows.
| | 03:28 | Again click in the word Normal in
the Buttons panel, click on Rollover.
| | 03:31 | That's the appearance we
want for the Rollover state.
| | 03:34 | So we'll go back to Normal, switch
to the Direct Selection tool again by
| | 03:37 | pressing the letter A. We'll Shift-click
on this black bar, go ahead and delete
| | 03:42 | it, we don't need it anymore in the
Normal state, go ahead and double-click on
| | 03:45 | this text frame and then we'll switch
back over to our Swatches panel, and we
| | 03:49 | are going to change the color of
the text back to RGB Black. Awesome!
| | 03:55 | Hit the Escape key again to
back to our regular Selection tool.
| | 03:58 | We'll go ahead and see that there is
the Rollover state, there is the Normal
| | 04:01 | state, and everything
looks exactly the way I wanted.
| | 04:04 | I'm just going to go ahead and keep
that on the Rollover state, just so I can
| | 04:07 | see the black bars and keep it
consistent with the rest of the page.
| | 04:10 | We know that in the final output, the
runtime, the Normal appearance is where we
| | 04:14 | are going to see it first, and we'll
see the black bar when we mouse over the
| | 04:18 | object in the final output.
| | 04:19 | I'm going to finish by giving
these buttons logical names.
| | 04:22 | It usually doesn't do us any good to
leave them with these generic Button 15,
| | 04:26 | Button 14 names, and so on.
| | 04:28 | So what makes sense for this button,
well, we'll just call it Blackoak, because
| | 04:31 | that's the name of the typeface that
we are using the buttons for. Great!
| | 04:36 | On this button here, we'll go ahead
and name that Garamond and let's go ahead
| | 04:43 | and export this to preview our Button,
just to make sure we did it right.
| | 04:46 | We will go to File > Export
and we'll choose Adobe PDF.
| | 04:51 | I could choose SWF as well, but we'll
just go with PDF for now, and we'll save
| | 04:55 | this to our desktop.
| | 04:57 | I happen to be on Page 5, so just limit
the Range here to page 5 for now, make
| | 05:01 | it easier to test our buttons.
| | 05:02 | We want to view the PDF after exporting.
| | 05:04 | I am going to change the compatibility
to the latest version of PDF and we are
| | 05:09 | going to turn on all our relevant
interactive options, so Bookmarks, Hyperlinks,
| | 05:14 | and the interactive elements.
| | 05:15 | That's what gives us our buttons.
| | 05:16 | Go ahead and click Export, and
when it's done, it's going to pop that
| | 05:19 | open inside Acrobat.
| | 05:21 | And as I rollover these two buttons
there, you can see I have got the Rollover
| | 05:25 | black bar effect that I was looking for.
| | 05:28 | So there you have it,
some fancy button work there.
| | 05:31 | In the next chapter we are going to
talk about how to create this effect
| | 05:34 | where when I click on the black
bar, I actually get the rest of the
| | 05:37 | characters to appear.
| | 05:39 | These two aren't hooked up yet, so we
are going to go learn how to do that.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a button that hides itself when clicked| 00:00 | Now, we are going to do
something a little tricky here.
| | 00:03 | We want to, when we click on this
button right now, it's got a rollover effect.
| | 00:07 | So let's take a look at
this button just for review.
| | 00:10 | In the normal state, it's
going to look like that.
| | 00:12 | Just black text against that paper background.
| | 00:14 | When you rollover it, it's going to
turn into reversal, so the white text will
| | 00:18 | show up against that black bar there.
| | 00:20 | But when I click on that button, I want
the rest of the characters to show up.
| | 00:24 | So initially, these
characters are going to be hidden.
| | 00:27 | You won't see them at first, and they
will show up when you click on this button.
| | 00:31 | So in order to get this to work, this
text here needs to be a button as well and
| | 00:35 | you can see the other
examples here have already been done.
| | 00:37 | We are going to go ahead and do this
for these two here, the Garamond Pro and
| | 00:41 | the Blackoak examples.
| | 00:43 | So first thing we need to do is we need to
convert this text object here into a button itself.
| | 00:47 | I'll go to the Buttons panel to do that.
| | 00:49 | Go ahead and click on the word, Normal.
| | 00:50 | In this case, I don't actually need
it to have any other appearance states.
| | 00:54 | It's just going to be the Normal state here.
| | 00:56 | I'm going to go ahead and
give this a logical name.
| | 00:58 | I'm going to call it All Blackoak,
just kind of a common sense name.
| | 01:03 | When I click on this, I'm going to see
all the characters of Blackoak, and so forth.
| | 01:07 | The most important part of this
exercise is to make sure you know that in order
| | 01:12 | to get this to not show up initially,
you have to go to a secret flyout menu
| | 01:16 | here under the Buttons panel,
and choose Hidden in PDF.
| | 01:21 | There is nothing in the UI that kind of
indicates that that's what's going to happen here.
| | 01:25 | It doesn't show up in the Buttons
panel itself, or on the object itself.
| | 01:27 | You just have to know that in the flyout
menu, the Buttons panel, you have these
| | 01:31 | four options to choose from and the most
important one is if you want this thing
| | 01:34 | to not be visible initially, you
choose Hidden in PDF. Awesome, okay.
| | 01:39 | So we have got the initial appearance
worked out, now we need to connect the
| | 01:43 | two, so that clicking on this
button will hide or show this button.
| | 01:48 | So let's select the Trigger Object here,
and we are going to choose a new action
| | 01:52 | for this, Show/Hide Buttons, and when
we click on that button we want to show
| | 01:59 | the All Blackoak button.
| | 02:01 | So let's scroll down until we find the All
Blackoak button in our list of options here.
| | 02:06 | There it is.
| | 02:07 | We are going to select that and we are
going to say hey, turn on the visibility
| | 02:11 | of that button object
when we click on this button.
| | 02:14 | Pretty simple so far.
| | 02:16 | Next, we want to have this button be a
self-hide, meaning when we click on this
| | 02:21 | button, we want it to hide itself.
| | 02:23 | So it's no other Trigger
Object other than its own button.
| | 02:26 | So we have got this object selected,
we are going to add its action here, the
| | 02:30 | Show/Hide Button action, and it
remembers the last button you had selected in
| | 02:35 | your Buttons panel, so
it's selected there for me.
| | 02:36 | I am going to go ahead and turn on the
Hide option, so that when I click on it,
| | 02:41 | it will hide itself.
| | 02:42 | So now I have got a way
to toggle back and forth.
| | 02:44 | I can click on that button to show it.
| | 02:45 | I can click on this button to hide itself,
and I can go back and forth. Let's repeat this.
| | 02:50 | Let's go to this particular text frame
here, for the all characters of Adobe
| | 02:55 | Garamond Pro, we need to
turn this into a button.
| | 02:57 | We'll click on the word, Normal.
| | 02:58 | Let's give it a logical name, we'll
call it All Garamond, okay and we want
| | 03:05 | to hide it initially.
| | 03:07 | So we'll choose Hidden in PDF from
the flyout menu of the Buttons panel.
| | 03:11 | Let's go, make this button show
this object when you click on it.
| | 03:16 | So we are going to add a Show/Hide
Button action to this button, and if we
| | 03:21 | scroll down, there is All Garamond there.
| | 03:22 | So we are going to select that and
say hey, show that button when we click
| | 03:26 | on this button here.
| | 03:28 | For the All Garamond button, we want
it to hide itself when we click on it.
| | 03:32 | So again, we'll go to the Actions list,
choose Show/Hide Buttons, it remembers
| | 03:36 | the last button we had selected.
| | 03:38 | So we'll just turn on the Hide options,
so that we now have a self-hide button
| | 03:42 | for this text frame as well. Great!
| | 03:44 | Let's go ahead and try
this out by doing an export.
| | 03:47 | Command+E or File > Export, Ctrl+E on Windows.
| | 03:51 | We'll choose Adobe PDF again.
| | 03:52 | We'll call this a SelfHide Test.
| | 03:56 | Go ahead and hit the Save button.
| | 03:58 | Again, we'll just do Page 5
just to test this one page.
| | 04:02 | So I'm going to type a 5 in there.
| | 04:03 | If it's not set up already, we
have got our other options turned on.
| | 04:05 | View PDF after Exporting,
Interactive Elements turned on, Bookmarks and
| | 04:08 | Hyperlinks chosen as well.
| | 04:10 | Go ahead and click the Export
button and there is our initial view.
| | 04:13 | So, so far we have done everything right.
| | 04:15 | These characters did not show up initially.
| | 04:17 | If we had seen them there, we
would have done something wrong.
| | 04:20 | The rollover still works, great and
when I can click on Adobe Garamond Pro, I
| | 04:25 | get the rest of characters.
| | 04:26 | When I click on Blackoak, I get to the
rest of the characters there and then
| | 04:30 | when I come down and click on
this object here, it disappears.
| | 04:33 | Click on that object, it disappears.
| | 04:35 | So it appears, we have done
everything correctly, little fancy footwork
| | 04:39 | there, but you can do some pretty
interesting things there by using the
| | 04:42 | Show/Hide Button behavior, including
getting the button to hide itself when
| | 04:46 | you click on it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Toggling the visibility of multiple objects with one button| 00:00 | A final touch for this particular page
is to create a toggle to show or hide all
| | 00:06 | of the individual characters
for each representative font.
| | 00:10 | So these are two sets of buttons here,
switching the visibility of a bunch of other buttons.
| | 00:15 | So that's where we are going to go to
create or finish creating inside InDesign.
| | 00:18 | Let's jump over to InDesign document.
| | 00:21 | You can see I have got my
Toggle buttons already set up.
| | 00:24 | There are two separate buttons and we'll
finish completing those in just a moment.
| | 00:28 | What we have got are these two buttons
that are toggling the visibility of all
| | 00:31 | the other buttons on the page.
| | 00:32 | So let's begin by taking a look
at our Show All button here, I have
| | 00:35 | already named it Show All.
| | 00:37 | And to keep things organized, I have
actually created two layers, On Buttons and
| | 00:40 | Off Buttons, just to kind of visually
see that the On Buttons are green, the Off
| | 00:45 | Buttons are red, because that's
the corresponding layer color.
| | 00:49 | In the end, these buttons are going to
be overlapping each other, where they are
| | 00:52 | going to be turning themselves on and off.
| | 00:54 | When I click on this button,
it's going to turn that button off.
| | 00:56 | When I click on this button,
it's going to turn that button off.
| | 00:58 | So when we were initially designing them,
we have them not overlapping to make
| | 01:01 | it easier and then eventually, we'll
move them, and align them and stack them
| | 01:05 | on top of each other.
| | 01:05 | Now because we still have them on
individual layers, we can turn them on and off
| | 01:08 | if we need to edit them without being confused.
| | 01:11 | Okay, so what we need to do is add these
two buttons, to the respected behaviors
| | 01:18 | for the Show All and Hide All
buttons that we have got here.
| | 01:21 | So let's begin by clicking the Show All button.
| | 01:23 | This button already has a Show/Hide
Button action assigned to it.
| | 01:27 | If we scroll through the list here, you
can see it's turning on these other all
| | 01:32 | buttons, Chaparral, All Letter
Gothic, All Myriad Pro Regular.
| | 01:36 | There's a couple of new ones that
we have created, at the end here.
| | 01:38 | So we are going to turn on All
Blackoak, and click on All Garamond and turn
| | 01:43 | that one on as well.
| | 01:44 | So that button is now going to turn on the
visibility of all of these six text frames.
| | 01:49 | For the Hide All button,
we'll click on that one.
| | 01:52 | We are going to do the same thing.
| | 01:53 | We are going to do the All Garamond and this
time, we are going to turn off the visibility.
| | 01:57 | Go to Blackoak and turn
off the visibility of that.
| | 02:01 | So let's go ahead and test this.
| | 02:02 | We'll go ahead and do an
export and we'll do HideAllTest.
| | 02:05 | Go ahead and hit Save.
| | 02:09 | Again, we'll just export Page 5, making sure
Interactive Elements is chosen for Buttons.
| | 02:14 | Go ahead and click Export.
| | 02:16 | Now when I click this button,
I have got the toggle working.
| | 02:19 | Now I see my on and off buttons are
shifting direction, so we just need to
| | 02:23 | fix that by making them overlap, and then
we'll do our last final step and do a test.
| | 02:28 | So let's close that.
| | 02:29 | Close that again, and let's go back to
our InDesign document, and just to kind
| | 02:34 | of review here, when I click on the
Show All button, if I scroll up, I can show
| | 02:40 | you what's going on here.
| | 02:41 | It's also turning off itself.
| | 02:43 | I have turned off the visibility of
the Show All button, and turned on the
| | 02:48 | visibility of the Hide All button.
| | 02:50 | For this button, we have
done the reverse, all right.
| | 02:52 | So for the Hide All button, we are turning on
the Show All button and we are hiding itself.
| | 02:57 | To complete the effect, all we need to
do is change the stacking order of these
| | 03:01 | things, so they are aligned on top of
each other, so that we can get the effect
| | 03:05 | and the illusion that we want.
| | 03:06 | So instead of the buttons shifting
from left to right, we just want them
| | 03:09 | to change in place.
| | 03:10 | So I'll just select these two objects
and I'm going to use the Align buttons
| | 03:14 | in the Controls panel to align them to their rights,
so they are stacked on top of each other. Great!
| | 03:18 | Let's do one final export, and test this.
| | 03:21 | I'll do HideAllTest2, and Save that,
go ahead and click Export again.
| | 03:26 | And now when I click on the button,
all the text frames show up, the button
| | 03:31 | doesn't shift, because they are
right in the same position again.
| | 03:33 | When I click the button
again, I get them to disappear.
| | 03:36 | So the illusion here is that it looks
like I'm only clicking one button to
| | 03:40 | toggle this on and off.
| | 03:41 | In reality, it's actually two
button stacked on top of each other.
| | 03:43 | But each time I click on this button,
it's hiding itself and revealing the
| | 03:48 | button underneath or reverse, depending on
which button you are clicking on. So you have it.
| | 03:52 | Again, a little trickery, but it ends
up giving you the effect you want, again
| | 03:54 | using the Show/Hide
Button action inside InDesign.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating buttons to hide and show strokes| 00:00 | All right, we're ready to begin the
production of our last Interactive page in
| | 00:04 | this Mood Board here.
| | 00:06 | Before we begin this movie though,
let's just review what we're trying
| | 00:09 | to accomplish in it.
| | 00:10 | We have this initial page here where I
just see the color swatches and their values.
| | 00:14 | When I mouse over this button, I see
a stroke and when I click that button,
| | 00:18 | I reveal the strokes.
| | 00:19 | I turn on the strokes for those objects.
| | 00:20 | When I mouse over this button,
I turn those strokes off.
| | 00:23 | So, that's our goal.
| | 00:24 | Let's go set that up inside
InDesign and accomplish it.
| | 00:28 | Let's take a brief look at how
I've constructed this document.
| | 00:30 | I'm going to collapse the Pages panel
here, so I can see my Layers panel and my
| | 00:33 | Buttons panel together.
| | 00:34 | I've actually created a
layer here called Strokes.
| | 00:37 | I'll go ahead and turn it off for a second.
| | 00:39 | You can see all I did was selected
these individual colored frames, I grouped
| | 00:43 | them into a single object.
| | 00:45 | So, Command+G or Ctrl+G in Windows and
then I duplicated that group onto its own
| | 00:49 | layer and called that Layer Strokes.
| | 00:51 | That way as I'm working in the Design
Time version of this document, I can turn
| | 00:55 | that off and get it out of
the way if it's messing me up.
| | 00:58 | Okay, so what we need to do is turn
this group into a button, so I can
| | 01:02 | control its visibility.
| | 01:04 | So, I've got it selected, I'm going to go to
the Buttons panel and turn on the Normal state.
| | 01:07 | I don't need a Rollover state for this
because I just want to turn it on and off.
| | 01:10 | I'm going to go ahead and give this a
logical name, we'll call it Strokes, help
| | 01:14 | us find it later on when we're
trying to target it with another button.
| | 01:18 | Now, we need to create the trigger and
target buttons for the visibility change
| | 01:23 | of this particular object.
| | 01:24 | So, here's the button we want to use to
turn on the strokes, this is the button
| | 01:27 | we want to use to turn off the strokes.
| | 01:30 | You can see I've got the On/Off
layers just to help keep me organized.
| | 01:33 | So, I place all my On buttons on the On
layer and all of my Off buttons on the Off layer.
| | 01:38 | Let's begin by viewing the On button first.
| | 01:41 | I'm going to turn that into a button,
give it a Normal state, give it a Rollover
| | 01:44 | state and in the Rollover state, I
actually want a stroke to appear.
| | 01:48 | So, let's go to our Swatches panel and
we'll target the stroke and make that RGB Black.
| | 01:54 | There I have my Rollover appearance.
| | 01:56 | So, when I rollover that button,
it's going to look like, oh!
| | 01:58 | If I click you, I'll turn on the
strokes, it's exactly what I want.
| | 02:02 | Let's give this name for this
button, Show Strokes, great.
| | 02:06 | We'll add a button action
here for Show/Hide Buttons.
| | 02:11 | When I click on my Show Strokes
button, what do I want to have happen?
| | 02:15 | I want the Strokes object, that button
itself, to turn its visibility on. Perfect.
| | 02:20 | Let's do the same for our Off button.
| | 02:23 | Let's turn it into a button by turning on
the Normal state and the Rollover state.
| | 02:27 | In the Rollover state, I want that
fill to be RGB Black and 20% Tint.
| | 02:32 | So, it looks like kind of turning off
the stroke, there is the Normal state,
| | 02:36 | there's the Rollover state, awesome.
| | 02:39 | Let's give it a name of Hide Strokes, great.
| | 02:43 | And then for the button action, Show/Hide
Buttons and Strokes is still chosen,
| | 02:48 | so we're going to turn off the
visibility of that particular object. Great!
| | 02:51 | Let's go ahead and do an export to
preview this and make sure we did
| | 02:54 | everything correctly.
| | 02:56 | Command+E and we'll export this
as a PDF, go ahead and hit Save.
| | 03:00 | We want just Page 4, View the PDF
after Exporting, Bookmarks, Hyperlinks,
| | 03:04 | Interactive Elements are all chosen.
| | 03:06 | Those are the important checkboxes there.
| | 03:08 | Go ahead and click Export and let's test it.
| | 03:11 | I forgot something, didn't I?
| | 03:13 | Can you pick up what I forgot?
| | 03:15 | Let's test the buttons just to make sure.
| | 03:16 | Yeah, that still works and that works great.
| | 03:19 | So, I can turn the strokes on and off.
| | 03:20 | But I didn't want to see the strokes initially.
| | 03:23 | So we just need to go
back and do one correction.
| | 03:25 | Go ahead and close these PDFs here.
| | 03:28 | We want to select the object that we
use to show all the strokes and in the
| | 03:32 | Buttons panel, we want to
go and choose Hidden in PDF.
| | 03:35 | That way it does not appear initially
in the PDF version of this document.
| | 03:40 | Go ahead and collapse the Buttons
panel for a second and the Strokes panel.
| | 03:43 | Bring up the Pages again, and let's go
ahead and do our export one more time.
| | 03:47 | File > Export or Command+E or Ctrl+E on Windows.
| | 03:50 | Command+E on the Mac.
| | 03:51 | We'll go ahead and do a name, here
we'll just call it Test3.pdf and save it and
| | 03:59 | all the settings I remember from the last time.
| | 04:01 | So, we'll just click Export.
| | 04:03 | That's what I was expecting.
| | 04:04 | So, we don't see the stroke initially.
| | 04:05 | We turn it on, we turn it off, everything
is working the way we want it to, awesome.
| | 04:09 | Let's go ahead and close this. Heck!
| | 04:11 | Let's go ahead and test this by
exporting it to a Flash file, a SWF file as well.
| | 04:15 | I'm going to go ahead and set up an error in
advance, just so I can teach you something.
| | 04:20 | I'm going to turn off the Strokes layer.
| | 04:21 | All right, let's say that I turn that
off, just to get that artwork out of the
| | 04:25 | way for a moment, because I want to
just work on these frames, without having
| | 04:28 | those stroke frame versions in the way.
| | 04:30 | Let's do a File > Export and
instead of PDF, let's choose SWF.
| | 04:35 | This is a file that can be played
back in the Flash Player, either in the
| | 04:38 | browser by embedding that SWF file and
HTML file or in the standalone Flash Player.
| | 04:43 | So, let's go ahead and call this
FlashTest and we'll go ahead and save this.
| | 04:48 | We'll just go ahead and choose
the same thing we did for PDF.
| | 04:51 | We'll just test Page 4 and we'll
just go with all the defaults, all the
| | 04:55 | interactive options and whatnot.
| | 04:56 | Go ahead and click OK.
| | 04:58 | It's going to generate an HTML file.
| | 04:59 | So, it will all open up the result
and a browser for us and there we go.
| | 05:03 | So, what's not working?
| | 05:07 | Well, the buttons aren't working,
because when you do a SWF export out of
| | 05:12 | InDesign only the visible
layers are included in the output.
| | 05:16 | All right, so kind of set
this up in advance on purpose.
| | 05:19 | You want to make sure you turn on all
the layers that you want to make sure that
| | 05:23 | are in your output when you export to Flash.
| | 05:25 | So, it's one of those things.
| | 05:27 | It's a very literal export.
| | 05:28 | If it's not visible for you, hit the
Export command and it's not going to end up
| | 05:32 | in the final result.
| | 05:33 | So, now that we've turned on the
Strokes layer, let's do a File > Export again.
| | 05:36 | We'll go ahead and just save over this
FlashTest, replace the existing one, just
| | 05:41 | go with the same options that we had
just a second ago, go ahead and click OK.
| | 05:45 | That will pop it up in the browser.
| | 05:46 | We do see the strokes initially.
| | 05:48 | That is one of the limitations of SWF
export and hidden initially attribute
| | 05:52 | that only works for PDF.
| | 05:54 | But you can see the rollovers will
still work and so when I click on that
| | 05:58 | button, I can hide the strokes.
| | 05:59 | When I click on this button,
I can reveal the strokes.
| | 06:01 | So, I've got that same interaction,
once I have got the SWF loaded here.
| | 06:06 | So, there you have it, very easy way to
create these toggle visibility actions
| | 06:11 | by using Show/Hide buttons.
| | 06:12 | They work in both PDF and SWF export.
| | 06:15 | Just remember to make sure your layers
are all on that you want included in your
| | 06:19 | SWF export before you do that
Export command from InDesign.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating buttons to hide and show color values| 00:00 | Okay, the last thing that we want
to set up before we export our final
| | 00:04 | version here is create the effect of hiding
these color labels when I click On and off button.
| | 00:10 | So, these are all individual text
frames, we want to be able to set their
| | 00:14 | visibility as one big unit.
| | 00:16 | So, I'm just going to go ahead and
click-drag through those text frames
| | 00:18 | to select them all.
| | 00:19 | I'm going to hold then the Shift key and
click and drag through those frames and
| | 00:23 | they're selected as well.
| | 00:24 | Let's go ahead and group them,
Command+G or Ctrl+G on Windows, and let's
| | 00:29 | convert that to a button.
| | 00:30 | Remember, anything that's going to be
targeted to have its visibility on or off
| | 00:34 | needs to be a button.
| | 00:35 | So, we'll go to our Buttons panel
and we'll just give it a Normal state.
| | 00:38 | That's all it needs to be.
| | 00:40 | Let's call this Color Values, great.
| | 00:44 | Now, we've got our On/Off buttons over here.
| | 00:46 | We can go ahead and zoom in, I
get my Zoom tool, press Z for zoom.
| | 00:49 | Click and drag, they are
zoom in, get my Selection tool.
| | 00:52 | When I click the On button, of
course, I want to see the color values.
| | 00:56 | So, let's go find that
button in our Button list.
| | 00:59 | This already has a Show/Hide Button
action assigned to it, because when you
| | 01:03 | click the On button, let's scroll up
to the top here in this list, when we
| | 01:07 | click the On button, we want the On
button to hide and turn on the Off button
| | 01:13 | and then the opposite is true with the
Off button and we want to turn itself
| | 01:17 | off, reveal the On button.
| | 01:19 | Okay, so back to this button here,
when I click the On button, I want to
| | 01:23 | reveal the color values.
| | 01:25 | So, I'm going to select that button
from the list and turn on the Visibility
| | 01:27 | option for it and then for the Off
button, I want to hide that button.
| | 01:31 | Last but not least, what we want to do
is stack these up on top of each other,
| | 01:35 | so that they create the illusion of
being a single button, instead of it
| | 01:39 | shifting from left to right.
| | 01:41 | So, we'll go ahead and select those
two and we'll align their left edges by
| | 01:44 | using the appropriate
button in the Control panel.
| | 01:46 | We'll go ahead and do a Fit to Window
again, Command+0 or Ctrl+0 on Windows and
| | 01:50 | let's go ahead and do our final export.
| | 01:53 | Command+E or File > Export and we'll
choose Final and we'll choose PDF as
| | 02:00 | our final format here.
| | 02:01 | Go ahead and click Save.
| | 02:02 | This time we're going to do All Pages
and all the other options are remembered
| | 02:07 | from our previous exercises.
| | 02:09 | View PDF after Exporting, Bookmarks,
Hyperlinks, Interactive Elements.
| | 02:12 | That's the important stuff.
| | 02:14 | Click Export and it's going to crank
through and do the whole document. There we go.
| | 02:18 | For a dramatic effect, let's put it in the
full screen mode, Command+L or Ctrl+L on Windows.
| | 02:22 | There is our buttons with the
rollovers that go to the next page, great.
| | 02:27 | When I mouse over, I get the
hyperlink. That's working.
| | 02:31 | Go ahead and click again, there's our full logo,
there's the initial view of our color palette.
| | 02:36 | I don't want to view the labels,
so let's turn them off. Awesome!
| | 02:40 | That's working.
| | 02:40 | I can turn them back on.
| | 02:41 | We'll leave them off for a second.
| | 02:42 | I want to see the colors
with strokes around them.
| | 02:45 | I want to turn the strokes off.
| | 02:46 | So, everything is working as expected.
| | 02:48 | Let's go to the last page, so
there's the fonts we want to use.
| | 02:51 | When I mouse over them, they
all get the Riverside effect.
| | 02:54 | That's looking great.
| | 02:56 | Click on each font and I
turn on their characters.
| | 02:59 | Click on all the characters to turn
them off one by one and then there's the
| | 03:03 | Toggle button to turn them
all on and turn them all off.
| | 03:05 | So there, you did it.
| | 03:06 | About an hour-and-a-half or so,
you've got a truly interactive Mood Board
| | 03:10 | that's a lot more interesting to send
to your client and they can actually play
| | 03:13 | around and experience it.
| | 03:14 | Go ahead and close that.
| | 03:16 | Hit Escape key to go out of it and
Command+W or Ctrl+W to close that PDF.
| | 03:20 | In the last movie, we'll talk
about doing Flash export or SWF export.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding the Interactive Page Curl option for Flash (SWF) Export| 00:00 | In the Flash version of the
interactive mood board, we want to have some page
| | 00:03 | transitions and then we want the
Interactive Page Curl effect where the viewer
| | 00:07 | can actually turn the page by going up to the
corner and give you a little page curl effect.
| | 00:11 | So, let's begin by adding some page
transitions to this document, we can do that
| | 00:15 | easily by right-clicking or Ctrl-clicking
on one of the page thumbnails in the
| | 00:18 | Pages panel and choosing
Page Transitions > Choose.
| | 00:22 | This brings up the dialog box where
we can choose the transition we want.
| | 00:24 | I'm going to go ahead and choose the
Wipe transition and we're going to go ahead
| | 00:27 | and apply that to all the spreads.
| | 00:29 | Go ahead and click OK, when I click
OK, I get the Page Transitions panel
| | 00:34 | appearing where I can edit the attributes.
| | 00:35 | I'm going to change the Direction from
Down to Right and I want to synchronize
| | 00:40 | all the pages in the document
to have the same edit there.
| | 00:43 | So, I click the Apply to
All Spreads button. Great!
| | 00:46 | I'm done with that and I'll
close the Page Transition panel.
| | 00:49 | Now, we're ready to export this to Flash, SWF.
| | 00:53 | So, File > Export and we'll choose SWF
as our option and go ahead and click Save.
| | 00:59 | We're going to go ahead and export this at
the size I authored it at, so 1024 x 768.
| | 01:03 | We're going to choose all the pages
this time, we're going to Generate the HTML
| | 01:08 | File and View the SWF after
Exporting, so I get a nice preview of that.
| | 01:11 | We're going to keep the Text as Flash text.
| | 01:14 | That's the default option, and
we usually just keep it that way.
| | 01:16 | If you want to rasterize your text
or convert it to outlines, you have
| | 01:18 | that option as well.
| | 01:20 | But most the time, unless you've got
an appearance that's really important
| | 01:23 | preserving like some sort of Drop
Shadow effect or something, we'll keep
| | 01:26 | the Text to Flash text.
| | 01:27 | These are all turned on by default,
Buttons, Hyperlinks and Transitions and then
| | 01:31 | this one is also turned on by default,
I just want to call it out, the Include
| | 01:35 | Interactive Page Curl. This is different.
| | 01:37 | You may have seen a page curl transition
in the Page Transitions dialog and this
| | 01:42 | is something different.
| | 01:43 | That just gives you the Page Turn
effect when you advance to the next page.
| | 01:48 | The Interactive Page Curl option is
where you mouse over to the corner and can
| | 01:53 | click-and-drag the page yourself.
| | 01:55 | Image Compression, the default is set to
Auto, so it'll automatically figure out
| | 01:59 | if it should be a GIF or a PNG or a
JPEG, based on the type of content it is.
| | 02:03 | We're going to go ahead and choose
JPEG and choose the JPEG Quality.
| | 02:07 | The higher the quality, the better
the images will look, if you've got any
| | 02:10 | placed images in here but the larger
the file size, and then of course, the
| | 02:14 | lower the quality, the smaller the
file size you get, but you'll get more
| | 02:17 | compression artifacts.
| | 02:18 | I want to go ahead and choose High,
not quite the highest, but given us a
| | 02:22 | good quality image here.
| | 02:23 | And we are going to go ahead and
click OK and InDesign will do its thing.
| | 02:27 | It will pop open the result in the
browser, this should look very similar to
| | 02:31 | what you saw on the PDF Export, except now
we have the Wipe transition to the right.
| | 02:36 | If I put my mouse in the corner, I get
the Interactive Page Curl Effect, where I
| | 02:40 | can click and let go to
throw the page over and so forth.
| | 02:45 | When I get to this page, I've got the
ability to turn the labels off, turn off
| | 02:50 | the strokes, turn on the strokes, turn it
back off, turn the labels back on and so forth.
| | 02:54 | We'll go to the next page and I can
turn all the characters off, I get
| | 02:59 | the Rollover effect.
| | 03:00 | So, you can see from the same source
InDesign file, I was able to generate both
| | 03:05 | a PDF and a SWF file.
| | 03:07 | Now, you might ask the question,
well, which one should I choose?
| | 03:10 | And the answer is really do you want
your client to print out this mood board?
| | 03:14 | If you do, then you typically want to
go with the PDF experience, because it's
| | 03:18 | got a much better print experience.
| | 03:19 | Printing a Flash file, especially
from a browser, can be problematic.
| | 03:22 | It's more of the interactive
document to be experienced live, not
| | 03:25 | necessarily printed.
| | 03:26 | And you get some added functionality,
some added interactivity in the SWF
| | 03:31 | version that you don't get in a
PDF like the Page Curl effect.
| | 03:33 | But if you want a high quality print
experience as well, then go for the PDF option.
| | 03:38 | It's up to you, just depending on what
your goals are and there you have it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
7. Creating a Digital PortfolioWhat we're going to build| 00:00 | Let's take a look at the project we
are going to be building in this chapter.
| | 00:03 | It's a digital portfolio.
| | 00:05 | This one is a compelling example, where
it's a spiral bound portfolio, where you
| | 00:08 | can actually turn the pages.
| | 00:09 | It's brought to us by a fellow named
Tomasz Kuczborski and he is out at Poland.
| | 00:13 | I hope I said his last name correctly.
| | 00:15 | He graciously agreed to let me
show you how he built this example.
| | 00:19 | This is the live site that's up on the web.
| | 00:21 | You can actually go there as well.
| | 00:22 | It's just q.pl and it's in Poland and
let's take a look at what the interaction is.
| | 00:27 | So, there is a little arrow on the
bottom right-hand corner, kind of the visual
| | 00:30 | clue that you can
actually go and grab that page.
| | 00:32 | You can also grab the upper page too
and you can kind of get the interactive
| | 00:36 | page curl, sneaky peek there.
| | 00:38 | If you click-and-drag, you can actually
pull the portfolio open and then you can
| | 00:43 | just see his work now.
| | 00:44 | It is all in Polish.
| | 00:45 | So unless you know how to read Polish, you'll
just have to kind of forget that for a second.
| | 00:50 | But you can see it has got a
nice realistic spiral bound effect.
| | 00:53 | He has got a simple button here
in the corner of every main page.
| | 00:57 | When you click on that,
that actually closes the book.
| | 00:59 | So, pretty simple presentation,
but compelling and a little bit more
| | 01:03 | interesting than just a bunch of
thumbnails that you click on to see a larger
| | 01:07 | image and a standard new digital
portfolio that you have online and this was
| | 01:10 | all done with InDesign CS4.
| | 01:12 | So, let's go learn how
to do something like this.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Starting a document with a double page spread| 00:00 | Let's get started by creating a new document.
| | 00:03 | We'll click the New Document
link in the welcome screen here.
| | 00:06 | I'm going to go ahead and start with
6 Number of Pages and we want to use a
| | 00:10 | custom page size for our
digital portfolio project here.
| | 00:14 | We want the total project to be able to
fit within a 800 x 600 screen, let's say.
| | 00:19 | So, we want each page to be about 400
pixels wide and then the total height to
| | 00:23 | be just under 600 pixels.
| | 00:26 | To use pixels, we'll use our points
as our measurement system and the way
| | 00:30 | InDesign does that is a number in front of
the p is pica, a number after a p is a point.
| | 00:34 | We are going to use points
as the pixel equivalent here.
| | 00:37 | So, if I want 400 pixels wide for my
width, I would type p400 and then when I
| | 00:43 | hit the Tab key InDesign is going to
do the math for me, convert that number.
| | 00:45 | For 595 pixel height, we are going to
type p595 and because we have got Facing
| | 00:53 | Pages turned on, that's going to create
a left and a right-hand spread where the
| | 00:56 | total width is 800 and the total height is 595.
| | 00:58 | Then we are going to leave the
orientation as vertical, go ahead and click OK
| | 01:03 | and I've got my initial document here.
| | 01:06 | So, I have got a front cover, a
back cover and two middle spreads.
| | 01:10 | Let's go and add some content to these
pages, just to help kind of distinguish
| | 01:13 | the left and the right-hand page.
| | 01:15 | We'll do that by adding some
content to the master page.
| | 01:17 | Let's go ahead and double-click on the
master page thumbnail and I'm going to
| | 01:21 | switch to my Polygon tool in the Tools
panel here and we'll just draw a simple
| | 01:25 | polygon, like so, I'm holding down
the Shift key to keep it proportional.
| | 01:28 | That looks about right, good.
| | 01:29 | I'm going to switch back to my
Selection tool by pressing the letter V and then
| | 01:35 | I'm going to click-and-drag on the
polygon here until I get the vertical and
| | 01:39 | horizontal centered on the page there.
| | 01:41 | I get my Smart Guides kick in and
letting me know that I've got that centered.
| | 01:45 | Let's change the fill color of this
by clicking on the gray area next to
| | 01:48 | Swatches and changing the fill color to
this blue color and then I want to make
| | 01:53 | the stroke to be RGB, and we'll make it
RGB black here and let's make the stroke
| | 01:57 | a little bit thicker.
| | 01:58 | Okay, so I've got my initial shape here,
I'm going to pull out a copy of this
| | 02:01 | and put it on the left-hand page, hold
down the Option key on the Mac or the Alt
| | 02:04 | key on Windows and you get the
little duplicate cursor there.
| | 02:07 | Hold down Option+Drag or Alt+Drag,
hold down the Shift key to keep it aligned
| | 02:10 | horizontally and then when I get into
to the center, I get the Smart Guide
| | 02:13 | kicking in and letting me know I
have got it in the perfect position.
| | 02:15 | I'm going to let it go and let's go
ahead and change that fill color by clicking
| | 02:19 | the Fill Color Swatch widget
there and changing that to pink.
| | 02:22 | Okay, we are done with that.
| | 02:24 | Let's close the Swatches panel and
I have got the start of my document.
| | 02:27 | Here I have got my regular page 1, my
last cover page, page 6 and then the
| | 02:31 | spreads in the middle.
| | 02:33 | Let's go ahead and double-click on
Page 1 and see what that looks like.
| | 02:36 | Double-click on double page spread and
notice if you double-click on the 2 and
| | 02:41 | the 3, the double number there,
that centers the spread in your view.
| | 02:44 | If you just double-click on one page,
it centers that one page on your screen.
| | 02:49 | So, if you want to center the spread
you double-click on the numbers underneath
| | 02:52 | the Page thumbnail instead of the actual page.
| | 02:54 | Okay, let's go ahead and do an
initial export to see what this looks like.
| | 02:58 | Let's do a File > Export or Command+E,
Ctrl+E on Windows and we'll choose SWF
| | 03:04 | as our file format.
| | 03:05 | Let's go ahead and name this Test.
| | 03:07 | We will go ahead and replace the one
that's there and we are going to be
| | 03:10 | doing this several times.
| | 03:11 | So, we'll just replace over the
current version that's on the Desktop there.
| | 03:16 | And we are going to go with the defaults here.
| | 03:19 | Spreads is turned on by default, we
have got our full Page Range, we'll the
| | 03:23 | leave the scale at 100%, we are
going to generate the HTML file so we can
| | 03:26 | preview this with, after we have exported.
| | 03:28 | Everything else, it's just the default settings.
| | 03:30 | Let's go ahead and click OK
and well that's kind of curious.
| | 03:33 | So, and you saw in the InDesign
document, we just had the one title page, the
| | 03:38 | cover page sitting by itself, we didn't
have a page to the left of it, but you
| | 03:43 | can see by default when you have got
Spreads turned on, InDesign creates a SWF
| | 03:47 | file that is the total width of
all the pages in the document.
| | 03:52 | So, when you are creating a Flash
file, a SWF that's get run in the Flash
| | 03:56 | Player, there can only be one what's
called a state size and that stage size is
| | 04:00 | going to be as wide as the widest
spread in the InDesign document.
| | 04:05 | So, that's why we have this left-hand page
here included in the initial cover page here.
| | 04:10 | So, by default we have got the
Interactive Page Curl effect turned on and when I
| | 04:14 | turn the next page, I can
see the double page spread.
| | 04:17 | When I get to the last page, same problem.
| | 04:19 | I don't just have the cover
by itself in blank area here.
| | 04:22 | So, we obviously have to do something
to our InDesign document to create the
| | 04:25 | illusion of this cover.
| | 04:27 | Let's go and check out a different
Export option because what some people might
| | 04:30 | try is turning off the Spreads
checkbox and let's do File > Export again or
| | 04:34 | Command+E or Ctrl+E. We'll choose
SWF again, we are going to go ahead and
| | 04:38 | replace the one we just tested.
| | 04:40 | Let's turn off Spreads just to make
sure that doesn't solve the problem.
| | 04:44 | I know a lot of people have played with
this to see if that's what causing the
| | 04:47 | issue in the first place.
| | 04:48 | Let's go ahead and click OK and no,
that doesn't solve the problem.
| | 04:51 | What that does is it just
treats the document as single pages.
| | 04:55 | It ignores the double page spread aspect of it.
| | 04:57 | So, now you never see a left and a
right page next to each other side-by-side.
| | 05:02 | Every page in the
document is just a single page.
| | 05:04 | So, that's not quite going to cut it.
| | 05:06 | Go ahead and close these
and come back to InDesign.
| | 05:10 | So, what I'm going to do here is I
need to create the illusion of a double
| | 05:13 | page spread as my first spread and I want my
last spread to be a double page spread as well.
| | 05:18 | So, it should be as easy as just
clicking on the page 6 thumbnail and dragging
| | 05:22 | it up to the left of page 1,
right. Well, not quite.
| | 05:26 | That's not how InDesign works by default.
| | 05:29 | By default, page 1 is always going to
be a single page spread and when you
| | 05:33 | have an even number of pages the last
spread will always be a one page spread as well.
| | 05:38 | To get this, to do what you want,
you need to go to the Pages panel and
| | 05:42 | choose the flyout menu, and turn off this
checkbox here, Allow Document Pages to Shuffle.
| | 05:47 | Let's go ahead and turn that off and now
this let's me grab page 6 and then move
| | 05:51 | it and attach it to the left of page 1.
| | 05:54 | Take a look at the thumbnail, icon preview,
the cursor preview, as you are dragging this.
| | 05:58 | What you want to look for is when you
drag it just to the left of the spine you
| | 06:01 | get a slightly different cursor and
when I let it go, now I have got the
| | 06:04 | document setup the way I want it.
| | 06:06 | Let's go ahead and export this one
more time just to see if we have pulled
| | 06:09 | off the illusion here.
| | 06:11 | I'll do Command+E, File > Export
and choose Test again.
| | 06:15 | We'll go ahead and save
over that and hit Replace.
| | 06:18 | We'll turn on Spreads this time because
we do want a double page spread here to
| | 06:22 | create the illusion.
| | 06:23 | Go ahead and click OK and I'm pretty close now.
| | 06:27 | I at least see that every spread on
the document is a double page spread.
| | 06:32 | In the very next video, we'll talk
about how to create the illusion of it
| | 06:36 | looking like a cover page on the front and back.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating the illusion of a book with a cover| 00:00 | So if we take a look at our test
export here for our SWF file for a digital
| | 00:05 | portfolio, we are looking at the first
spread and what we want is the cover page
| | 00:11 | to look like it's by itself.
| | 00:13 | So we don't want to see the pink
polygon here, but we also don't want to
| | 00:17 | see this white page.
| | 00:19 | Again what we said is that the SWF is always
going to be the total width of the spread size.
| | 00:25 | So what we need to do is create a page
that has a frame on it that matches the
| | 00:30 | color of the background
that this SWF is sitting in.
| | 00:33 | So the SWF file that we are
looking at here with a white background,
| | 00:36 | that's actually inserted into an
HTML container page and that HTML page
| | 00:40 | has a background color.
| | 00:42 | It just so happens of the hex value for
that background by default when exported
| | 00:46 | out of InDesign is 69, so 999999.
| | 00:50 | The RGB equivalent of that is 153 for all
three values, Red 153, Green 153 and Blue 153.
| | 00:59 | So what we need to do is create a
color swatch in InDesign that matches the
| | 01:03 | background color of the HTML page and
then create a frame on the left-hand page
| | 01:08 | of the first spread to create the illusion.
| | 01:11 | So let's go ahead and jump back over
to InDesign and pull off that effect.
| | 01:15 | So first thing we need to do is we
need to get rid of the object of the
| | 01:18 | left-hand page here because we want
this to be blank, we just want the
| | 01:21 | right-hand page of the spread to be the cover.
| | 01:24 | To override a master page item, I'm
going to hold down Command and Shift or
| | 01:27 | Ctrl+Shift on Windows, click on
that object and then we can delete it.
| | 01:30 | Let's do the same thing for the back cover.
| | 01:34 | Double-click on Page 6.
| | 01:36 | We don't want that object there, so
Command+Shift or Ctrl+Shift on Windows,
| | 01:40 | click on the object and hit Delete.
| | 01:41 | And let's go back to the first spread here.
| | 01:44 | Let's open up our Swatches panel by
clicking on the little dark gray strip to
| | 01:48 | the right of it and we are going to
create a new swatch by going to the flyout
| | 01:52 | menu and choosing New Color Swatch.
| | 01:55 | We want our Red value to be 153,
we'll hit the Tab key to jump to the next
| | 01:59 | field, 153 again, Tab key 153 one more
time and you can either name it with the
| | 02:06 | color values or we can turn off that
check-box and give it a custom name.
| | 02:10 | We can say HTML Background
Color, either way is fine.
| | 02:15 | If you want a different color for your
background page, let's say you are going
| | 02:18 | to be inserting this digital portfolio
final file into an existing website that
| | 02:23 | has got a different background color
in your HTML page, you just need to know
| | 02:27 | what color that is, the RGB values.
| | 02:29 | And you can easily figure that out in
Photoshop by typing in a hexadecimal
| | 02:33 | number and figuring out
what the RGB equivalents are.
| | 02:36 | And then just create a swatch in
InDesign and have the RGB values match the
| | 02:40 | background color of your HTML page.
| | 02:42 | All right, so I have got my HTML
Background color, I want this to be underneath
| | 02:46 | my black swatch so I'm just dragging
that around so I get it very quickly here.
| | 02:51 | All right, so I'm going to get my
Rectangular tool and I'll draw a frame on my
| | 02:55 | left-hand side of the page here
starting in the upper left- hand corner and
| | 03:00 | dragging down to the right-hand
corner to get exact and perfect.
| | 03:04 | Go ahead and Fit to Window,
Command+0 or Ctrl+0 on Windows.
| | 03:07 | If I want to fit the spread in the window,
that's Command+Option+0 or Ctrl+Alt+0
| | 03:13 | to fit the spread there.
| | 03:14 | So I have created this illusion, I
want to do it the same for the back page.
| | 03:18 | So I go ahead and collapse swatches and
double-click on Page 6 and I'll get my
| | 03:23 | Rectangle Frame tool again by clicking
on the tool and we'll drag out a frame
| | 03:27 | on this page as well.
| | 03:29 | Scroll down a little bit there, let
go and Fit to Window, Command+Option+0,
| | 03:33 | Ctrl+Alt+0 and I have completed the look.
| | 03:36 | All right, let's go ahead and export this to
see if it looks the way we need it to look.
| | 03:41 | Let's do Export, Command+E or Ctrl+E on Windows.
| | 03:45 | We'll do coverTest again and
just save over the existing one.
| | 03:48 | Yes, Replace, again just go
with the default settings here.
| | 03:51 | Go ahead and click OK.
| | 03:53 | There, it's looking closer.
| | 03:55 | So now it looks like I just
have a right-hand cover page.
| | 03:58 | There actually is a page here, but
because we have colored a frame the same
| | 04:02 | color as our HTML background, we have
created the illusion of just having a
| | 04:06 | floating single cover page here.
| | 04:08 | I'll click through there, take it to
our first spread, click again and then we
| | 04:13 | have got our stand-alone
back cover page, looking good.
| | 04:18 | Now, we don't have enough spreads in
the middle so let's go ahead and fix that.
| | 04:21 | Let's go back over to InDesign and
we want to add an additional spread.
| | 04:26 | So to do that, let's go ahead and
double-click on Pages 3 and 4 by clicking on
| | 04:30 | the numbers underneath the Page
thumbnail on the Pages panel and if we
| | 04:34 | right-click or Ctrl-click on the
thumbnail here we can see Insert Pages and I'm
| | 04:38 | going to insert two pages and I want to
insert a spread and I'm going to insert
| | 04:42 | them to the end of the document.
| | 04:45 | Go ahead and click OK and they get
inserted below the last cover page.
| | 04:50 | So as long as I have these two
thumbnail selected together I'll go ahead and
| | 04:53 | deselect, click and Shift-
click to select both thumbnails.
| | 04:57 | I can move them as a unit and what you
want to be careful is look where your
| | 05:01 | cursor is and the little
vertical black bar before you let go.
| | 05:04 | If I were to let go over them here, I
would end up creating a four page spread.
| | 05:09 | What I want is to insert them
after Page 4 and before Page 5.
| | 05:13 | So I'm looking for this vertical line
that's not attached to the page, but over
| | 05:16 | here that's a little bit
off to the right-hand side.
| | 05:18 | Go ahead and let go there and now I
have inserted those pages or removed those
| | 05:22 | pages in between pages 3 and
4 and that last cover page.
| | 05:26 | So there I have it, I have the
structure of my document and in the next
| | 05:30 | video, we are going to start adding
the spiral effect to get the illusion of
| | 05:34 | a spiral bound spine.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding the spiral-bound image to the edges| 00:00 | I'm going to continue building the
effect of the spiral bound digital portfolio
| | 00:04 | here, so we need to add our spiral graphics.
| | 00:07 | Let's get a little bit
document setup before we do that.
| | 00:09 | Let's add a layer and
rename the existing layers.
| | 00:12 | So I'm going to rename this layer by
double-clicking and call it Background, and
| | 00:16 | that's where this
background art will be. That's good.
| | 00:18 | Actually, I'm going to create
another layer here and call it Artwork.
| | 00:24 | We'll create a third layer and call it Spirals.
| | 00:27 | So we are just clicking the New button there.
| | 00:29 | Double-clicking the layer
name to change the name.
| | 00:31 | I'm going to change it
from Green to Orange. Sure.
| | 00:37 | Go ahead and click OK, and
now I have got my three layers.
| | 00:39 | Let's go put the background art on
the Background layer, so that is good.
| | 00:44 | That's already there, and I can tell that
by the little chiclet on the layer name.
| | 00:48 | So the same thing with the back
cover page that will be there.
| | 00:51 | Let's go to the master page and select
these two objects here, and we are going
| | 00:55 | to move that to the Artwork layer.
| | 00:56 | To do that, you just click on the chiclet and
drag it to the layer that you want it to go on.
| | 01:00 | Great!
| | 01:02 | We want our Spirals to be on the top
layer, so let's just target that layer on
| | 01:06 | the master page here before
we actually import our spiral.
| | 01:09 | So we are ready to bring that in.
| | 01:10 | Let's use File > Place or Command+D, and in
my Links folder, I have got a Spread_Spine.
| | 01:16 | So I have actually got two
different versions of the spiral graphic;
| | 01:19 | one for when the book is open,
because the spread will look a little bit
| | 01:23 | different, the spine would look
different, and then a different version for the
| | 01:26 | front and back cover.
| | 01:27 | So let's go ahead and choose Spread_
Spine, go ahead and click Open, and we are
| | 01:31 | going to place that right in the
middle of our page, and we'll just center
| | 01:35 | that by dragging it.
| | 01:36 | I get my Smart Guide feedback
letting me know that I have got it
| | 01:38 | perfectly centered there. Good!
| | 01:40 | So there is the middle of our spreads.
| | 01:41 | If we go ahead and double-click on a
regular double page spread here, like Page
| | 01:45 | 3 and 4, I can see I have
got my spiral graphic on there.
| | 01:49 | It's on a master page layer, so I get
the little dotted line and some of the
| | 01:52 | solid line, letting me know
that that is looking good.
| | 01:54 | Let's go back to the front page,
and you can see that I have got that
| | 01:57 | graphic there as well.
| | 01:59 | I want to override the Spirals'
artwork on the front and back cover and put a
| | 02:03 | custom version of that graphic instead.
| | 02:05 | So I'm going to hold down Command+
Shift or Ctrl+Shift on Windows and click on
| | 02:09 | that piece of artwork and
just go ahead and Delete it.
| | 02:12 | Then same thing for the last page.
| | 02:14 | Let's go double-click on that spread,
Command+Shift or Ctrl+Shift on Windows,
| | 02:18 | click on that version of
the spiral and Delete it.
| | 02:20 | Let's place the cover
version of that spiral graphic.
| | 02:25 | Let's go to File > Place or Command or Ctrl+
D. There is the cover version of the spine.
| | 02:30 | We'll go ahead and click Open.
| | 02:31 | We have got the Spirals layer targeted,
so let's go ahead and place that on this
| | 02:35 | page here, and we'll just drag it into position.
| | 02:38 | You can see the Smart Guide is
kicking in letting me know when I have got
| | 02:41 | it centered correctly. Looking great!
| | 02:43 | So that looks like the left-hand
page is blank, with a spiral bound
| | 02:48 | right-hand cover page.
| | 02:50 | Let's go ahead and copy this.
| | 02:52 | I'm going to select the graphic, Copy,
Edit > Copy or Command+C. I'm going to
| | 02:57 | go to the last page by double-clicking on the
7-8 to center the spread in the window there.
| | 03:03 | Let's do Edit > Paste in Place, so we
get a copy of that spiral bound book right
| | 03:08 | where it needs to be.
| | 03:09 | But to create the illusion of it being
in the back cover, we need to basically
| | 03:13 | rotate this graphic 180 degrees.
| | 03:16 | Easiest way to do that is to right-click
on this graphic and choose a
| | 03:19 | contextual menu, but before we do
that we want to make sure that the proxy
| | 03:22 | point is correctly chosen.
| | 03:24 | Right now the upper left-hand corner of
this object is the proxy point, this is
| | 03:28 | the center of transformation
when you add rotation or scale.
| | 03:31 | We want it to rotate from the center so
I'm just clicking that little center dot
| | 03:34 | in the Control panel.
| | 03:35 | Now I can right-click and choose
Transform > Rotate 180 degrees, and it rotates
| | 03:40 | right in place there. Cool!
| | 03:42 | Let's go ahead and take a look at
our exported results and see if we like
| | 03:46 | where this is going.
| | 03:48 | Do File > Export and again, we'll just
replace the existing coverTest there. Replace.
| | 03:55 | Great!
| | 03:56 | Go ahead and click OK.
| | 03:57 | Just go with all these default settings,
and there it's looking pretty darn good.
| | 04:02 | When I open it, I have
got my double page spread.
| | 04:04 | I click again, and then there is my back cover.
| | 04:06 | So it's looking pretty darn good.
| | 04:09 | Now, we need to do one more thing to
make this a little bit more realistic.
| | 04:13 | When you open up a spiral bound book,
there would be a natural gap between the pages.
| | 04:18 | So in the next video, we'll talk
about how to create the final illusion of
| | 04:22 | having the spiral bound book open correctly.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding the illusion of a gap between the open pages| 00:00 | Now I'm going to add two more elements
here to just create the final effect for
| | 00:06 | having this book look real.
| | 00:08 | What we are going to do is we are going
to add a gap between the open page spreads.
| | 00:12 | We don't want to accidentally select
the spiral graphic and reposition it.
| | 00:16 | It's going to get in our way.
| | 00:17 | So we are going to lock the Spirals layer.
| | 00:20 | And that means I won't be able to
select that object accidentally, and have
| | 00:24 | it be in my way there.
| | 00:25 | So that locks the layer for the entire
documents, so to wherever those spiral
| | 00:29 | graphics are, whether it's on the
master page, or the two local copies that
| | 00:32 | we have on the front and back cover, they
are not going to accidentally be selected.
| | 00:35 | So let's go edit the master page by double-
clicking on the Master Page thumbnail here.
| | 00:41 | I'm going to target the
Artwork layer by clicking on it.
| | 00:44 | And let's go get our Line tool right here.
| | 00:47 | My Swatches color is already set to the
HTML Background color that we created earlier.
| | 00:52 | So if it's not, just make sure it is.
| | 00:53 | I am going to go ahead and draw from
the top of the page, all the way down to
| | 00:59 | the bottom of the page here.
| | 01:00 | Just create a little stroke there.
| | 01:03 | And we are going to give it a 6 point weight.
| | 01:05 | It's picked up that fill
color of the HTML Background.
| | 01:08 | Okay, I'm going to go back and get
my Selection tool, Fit to Window,
| | 01:11 | Command+Option+0, Ctrl+Alt+0.
| | 01:14 | Now it's giving me this correct
illusion that when I opened up the pages here,
| | 01:18 | there is going to be a gap
there between the two spreads.
| | 01:21 | Let's go back to the cover page.
| | 01:23 | We don't actually want that
gap on the front and back cover.
| | 01:26 | So we'll Command+Shift-
click where that artwork is.
| | 01:29 | Go ahead and Delete it.
| | 01:31 | Let's go to the last page.
| | 01:32 | Let's go ahead and collapse the
Swatches panel, double-click on to the 7 and 8
| | 01:36 | to turn to that spread, then
Command+Shift or Ctrl+Shift on Windows.
| | 01:40 | And click on that artwork there and Delete it.
| | 01:42 | So that's looking good.
| | 01:43 | One last thing we need to do, when
you export this file, you have got the
| | 01:48 | Interactive Page Curl effect,
where you can grab the corner.
| | 01:51 | But if you are actually, turning the
pages by using the arrow keys, well let's
| | 01:55 | actually take a look at that.
| | 01:55 | Let's do File > Export real quick.
| | 01:57 | Again we'll just replace the existing coverTest.
| | 02:00 | And again we want to go
with all the default options.
| | 02:02 | The Interactive Page Curl there
is chosen, go ahead and click OK.
| | 02:05 | Let's scroll down a little bit.
| | 02:07 | So yes, we get the ability to turn the
page manually, but every Flash file that
| | 02:12 | InDesign exports that actually has
another method baked in to turn pages in the
| | 02:16 | final SWF file, and that's using
your right and left arrow keys.
| | 02:19 | So if I use my left arrow
key here, I'm turning the page.
| | 02:23 | If I use the right arrow, I'm turning the page.
| | 02:24 | I had the right encode.
| | 02:25 | It's just baked into the SWF file.
| | 02:27 | But you can see because these two
spreads are identical you can't tell, but
| | 02:30 | I'm using the right and left arrow
keys back and forth here, because the
| | 02:34 | content is the same.
| | 02:35 | It doesn't look like anything is happening here.
| | 02:37 | Now in a real document
each page would be different.
| | 02:39 | So it would be little bit more obvious.
| | 02:41 | But my point here is that the
transitions here are pretty rough.
| | 02:43 | It's just a static change.
| | 02:45 | What we want is a page transition.
| | 02:48 | Let's go back over to InDesign.
| | 02:49 | I'm going to right-click on the Page
thumbnail in the Pages panel and choose
| | 02:54 | Page Transitions, and then to Choose option.
| | 02:57 | And we want the Page Turn transition.
| | 02:59 | So this will give me the illusion of
the page flipping, when I use my keyboard
| | 03:04 | to turn the pages in the SWF file as well.
| | 03:06 | Note that this
transition is only for SWF export.
| | 03:08 | It doesn't work for PDF.
| | 03:10 | We are going to apply that to all
spreads, go ahead and click OK, the Page
| | 03:13 | Transitions panel opens, in
case I want change my mind.
| | 03:15 | There is no other attributes to
choose for the Page Turn transition.
| | 03:19 | So I'm just going to go
ahead and close that panel.
| | 03:21 | Let's re-export this and
see the final illusion effect.
| | 03:25 | Command+E or Ctrl+E on Windows to
bring up the Export dialog again.
| | 03:28 | It remembers my last settings.
| | 03:29 | So it's SWF we'll just
Save over the existing one.
| | 03:32 | And again we'll go ahead and
leave everything on by the defaults.
| | 03:35 | Now that we actually have Page
Transitions authored in the document.
| | 03:39 | This Include Page Transitions
checkbox will actually do something.
| | 03:42 | Now I'll go ahead and click
OK, and scroll down again.
| | 03:44 | So now I'm going to use my right arrow
key again to turn the page, and you will
| | 03:49 | see when the page turns, I can
actually see the effect of the page turning.
| | 03:53 | So I can either do it manually by
grabbing the corner, or I can use the arrow
| | 04:00 | keys on my keyboard, left arrow, left arrow, right
arrow, to pull off the final effect. Pretty cool!
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a clipped button to close the book| 00:02 | So on Tomasz's version, when we
open up the spread here and turn from
| | 00:05 | page-to-page, you'll notice that there
is this button in the upper left-hand
| | 00:08 | corner that closes the book
and takes you back to the cover.
| | 00:11 | It's kind of a nice effect.
| | 00:13 | So let's go create our version
of that in this document as well.
| | 00:16 | So to do it we are going to go ahead,
and go to the master page, because we want
| | 00:21 | that button to appear in every page.
| | 00:22 | We'll go ahead and pan down a little bit,
just so I'm on the Spacebar to get my
| | 00:25 | hand temporarily and moving that down a bit.
| | 00:27 | Let's go ahead and place the
artwork that we want to use as our button.
| | 00:30 | I'm going to go to do File > Place,
and in our Links folder, we've got this
| | 00:34 | Corner_Button.idms file. This is a Snippet.
| | 00:37 | If we went ahead and I save this
for you, it's basically already in the
| | 00:40 | position it needs to be in.
| | 00:41 | I'm going to go ahead and click Open.
| | 00:44 | It brings in that Q as a loaded cursor.
| | 00:46 | We want to change our
Preference before we place this.
| | 00:49 | I'm going to open up my Preferences panel,
Command+K on the Mac, Ctrl+K on Windows.
| | 00:53 | And in the File Handling section
there is a Snippet Import Option.
| | 00:57 | For those who don't know, a Snippet is
just a piece of artwork or whatever you
| | 01:01 | have selected in an InDesign document.
| | 01:04 | And when you save that selection as
a Snippet from your Export menu, you
| | 01:09 | are creating a special InDesign file that you
can then place in another InDesign document.
| | 01:13 | When you save a Snippet, you are
actually recording the original position of
| | 01:18 | that artwork in the Snippet file and
you can choose to place it at its original
| | 01:22 | location when you import it.
| | 01:23 | So that's what I'm doing here, I'm
changing my Preference Snippet Import to
| | 01:26 | Position at Original Location.
| | 01:27 | Go ahead and click OK.
| | 01:28 | And now it doesn't matter
where I click in my page.
| | 01:31 | It's going to go exactly where I need it to go.
| | 01:34 | Okay, so we want to turn this into a button.
| | 01:36 | To do that, we'll just go
ahead and click on that artwork.
| | 01:38 | We'll go to our Buttons panel, and
we're going to go turn it into a button by
| | 01:42 | turning on the Normal state, click on
Rollover to get a rollover state, and
| | 01:45 | let's change its Fill
Color in the rollover state.
| | 01:48 | Let's just give it this blue color let's say.
| | 01:51 | I'll collapse our Pages panel here
real quick, and we'll make the Fill blue.
| | 01:56 | So there is Normal, there is Rollover.
| | 01:59 | Let's name the button Close Book.
| | 02:02 | And on the click of the button or on
the release of the button, we want it to
| | 02:06 | Go to the First Page.
| | 02:08 | Let's go ahead and take a look,
and see what the result of that is.
| | 02:13 | Go ahead and do Command+E or File > Export.
| | 02:16 | We'll just go ahead and replace our
existing test file there, if there is one.
| | 02:20 | Go ahead and hit Replace, if that comes up.
| | 02:22 | And go ahead and go with all the
default options again, go ahead and click OK.
| | 02:27 | We get this warning saying there is
transparency, we can just go ahead and ignore that.
| | 02:31 | And I'll get the first page.
| | 02:32 | It doesn't have it.
| | 02:33 | That's right, because
it's on the left hand page.
| | 02:36 | Now you can actually see it sitting
there so we do want to actually get rid of
| | 02:38 | that on that master page.
| | 02:40 | When I click on the page there,
everything is looking great, except I do have
| | 02:45 | one problem, ooh, look at that.
| | 02:48 | What you've just learned here is that
InDesign does not clip your artwork to the
| | 02:53 | page bounds in the exported SWF.
| | 02:56 | If the content actually extends beyond
the page, it gets included in the output.
| | 03:00 | Now sometimes that might be what you
want, maybe you want this illusion where
| | 03:03 | the button hangs outside the page.
| | 03:05 | I'm guessing in this
example that's not what I want.
| | 03:07 | Especially when you click on the button
you see I get a little remnant of that
| | 03:11 | button sitting there, so
we need to fix that problem.
| | 03:13 | Let's go back over to InDesign, and
let's begin by converting this artwork back
| | 03:19 | into being just an object
instead of being a button.
| | 03:21 | So I'm going to click in the Normal state.
| | 03:22 | I'm going to use the Convert Button to an
Object button at the bottom of the Buttons panel.
| | 03:28 | Yes, this is going to get rid of all
the interactivity. Okay, that's fine.
| | 03:31 | What we need to do is put this custom
artwork in a frame that clips it to the
| | 03:36 | edge of the page there.
| | 03:37 | So it doesn't extend beyond the bounds.
| | 03:39 | So I'm going to go ahead and select that.
| | 03:40 | I'm going to cut it through the
Clipboard, so Edit > Cut or Command+X, Ctrl+X.
| | 03:45 | And let's just draw a rectangle here
in the corner of the page, and then I'm
| | 03:49 | going to give it a Fill of None.
| | 03:51 | Little shortcut for you.
| | 03:52 | If I've got my Fill proxy chosen, I
can just hit my Slash key on my keyboard
| | 03:57 | with the Question Mark key to apply a color of
None to that selected object. It's kind of nice.
| | 04:02 | I've got my frame selected.
| | 04:04 | I want to paste that Q that I cut to
the Clipboard directly in that frame.
| | 04:09 | So we'll do Edit > Paste Into, and
that pastes it into the frame, and it
| | 04:14 | remembers the current location.
| | 04:15 | So now this frame is
actually clipping that artwork.
| | 04:20 | So I'm not going to get that extra Q
outside the page bound when I export this to SWF.
| | 04:25 | Now we need to turn this into a button instead.
| | 04:27 | So we'll go to our Buttons panel,
turn on Normal, turn on Rollover.
| | 04:30 | Let's go and change the Fill color.
| | 04:33 | What's going on there?
| | 04:34 | Well, we have changed the Fill color of
the frame that that artwork is sitting in.
| | 04:38 | So let's undo that, Command+Z or Ctrl
+Z. What we need to do is select the
| | 04:42 | artwork inside that frame, and
that's what Direct Selection tool is for.
| | 04:46 | I am going to press the letter A
to switch to the Direct Select tool.
| | 04:49 | That selects the path of the frame.
| | 04:51 | I'm going to click in the
frame to select the Q directly.
| | 04:55 | And now on the Rollover state in Buttons
panel, I can choose a different Fill for that.
| | 04:59 | So there is Normal, there is Rollover.
| | 05:01 | So you can create these clipped buttons
just to get to the actual artwork inside
| | 05:06 | the frame you are using to clip it,
use the Direct Selection tool.
| | 05:10 | All right, so we've got our
button object selected again.
| | 05:12 | Let's go rename it from Button 2 to Close Book.
| | 05:17 | When you click on the button on
release of the mouse you want it to go to the
| | 05:22 | first page, that completes the effect.
| | 05:26 | Let's close the Buttons panel, we'll close
Swatches, and reopen Pages, drag that up.
| | 05:31 | The last thing we need to do is make
sure that that button artwork is not on the
| | 05:36 | front and back covers.
| | 05:37 | So let's go to page 1 and 2.
| | 05:39 | We are going to override this object,
Command+Shift-click, Ctrl+Shift-click on
| | 05:43 | Windows, and then just delete it from
that page, do the same thing on the back
| | 05:47 | cover, double-click on the page
to go there, Command+Shift-click,
| | 05:50 | Ctrl+Shift-click to override it,
and then hit the Delete key.
| | 05:54 | Let's go back to page 1 and 2 and we
are ready to test our export and take a
| | 05:58 | look at the final result.
| | 06:00 | Command+E, Ctrl+E on Windows
to export, or File > Export.
| | 06:03 | Go ahead and just Save over our previous test.
| | 06:06 | Again, just leave all the settings the way
they were, click OK, ignore that. And let's see.
| | 06:12 | Is there any hidden button over here?
| | 06:14 | No, so we are not getting
the Rollover feedback there.
| | 06:16 | When I turn the page, I've got
my Q button there. That's good.
| | 06:20 | When I hover over it I get the Rollover effect.
| | 06:24 | Let's turn the page one more time, and then
I click on the Q it closes the book for me.
| | 06:29 | So there you have it.
| | 06:29 | You have the basic building blocks to
create your own interactive spiral bound,
| | 06:34 | page-turnable digital portfolio.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Applying a subtle drop shadow Object Style| 00:02 | One additional thing I'd like to point
out that Tomasz has done, he has made
| | 00:05 | really good use of Object Styles.
| | 00:07 | Let's take a look at page 3 and 4 here.
| | 00:09 | This is first spread, and this is just
a typical InDesign document where he has
| | 00:13 | laid out a lot of artwork and added some text.
| | 00:16 | All these graphics are placed externally,
from either Illustrator or even other
| | 00:20 | InDesign files or Photoshop files or whatever.
| | 00:23 | What he has done is actually created
Object Styles to create special effects,
| | 00:28 | consistent for all the placed graphics,
instead of having to deal with say
| | 00:31 | adding a nice soft Drop
Shadow in Photoshop or Illustrator.
| | 00:34 | You can just bring in the artwork and
apply a uniform Drop Shadow style, and
| | 00:39 | apply that to all the placed artwork.
| | 00:40 | So we are going to go ahead and do that as well.
| | 00:42 | Take a look at page 7 and 8.
| | 00:44 | These t-shirts already have that nice
consistent Drop Shadow applied to them.
| | 00:48 | That's an object style that
was created inside InDesign.
| | 00:50 | These t-shirt files are just placed
Illustrator files or they could be done
| | 00:53 | in InDesign as well.
| | 00:54 | It depends on where the artwork is coming from.
| | 00:56 | Let's go back to page 3 and 4.
| | 00:58 | Let's begin by opening up our Object
Styles panel, under the Window menu
| | 01:02 | choose Object Styles.
| | 01:03 | You can see that this artwork has already
been tagged with this Placed Artwork style.
| | 01:09 | Creating an Object Style is pretty
just like creating a paragraph style
| | 01:12 | or character style.
| | 01:13 | You just select the object, format it
the way you want it, click the New button
| | 01:17 | and give it a name, and that's now
have been tagged with that style.
| | 01:20 | So what we are going to do is we
are going to add a special effect to
| | 01:23 | this particular object.
| | 01:24 | We're going to go to our fx button and
choose Drop Shadow in the Control panel here.
| | 01:29 | That will open up the Effects dialog box,
and it remembers the last settings, so
| | 01:35 | these may not be the defaults, but we
are going to set the Opacity to say 25%,
| | 01:40 | for the object Drop Shadow effect.
| | 01:41 | We want the Distance to be very
subtle, 2 pixels or 2 millimeters here.
| | 01:46 | The Size is just 2 millimeters as well.
| | 01:48 | If I turn on the Preview check box, I can
actually see the effect of that Drop Shadow.
| | 01:52 | So it's going to make it
pop off the page a little bit.
| | 01:55 | In the case of the letter and
envelop you're going to actually see some
| | 01:59 | separation between the two, because
right now it's just white on white, so you
| | 02:01 | can't really see the edges, the Drop
Shadow is going to fix that for us.
| | 02:05 | So I've just created this effect,
and we go ahead and click OK.
| | 02:08 | Now the trick is we want all the
artwork that has been tagged with the Placed
| | 02:12 | Artwork style to pick up
that Drop Shadow effect.
| | 02:14 | Right now I have done
what's called a Local Override.
| | 02:17 | Only this one frame, this one placed image
has that Drop Shadow effect applied to it.
| | 02:22 | The Placed Artwork style now has a
Plus sign next to it, letting me know that
| | 02:26 | it's a local override.
| | 02:27 | So what we are going to do is right-click
or Ctrl-click on the Placed Artwork,
| | 02:31 | and say Redefine Style based on the
object that I currently have selected.
| | 02:35 | Go ahead and do that.
| | 02:37 | And now you'll see instantly it repels
through the entire document, every object
| | 02:40 | that had already been tagged with the
Placed Artwork style now picks up that
| | 02:44 | Drop Shadow as well.
| | 02:45 | So it makes it a lot easier to manage the
final appearance of your Placed Artwork.
| | 02:51 | If you create an object style that
has the desired special effects, in this
| | 02:55 | case, a very subtle Drop Shadow, in
that way you can edit it freely inside
| | 02:59 | InDesign without having to go back
and do Edit Original on all your placed
| | 03:02 | graphics, if you decide that you know
what, the Opacity of your Drop Shadow that
| | 03:05 | you rendered in Photoshop
needs to be 50% now instead of 25%.
| | 03:07 | All right, we'll close the
Object Styles panel, and that's it.
| | 03:11 | Let's go ahead and export this final
piece that's basically structured the exact
| | 03:17 | same way as the samples we've been working on.
| | 03:19 | It's got the spiral in the center.
| | 03:20 | It's got the button to
close the book and so forth.
| | 03:22 | Let's do File > Export, choose SWF, I'll
Save it our desktop, and well, let's do
| | 03:30 | say Final whatever, and click Save.
| | 03:33 | We've got all the options we want
Include the Buttons, Include the Hyperlinks,
| | 03:36 | those transitions, and the Page Curl.
| | 03:38 | We've done our compression setting.
| | 03:40 | We want everything to go out
as a JPEG, with a High Quality.
| | 03:42 | Medium might be fine.
| | 03:43 | It depends on what file size you want.
| | 03:46 | And we'll leave the Scale
alone, go ahead and click OK.
| | 03:49 | Ignore that button there, and in a
second or two, it will pop that up, and open
| | 03:54 | it up in a Browser where we can see
the final result. So there it is.
| | 03:58 | We've exported it.
| | 03:59 | I've got the Interactive Page Curl,
and there is the nice Drop Shadow
| | 04:02 | effect that we created.
| | 04:03 | There is the button similar to what we
created the clipped button to close the cover.
| | 04:07 | So here you have it, I hope that
inspires you to create your own interesting
| | 04:11 | interactive digital portfolio.
| | 04:13 | It's just a little bit different than
just your standard thumbnails clicking
| | 04:16 | on to a larger image.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
8. Creating a Digital Magazine with InDesign and FlashExporting a SWF prototype for a Flash developer| 00:00 | If you've been following along in this
course, you've seen that InDesign can
| | 00:03 | be used to create a variety of digital
documents with just using InDesign by itself.
| | 00:07 | You can create presentations and
portfolios and simple interactivity, with
| | 00:12 | button clicks, hyperlinks,
page transitions, and whatnot.
| | 00:15 | If you want to create something that's
complex as a digital magazine, like some
| | 00:18 | of the examples you saw in Chapter 01,
and at some point you are probably going
| | 00:21 | to need to partner up with a Flash
developer, or learn how to use Flash
| | 00:25 | yourself, and that's kind
of the focus of this chapter.
| | 00:27 | It's the hand-off workflow,
using InDesign in conjunction with
| | 00:31 | Flash Professional.
| | 00:32 | So what we've got here is the
layout of our digital magazine.
| | 00:36 | And one thing it is kind of useful for is a
designer who knows very little about Flash.
| | 00:41 | You can use InDesign to create a
Prototype to show your Flash developer, to try
| | 00:45 | to show what it is that you have in
mind, in terms of page flow, some simple
| | 00:49 | interaction, maybe placeholder content
for where you want a video to be inserted
| | 00:53 | and certain things like that.
| | 00:54 | So that's what I've done
in this particular document.
| | 00:56 | It's going to be the same file that we
use to export to something that Flash
| | 01:02 | Professional itself can open
and then continue to work on.
| | 01:05 | But from the same source file we can
create an interactive prototype that we can
| | 01:09 | show our developer as a communication tool.
| | 01:11 | So if we take a look at the document,
it's a standard InDesign document.
| | 01:15 | It's got use of master pages, so you
can see at the top of every row is the
| | 01:19 | Header buttons, and something that's
really easy to do in InDesign is just put
| | 01:23 | that bunch of content on a master
page and have it show up on every single
| | 01:27 | page, things like that.
| | 01:28 | If we go to the master page we can
actually double-click and see the master
| | 01:32 | page content by itself.
| | 01:33 | I'm going to get out of Preview
mode, press the W key for that.
| | 01:36 | And you can see I've got a variety of
buttons here that I have already defined.
| | 01:39 | I'm going to go ahead and click on
this button and bring up the Buttons panel
| | 01:41 | just to show you what's going on here.
| | 01:43 | It's got simple rollover states so it's
slightly faded, and then when you mouse
| | 01:47 | over it becomes full strength, 100%
Opacity, and it's got a simple Go To Page
| | 01:52 | button action, telling you to
go to page 4 in this prototype.
| | 01:55 | So nothing real complicated, pretty
easy to do, we've seen how to do this type
| | 01:59 | of document in the previous chapters.
| | 02:01 | Let's go ahead and export this as a SWF
file, as a Flash file and then preview
| | 02:06 | that in the Browser.
| | 02:07 | So we'll do File > Export, and
we'll choose SWF as our file format.
| | 02:13 | I'm just going to name it Prototype.swf.
| | 02:15 | Go ahead and save it.
| | 02:17 | I want to do all the pages except the
actual size we were intending to publish that.
| | 02:21 | So, it's already 1024x768.
| | 02:23 | We are going to include the buttons,
the hyperlinks and the page transitions.
| | 02:26 | We are skipping the Interactive
Page Curl for now, and I've got my JPEG
| | 02:29 | Quality set to High.
| | 02:30 | Now, since it's a prototype
I'm going to actually go Maximum.
| | 02:32 | This is not a file that will
end up in final production.
| | 02:34 | This is just a prototype.
| | 02:35 | The file size is really not
that much of an issue here.
| | 02:37 | You can go ahead and click OK, and it's
going to give me a warning. That's okay.
| | 02:42 | We don't really need to worry
about our said text for now.
| | 02:44 | And after it does its
thing it will launch the browser.
| | 02:48 | And you'll see it's a great piece that
you could email the Flash developer if
| | 02:52 | you are working remotely or you can at
least click through with them as you are
| | 02:56 | talking about where to go from here
and the initial layout and whatnot.
| | 03:00 | So these buttons have rollovers, and you
can click to navigate from page-to-page.
| | 03:03 | It's got the Page Turn
transition there and so forth.
| | 03:07 | It's got a Home button.
| | 03:08 | If I click on the check logo, it
takes me back to the first page.
| | 03:11 | This is a button to take me to a page
where I need the Flash developer or me if
| | 03:15 | I'm going to learn how to use
Flash, how to insert a Flash video.
| | 03:18 | So this is just placeholder content,
we'll replace that once we are in Flash
| | 03:21 | Professional and import the real
movie, and this can take us back to the
| | 03:24 | Home page and so forth.
| | 03:26 | I mean that's pretty much
the gist of this prototype.
| | 03:29 | It's just a nice way instead of just sending
a static screen shot or a Photoshop mockup.
| | 03:35 | This has actually got some level of
interactivity, and it really helps
| | 03:38 | communicate the vision between the
designer and the developer. So that's it.
| | 03:42 | You can go ahead and export a
prototype SWF before you export your file that
| | 03:47 | you will be handing off to your Flash
developer, and we'll cover that in the next video.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Handing off the InDesign layout by exporting to XFL| 00:00 | Okay, we are ready to export
this document and hand it over to
| | 00:03 | Flash Professional.
| | 00:05 | We have done all the layout, we have
done our spell checking, we have got all
| | 00:07 | our copy and graphics in place.
| | 00:10 | It's not time to just send this over to a
file that Flash Professional can accept.
| | 00:14 | To do that, you go to File > Export,
and from your format list, you'll choose a
| | 00:18 | new option in InDesign CS4.
| | 00:20 | That's Adobe Flash CS4 Professional.
| | 00:22 | Now, the file extension happens to be XFL.
| | 00:24 | Not really all that important.
| | 00:26 | What that is it's just an XML based
version of a FLA file, and this is an
| | 00:29 | interchange file format that
InDesign can write out and Flash can open.
| | 00:33 | Incidentally, in case you are interested,
After Effects can also export an XFL
| | 00:38 | file, so you can do some pretty crazy
animation, split that out as an XFL file.
| | 00:42 | And then you can open that up
in Flash Professional as well.
| | 00:44 | So, let's go ahead and
choose XFL as our file format.
| | 00:47 | We'll save this to our Desktop, and
we'll say Check_Mag.xfl as our file format
| | 00:53 | name, and go ahead and click Save.
| | 00:55 | Very simple dialog box comes up,
says how do you want to scale it?
| | 00:58 | We are going to put it out at 100%,
because we have already designed it to be a
| | 01:02 | digital document upfront.
| | 01:03 | So we chose a pixel based
document size, 1024x768.
| | 01:06 | I'm going to include all
the pages in the document.
| | 01:09 | You could just do one page at a time,
depending on what you are trying to achieve.
| | 01:12 | Now, you are probably not going to do
this very often, but every once in a
| | 01:14 | while, you might want to
just bitmap the whole page.
| | 01:16 | So you do have the Rasterize Pages
option, and then under Text, more often than
| | 01:20 | not, you are going to choose this
first choice, InDesign Text To Flash Text.
| | 01:24 | That is going to keep
the text somewhat editable.
| | 01:26 | I'll explain somewhat in further video,
but basically the text remains editable
| | 01:32 | text where you can go and
change the characters if you need to.
| | 01:35 | If you are really worried about
preserving the appearance of your type, so
| | 01:39 | perhaps you are not going to have a
font available, you want to convert them
| | 01:42 | to outlines, or you have a special
effect on your text that you want to
| | 01:45 | rasterize to preserve.
| | 01:46 | You have those two options there as well.
| | 01:48 | So we are just going to go
with the default, click OK.
| | 01:50 | It gives you a warning, which is kind of nice,
that you have overset text on these pages.
| | 01:54 | We are going to go ahead
and ignore that for now.
| | 01:56 | What it's doing is it's
writing out a single file.
| | 01:58 | If you are used to InDesign, and you
have used the Package command, you know
| | 02:01 | that that creates a folder, and
it puts your InDesign document.
| | 02:04 | It creates a Links folder and places all
your placed files in that links folder.
| | 02:08 | It can also generate a Fonts
folder for you, and so forth.
| | 02:11 | The XFL process is a little bit different.
| | 02:13 | I'm going to go ahead and close this
document, and not save changes here, and go
| | 02:17 | out to our Desktop, and I'll
just show you that. There it is.
| | 02:20 | There is that single file.
| | 02:24 | It's just a single XFL file.
| | 02:25 | This is actually a package zip file,
and if you were to unpackage it, you
| | 02:29 | would see all the assets inside it,
but it makes it real easy to send over to
| | 02:33 | your Flash developer.
| | 02:34 | You can email it, zip it up and email
it to them, or do whatever you are going
| | 02:37 | to need it to do it to, give that to the
person who is going to continue on the work.
| | 02:40 | So there you have it pretty simple.
| | 02:42 | In the next video, we are actually
going to open that XFL file in Flash
| | 02:45 | Professional and start adding to it
by adding additional content, adding
| | 02:49 | interactivity, buttons of video and so forth.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Opening the XFL file in Flash CS4 Professional| 00:00 | Okay, here we are in Flash CS4 Professional.
| | 00:03 | We are ready to open the XFL file
that we exported in the previous video.
| | 00:07 | So let's go click the Open button and
navigate to our XFL file that we have got there.
| | 00:12 | It is in our Exercise Files
folder here, Check_Mag.xfl.
| | 00:15 | I'm going to go ahead and click Open,
and Flash starts to do its thing.
| | 00:18 | It processes that XML file and
starts to turn it into a Flash file.
| | 00:23 | When it's finished, I'll kind of
give you a tour on what's going on in
| | 00:26 | the resulting file.
| | 00:27 | Okay, so here we have it.
| | 00:29 | Now, let's talk about the
conversion process here.
| | 00:31 | You'll notice that the layout looks pretty
much exactly like it did inside InDesign.
| | 00:36 | That's kind of the whole point of the
feature, what you see is what you get.
| | 00:40 | So if I click over in the
frame two, there is the next page.
| | 00:43 | If you will, if you click on frame 3,
there is that placeholder page where we
| | 00:46 | are going to put the video
in layer, page 4, and so on.
| | 00:50 | Now, first when you click on the frame,
Flash is caching the contents of that
| | 00:54 | frame in the memory, so then the next
time you click on the frame, it's a lot
| | 00:57 | faster than the first time.
| | 00:58 | So if we click on this frame --
we haven't clicked on this one yet.
| | 01:01 | It's going take a brief second, and
then the next time when we go, it's
| | 01:03 | pretty much instantaneous.
| | 01:05 | So what Flash has done, or what we
have done with the InDesign file over to
| | 01:10 | mapping it to Flash, InDesign has
the notion of pages of course, right.
| | 01:14 | Flash doesn't have pages, but it has a
timeline, and it has a building block, a
| | 01:18 | basic building block, called a Symbol.
| | 01:20 | So what ends up happen here is that
every page or every spread in the InDesign
| | 01:23 | document gets wrapped up
into what's called a Symbol.
| | 01:27 | Now, you can think of symbols, if you
are coming from InDesign and don't know
| | 01:30 | what a symbol is, a symbol is kind of
like a fancy name for a group, except the
| | 01:34 | symbol a group, where the symbol
nomenclature here, can be addressed
| | 01:38 | through ActionScripts.
| | 01:39 | So you can tell that symbol to do
something based on code, and I'll talk
| | 01:42 | about that later on.
| | 01:43 | But anyway, here we have got our
pages wrapped up in the symbol, and then
| | 01:46 | each symbol representing each spread
is placed on a frame in the timeline,
| | 01:51 | each on its own frame.
| | 01:53 | So it's in a sense, we're laying out
that the document has a series of pages
| | 01:56 | from left to right, and as a I scrub
the playhead, you can actually see it's
| | 02:00 | navigating through these series of pages.
| | 02:03 | If we double-click on the spread or
double-click on the symbol that's on the
| | 02:08 | stage here, notice that breadcrumb trail
here at the top, we are starting in the
| | 02:13 | main scene, we have now dove in to Spread 1.
| | 02:16 | That's the name of the movie clip, the
name of the symbol that was generated
| | 02:20 | when we went from InDesign to Flash.
| | 02:22 | Once we are inside of this movie
clip, inside of this Spread 1 symbol,
| | 02:27 | you'll see that you still have
access to all the individual elements that
| | 02:30 | you saw in the InDesign file.
| | 02:32 | So here is my text frames, and I
can double-click and select that text.
| | 02:37 | I can go back and select the graphics,
group them, start animating them, do
| | 02:42 | whatever I want to do to them.
| | 02:44 | To get back to the main scene, the main
timeline, where all the other pages are,
| | 02:47 | I just click back on Scene 1,
and I'm back at that top level.
| | 02:50 | If you take a look at the Library,
let's expand our panel dock over here, and
| | 02:54 | click on Library, there are all the
assets that came in from the InDesign file
| | 02:58 | that were included in that XFL file.
| | 03:00 | So there's all the individual movie
clips for each page, and then there are all
| | 03:04 | the images that were placed
in that InDesign document.
| | 03:06 | So that document structure
is still there and maintained.
| | 03:10 | All right, so that's kind of an
overview of how the process works when you go
| | 03:14 | from InDesign to Flash, and how Flash
represents that InDesign content in its
| | 03:18 | own authoring environment.
| | 03:19 | In the next video, we'll
actually start making this interactive.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding a stop action to the first frame| 00:00 | We have got our InDesign content open
inside Flash Professional, we have got our
| | 00:03 | pages laid out in frames on the main
timeline in Flash, and I'm ready to export
| | 00:07 | this in preview in the Flash Player.
| | 00:09 | Now, if you have been following along
in this course or you have exported a
| | 00:12 | Flash file out of InDesign directly a
SWF file, you might have a different
| | 00:16 | expectation of what's going to
happen next when we do this in Flash.
| | 00:19 | Let's go ahead and show you what I mean.
| | 00:21 | To test a movie, you can just hold down
the Command key and press Return, or in
| | 00:24 | Windows it would be Ctrl+Enter, and that will
test your movie and export that as a Flash file.
| | 00:30 | Now, let's take a look
at what's going to happen.
| | 00:31 | It would be a lot different than if
you had exported this out of InDesign.
| | 00:34 | It's like woo-wee, hey.
| | 00:35 | So, before this causes a seizure,
let's go ahead and close that.
| | 00:39 | What's going on there?
| | 00:40 | Well, Flash is a timeline metaphor.
| | 00:43 | I mean it's going to play.
| | 00:44 | When you export a SWF out of Flash, it's
going to play each frame in succession,
| | 00:49 | just like a keyframe animation
or cell based animation tool.
| | 00:52 | What's happening when
you export out of InDesign?
| | 00:55 | InDesign is including a stop action, a
little piece of ActionScript code at the
| | 01:00 | end of every frame that tells the
Flash Player to stop itself from playing.
| | 01:04 | This file doesn't have anything like
that, so one of the first pieces of code
| | 01:07 | that you are going to have to write is this
thing called the Stop Action. Don't worry.
| | 01:11 | It's not hard.
| | 01:12 | We just need to set up the
file a little bit before we do it.
| | 01:14 | When we opened up the XFL file and
brought it into Flash, it brought in all the
| | 01:18 | page symbols on layer 1.
| | 01:20 | We are going to rename Layer 1
just by double-clicking on it.
| | 01:22 | We'll call it Pages.
| | 01:23 | I'm going to create a new layer.
| | 01:25 | We are going to call this Buttons.
| | 01:27 | We are going to use this Buttons
layer to create some overlay hit zones or
| | 01:31 | target zone that you can click on
to go to frame to frame, and then our
| | 01:34 | artwork, from page to page.
| | 01:35 | We are going to create one layer at the
very top where we are going to put our
| | 01:38 | ActionScript code, so
we'll call it ActionScript.
| | 01:42 | So, on the very first frame, instead of
having the Flash Player, just play every
| | 01:46 | frame one after the other, we are
going to put a little piece of code right
| | 01:49 | there, using our Actions Editor.
| | 01:51 | Let's go the Window menu pulldown to
Actions, and we are going to type in this
| | 01:56 | ActionScript code, stop();. That's it.
| | 02:01 | That's all you got to type.
| | 02:03 | Let's go ahead and test our movie again.
| | 02:04 | That's Command+Return or Ctrl+Enter.
| | 02:06 | It does its thing, exports that again,
and this time it's going to stop on the
| | 02:12 | first frame, which is what we want,
because we want to be able to let the viewer
| | 02:15 | control where they are going to
go next in this digital magazine.
| | 02:18 | If they want to go see the cover
story, they can click on that button.
| | 02:20 | If they want to jump over here,
they can click on this button instead.
| | 02:22 | So that stop action just prevents it
from playing nonstop in a looping fashion.
| | 02:27 | Okay, there is your first
little bit of ActionScript.
| | 02:30 | Feeling strong, feeling encouraged?
| | 02:31 | All right, let's continue on.
| | 02:33 | In the next video, we'll talk about
starting to animate the check logo.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Animating the masthead with a Motion Preset| 00:00 | All right, in this video, we want to
make this logo, this check masthead,
| | 00:05 | animate into position when they
first open this digital magazine.
| | 00:09 | Well, where does this logo live?
| | 00:10 | Well, it is inside the
symbol that is on Frame 1.
| | 00:14 | So right now we are on Scene 1, the
main timeline where all the pages are.
| | 00:18 | If we double-click on that symbol,
we'll be placed inside the Spread 1 symbol,
| | 00:23 | and we are now looking at the
timeline inside that symbol.
| | 00:27 | So I don't see the rest of the pages anymore.
| | 00:29 | I just see the content on this one layer.
| | 00:31 | We can go and call this the Content layer.
| | 00:34 | Just double-click on the name to rename it.
| | 00:36 | What we want to do is we want to select
the elements that make up this logo, and
| | 00:39 | go ahead and animate them.
| | 00:40 | Let's begin by selecting these
three elements that make up a logo.
| | 00:44 | That's Shift-click on these
three pieces of artwork here.
| | 00:48 | This is just a logo that
was drawn inside Illustrator.
| | 00:51 | Well, let's go to our Window
menu and choose Motion Presets.
| | 00:55 | For a designer, this is a
great new feature in Flash CS4.
| | 00:59 | It's really nice way to get you
started learning how to animate inside Flash
| | 01:03 | without having to deal with setting
keyframes and figuring how to use the
| | 01:06 | timeline and whatnot.
| | 01:07 | This is the Motion Presets panel,
and as you click on a particular Motion
| | 01:12 | Preset, you get a little preview, a
little generic preview of what applying this
| | 01:16 | animations your object would get you.
| | 01:18 | So I want to click in the fly-in-top animation.
| | 01:21 | I want to this logo to fly in from off
screen and end in its final position.
| | 01:25 | Now, if I click the Apply button right
now, I'm not going to get what I want
| | 01:28 | because Flash assumes that your current
location is where you want your Motion
| | 01:34 | Preset to start from.
| | 01:36 | So if I were going to apply the fly-in-top
preset to this, this logo would
| | 01:40 | start here and move down.
| | 01:42 | I actually want the opposite.
| | 01:43 | I want it to end here, not start from there.
| | 01:45 | So there is a little trick there.
| | 01:46 | If you hold down the Shift key when you
click the Apply button, it applies the
| | 01:51 | reverse, and tells me here I
have got multiple objects selected.
| | 01:54 | Yes, that's okay, go ahead and click OK.
| | 01:56 | If you see what happened, what Flash did
for me is it applied that Motion Preset.
| | 01:59 | It said oh okay.
| | 02:00 | You have the Shift key down, so that's where
you want your animation to end, I got that.
| | 02:04 | I'm going to start from off the
stage here, and animate it into position.
| | 02:09 | What it did is it automatically turned
it into a motion tween, and as I moved my
| | 02:13 | playhead to the right and left, you
can see that animation scrubbing here.
| | 02:17 | I have animated this over one
second, so it's 24 frames per second.
| | 02:22 | This is kind of where you start to
get the notion of our timeline here.
| | 02:26 | The rest of the content
only has one frame of duration.
| | 02:30 | So what we need to do is extend the
keyframes for the Content layer to match up
| | 02:35 | with the Logo layer as well.
| | 02:36 | So I'm going to click at Frame 24, at
the end of the logo animation, right-click
| | 02:42 | on that and say Insert Keyframe.
| | 02:44 | Now, as I scrub from left to right, I
can see all of the content, and I can see
| | 02:48 | that logo animated into position.
| | 02:50 | I might want to rename Layer 3 and
call that Masthead, and it has a little
| | 02:55 | special icon telling me that that's a
motion preset layer, or a motion tween layer.
| | 03:00 | All right, let's test our movie.
| | 03:03 | Let's do Command+Enter or Ctrl+Enter, and
see what this looks like in the final output.
| | 03:08 | Okay, it's looking great.
| | 03:11 | It's stopping on the first frame,
but what's going on with that logo?
| | 03:15 | It just keeps animating
over and over and over again.
| | 03:17 | We are going to talk about
that in the very next video.
| | 03:20 | I'll talk about why that's
happening, and how to prevent it.
| | 03:22 | So, come on back.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Testing the animation and preventing it from looping| 00:00 | So what we are looking at here is a SWF
file that was tested from this FLA file
| | 00:05 | that we have opened in the
background, we just did test movie.
| | 00:07 | What's happening is we are seeing the
first frame of the document and we are
| | 00:12 | not seeing all the other pages flashing by,
because we put a stop action on that first frame.
| | 00:16 | But what we look at over here in the upper
left-hand corner, we have that logo looping.
| | 00:20 | It's animated and just playing over
and over and over again, and let's
| | 00:23 | talk about why that is.
| | 00:24 | Let's close this and what we
have here is our main timeline.
| | 00:28 | Again, we are on Scene 1.
| | 00:29 | There is all the pages that
we brought in from InDesign.
| | 00:32 | That logo animation was on Page 1 inside it.
| | 00:36 | So let's double click on the artwork on
the stage in frame 1 and that takes us
| | 00:40 | inside Spread 1, where
it's got its own timeline.
| | 00:44 | There is that logo
animation as I scrub the playhead.
| | 00:47 | There is that logo coming in.
| | 00:49 | So it turns out that every symbol in
Flash has its own timeline, independent of
| | 00:54 | the main timeline, and that's a really
powerful building block because that lets
| | 00:58 | you do all sorts of things.
| | 00:59 | It lets you have looping
animations that spin in place.
| | 01:03 | Symbols can come in and out of a
particular document, based on when you want them to.
| | 01:08 | But if you don't do anything about it,
the symbols are just going to loop in
| | 01:12 | place, forever and ever and ever.
| | 01:14 | What we need to do is add a little
piece of code at the end of this animation
| | 01:17 | telling it to stop, so it only plays once.
| | 01:20 | To do that, we are going to add
a code layer to this timeline.
| | 01:23 | I'll go ahead and click the New button.
| | 01:25 | We are going to call it ActionScript again.
| | 01:29 | On the last frame, right above the last
frame of the animation, we are going to
| | 01:33 | right-click and we are going to insert
a blank keyframe and put a little piece
| | 01:37 | of ActionScript at the end
of that frame right there.
| | 01:39 | So let's open up our ActionScript
Editor, and let's type in our stop action.
| | 01:43 | Here we go, so there's our little bit of code.
| | 01:45 | Let's go ahead and test our movie again.
| | 01:47 | Command+Enter or Ctrl+Enter.
| | 01:49 | What should happen if we have done
everything right is that logo will animate
| | 01:52 | into position just one time, stop
playing and we are ready to proceed with the
| | 01:57 | rest of our document.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating an invisible button to go to another page| 00:00 | Okay, we are ready to add our
first button to our Digital Magazine.
| | 00:03 | We want to be able to click on this
button here, to take us to Frame 2 where
| | 00:07 | that article is going to be.
| | 00:09 | So let's begin by clicking on our
Buttons layer, and we are going to draw a
| | 00:13 | shape that we want to use as a button.
| | 00:14 | Now I'm not a Flash developer, I don't
really know much ActionScript, I know
| | 00:18 | enough just to be dangerous.
| | 00:18 | So there is, of course, a lot of
different ways to construct the
| | 00:22 | interactivity of this document.
| | 00:23 | I'm just going to show you a really
cheap easy way, just to kind of teach
| | 00:26 | you the concept here.
| | 00:27 | I am going to draw out just a rectangle
around the area that I want to have be
| | 00:33 | clickable, for these to be able to
click on and go to the next page.
| | 00:36 | So we are just drawing a shape here
and it doesn't actually matter what the
| | 00:39 | button looks like, because we are going
to be creating an invisible button that
| | 00:43 | is laid over the artwork that we want
the user to perceive as being a button,
| | 00:47 | but they are actually going to be
clicking on this invisible lay over basically.
| | 00:51 | All right, so I have got this object
selected and we are going to convert it
| | 00:55 | into a button symbol, we do that by
going to the Modify menu and saying Convert
| | 00:58 | to Symbol, and we want this to be a
button, and we are going to give it a
| | 01:01 | generic name of Button.
| | 01:03 | I'm going to go ahead and click OK.
| | 01:06 | Now when I double click on this
button, again it's a movie clip.
| | 01:09 | It's a special type of movie clip, and
when I double click on this button, it is
| | 01:13 | a symbol, but it is a special type of symbol.
| | 01:15 | It's called the Button symbol, and so
when we double click on it, we have a
| | 01:18 | slightly different timeline.
| | 01:20 | Instead of keyframes of animation going
from left to right, we have states of a button.
| | 01:25 | The default is the Up state.
| | 01:26 | There is the Over state, what it
would look like when you rollover it, the
| | 01:29 | Down state when the user clicks on it,
what it would look like when it's down,
| | 01:32 | and then a Hit state.
| | 01:34 | The Hit state is just the area that
defines what's clickable around the button,
| | 01:38 | and it turns out that if you move the
contents of the Up state and drag it over
| | 01:43 | to the Hit state and leave all the
other states empty, you have created what's
| | 01:47 | called an invisible button.
| | 01:49 | So let's go back out of Scene 1,
and we are out to main timeline again.
| | 01:53 | Now what it looks like
is this blue aqua overlay.
| | 01:57 | This is your indication that this is an
invisible button, this will not print,
| | 02:00 | or this will not be included in your output.
| | 02:03 | It's totally invisible at runtime, but
it shows up as this blue overlay so that
| | 02:06 | you can see it as you are designing.
| | 02:08 | Okay, now we need to add some code
that tells the Flash Player that this
| | 02:12 | thing is supposed to be a clickable button that
have to a something when the user clicks on it.
| | 02:17 | So we have our ActionScript layer,
we are going to click on the first
| | 02:20 | frame there, and I'm going to
borrow some code that's written in an
| | 02:22 | external ActionScript file.
| | 02:24 | A buddy of mine wrote this out for me and I'm
just going to copy and paste it. Thank you, Chris.
| | 02:28 | I am going to go ahead and copy this
text, this ActionScript code, take it back
| | 02:33 | to our document over here, and on
the first frame, we'll open up our
| | 02:37 | ActionScript Editor, and we are
going to paste that code in here.
| | 02:40 | Okay, just hit Return after that stop
action on that first frame and just paste this.
| | 02:44 | Just a quick note.
| | 02:45 | If you don't have the exercise files,
you can just pause the video here.
| | 02:48 | I mean you can type this code
into your ActionScript panel.
| | 02:52 | So this is a function that sets up a
listener and a mouse event for this item to
| | 02:57 | be a button and it's
referencing a specific name.
| | 03:00 | So when you create a symbol, a symbol
can actually be used multiple times, and
| | 03:04 | each one of those usages,
if you will, is an instance.
| | 03:08 | Each instance has to have a unique name.
| | 03:11 | So what we need to do is click on
this button that we have got up here,
| | 03:14 | this button object.
| | 03:15 | And then in the Properties panel,
we need to give it a unique name.
| | 03:18 | We are going to call it Button 1, great.
| | 03:19 | Just press Return or Enter to lock that
name in, and now we can go back to our
| | 03:26 | ActionScript Editor and we can see
that this code was already set up for that
| | 03:30 | to be named Button 1.
| | 03:32 | So when Button 1 is pressed, go to
Frame 2, and stop, so I don't actually have
| | 03:38 | to put another stop action on Frame 2.
| | 03:40 | That stop action is implied
here in this Go To action.
| | 03:43 | So when I click on the button that's
going to take the viewer to Frame 2 and
| | 03:47 | stop, so it doesn't keep playing.
| | 03:48 | All right, let's test our movie
and see if it works as expected.
| | 03:53 | Command+Return or Ctrl+Enter and
it's going to export the movie.
| | 03:58 | Takes a second to do so.
| | 03:59 | There our animated logo comes in.
| | 04:01 | It stops in the first frame.
| | 04:02 | When I mouse over this header region up
here, I get a little finger, telling me
| | 04:06 | that it's clickable and when I click
on it, it actually takes me to Frame 2.
| | 04:11 | So now we need to figure out a way for
the user to be able to get back to that
| | 04:14 | main page by clicking on the check logo,
and we'll do that in the next video.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a button to return to the first page| 00:00 | Okay, we successfully added one button
that takes the viewer to Frame 2 in our
| | 00:05 | Digital Magazine, but now we need to
create a Home button, so that no matter
| | 00:08 | where they are in their Digital Magazine,
they can get back to that first page.
| | 00:12 | So, to create a Home button, we are
going to use that check logo and then we are
| | 00:16 | going to go to another frame where
it's not animated, and there it is.
| | 00:19 | We are going to double-click on the
stage to enter inside of this movie clip, so
| | 00:24 | that we can get to this artwork.
| | 00:25 | I'm just holding down the Shift key
and selecting these three elements by
| | 00:29 | Shift-clicking and we are going
to copy them to the clipboard.
| | 00:31 | Edit > Copy and then we'll go back to
the main timeline on Scene 1 and go back
| | 00:36 | to Frame 1, where we want that Home
button to appear on the Buttons layer.
| | 00:40 | So I have clicked on the Buttons layer,
Frame 1 there and we are going to use
| | 00:44 | our handy command, Edit > Paste in
Place, which puts that logo exactly in the
| | 00:49 | same location that we copied it from.
| | 00:52 | Okay, we have got this selected.
| | 00:53 | Let's go ahead and convert this
selection into its own button.
| | 00:57 | I'll go in to Modify > Convert to Symbol.
| | 00:59 | We are going to go and call this homeButton.
| | 01:01 | That will create another button in our library.
| | 01:04 | It's a button type symbol, we'll go
ahead and click OK and now we want to turn
| | 01:08 | it into an invisible button.
| | 01:09 | So we want to enter its timeline.
| | 01:11 | By doing so, we can double-click on
that symbol and see the Hit states and the
| | 01:17 | Over state and the Down state for that button.
| | 01:18 | I am going to drag the keyframe that's
currently in the Up state, over to the
| | 01:22 | Hit state, which is going to
make that an invisible button.
| | 01:25 | We can go back to the main timeline
now and that invisible button again is
| | 01:29 | represented by that blue aqua overlay.
| | 01:31 | Great, so we need to add some code to
this element here, so that at runtime,
| | 01:36 | the Flash Player knows that this is a
clickable button that's supposed to do something.
| | 01:39 | Before we do that, we need to make sure
we give it a unique instance name, we do
| | 01:43 | that by selecting the symbol on the
stage, going to the Properties panel and
| | 01:47 | giving it a label there at the top, where we
are just going to call it, home. Keep it simple.
| | 01:51 | Let's open up our ActionScript Editor
and click on that first keyframe in the
| | 01:54 | ActionScript layer where the rest of
our code is and we are going to just
| | 01:58 | re-purpose some existing code.
| | 02:00 | I'm going to copy that by highlighting
it and copying it, Command+C and we are
| | 02:02 | just going to paste it below
the next set of code there.
| | 02:07 | And anywhere, where we see button1, we
are going to change that to the word,
| | 02:10 | home, to reference that other symbol.
| | 02:13 | So there's three occurrences of that.
| | 02:15 | I'm going to change that to home and
then where it says button1pressed we'll
| | 02:18 | change that to home as well.
| | 02:20 | Important part is where do we want this
button to go and then click on it, and
| | 02:23 | we want it to go to and stop to frame 1. Great!
| | 02:27 | Let's test our movie and see if
we have done everything correctly.
| | 02:30 | Command+Enter on the Mac,
Ctrl+Enter on the Windows.
| | 02:33 | That's going to export that SWF and if
we did everything correctly, we should be
| | 02:38 | able to see the animated logo come in.
| | 02:39 | We have that button to take us to
Frame 2 and now we have a button to take us
| | 02:43 | back to the Home page.
| | 02:44 | So you have successfully completed your round
trip navigational button exercise there. Woohoo!
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating the remaining buttons| 00:00 | Okay, roll up your sleeves.
| | 00:01 | It's time to finish up
wiring up the rest of the buttons.
| | 00:04 | We've got our first button here that
we created that takes us to Frame 2 and
| | 00:07 | then we've got our Home
button to take us back to Page 1.
| | 00:10 | We now need to wire up these other
clickable areas that we want to take the user
| | 00:13 | to other parts of the Digital Magazine.
| | 00:15 | Now, it's actually pretty easy, once
we've got these building blocks in place,
| | 00:18 | I've got this button.
| | 00:19 | Remember it's a symbol, which means it
shows up in the library as a reusable asset.
| | 00:23 | We just can give it a unique instance name
and just re-purpose that existing button.
| | 00:27 | So, we've got the Button layer targeted
and I'm going to go ahead and drag out
| | 00:31 | another instance of the button from the
library, just open up the Library panel,
| | 00:35 | there is the button we created.
| | 00:36 | We are going to drag another copy out
into our stage and I can just kind of
| | 00:39 | position it like so.
| | 00:41 | It's a little bit too big for now,
but we'll scale it in just a minute.
| | 00:43 | I'm going to drag another one and
position it over here on the Gear and we'll
| | 00:47 | position out a third one, put that
there and one more for this area, we want to
| | 00:53 | be able to click on to go to a movie trailer.
| | 00:56 | So, we'll click on that one
as well and drag that out.
| | 00:58 | All right, so it will pan, I'm just
holding on the Spacebar to pan around and I
| | 01:02 | need to just go to the Properties
panel now and we need to scale these
| | 01:05 | appropriately to be the right size
and give them unique instance names.
| | 01:08 | So, we have a Scale tool for that, the
Free Transform tool, and we'll just scale
| | 01:12 | the width down a little bit.
| | 01:14 | Click on this one, scale it down a
little bit narrower, this one is -- well, it
| | 01:17 | looks actually just a little bit tiny
there and then for this one here, I'll
| | 01:22 | make it a little bit wider
and just a little bit taller.
| | 01:26 | Good, so these are just invisible
hot zones if you will and great!
| | 01:32 | Now it's a matter of giving these names,
so that we can address them through code.
| | 01:36 | So, this was button1, stands
to reason this would be button2.
| | 01:39 | So let's go ahead and give it an
instance name of button2, this one we'll make
| | 01:44 | button3, this one here we'll make button4.
| | 01:50 | As you can imagine, get my Spacebar
down, drag that to pan around and we'll
| | 01:55 | make this one button5.
| | 01:56 | Okay, so we want button5 to go to
Frame 3, because that's where the movie
| | 02:01 | trailer page is and these are
going to different frames as well.
| | 02:08 | So, let's select button2 and click
on the ActionScript keyframe in the
| | 02:13 | ActionScript layer and open up our
ActionScript Editor and we can re-purpose our code again.
| | 02:17 | We'll just copy and paste and then
edit the code that needs to be changed.
| | 02:20 | So, we're going to go back up to this
button1 code, copy it to the clip board,
| | 02:24 | hit a couple of Returns there and paste.
| | 02:28 | Anywhere it says button1, we're
going to change that to button2.
| | 02:32 | Third one there and instead of going
to Frame2, we want it to go to the deck
| | 02:39 | article on Frame8, so we'll just
change that frame number to 8. Okay great!
| | 02:43 | We've got button2 wired up and
now it's time to wire up button3.
| | 02:47 | So, we're going to copy that code
there, select it, copy it, press Return a
| | 02:54 | couple of times, scroll down
and we'll go ahead and paste.
| | 02:57 | All right, so anywhere it says button2
now in this set of the code, we're going
| | 03:00 | to change that to button3, we're
going to change that to button3 and change
| | 03:05 | this to button3 as well.
| | 03:08 | When we click on this button, we want
it to go to Frame 7 and do this two more
| | 03:13 | times for button4 and 5.
| | 03:15 | So, I'll just press a
couple of Returns, paste again.
| | 03:18 | This is going to now be
changed to button4, button4, button4.
| | 03:24 | We want button4 to go to Frame 5.
| | 03:28 | One more time, stay with me.
| | 03:30 | This time this is going to be
button5 and I just pasted that code again.
| | 03:36 | We're just replacing the
button2 text to be button5.
| | 03:42 | This time we want it to go to Frame 3, which
is where that movie trailer is going to be.
| | 03:45 | All right, I think we've done it all correctly.
| | 03:48 | Let's go ahead and test our movie again.
| | 03:50 | We'll collapse the Actions Frame panel there.
| | 03:54 | Test movie, Command+Return
or Ctrl+Enter on Windows.
| | 03:57 | Takes a second to export this and let's see
if all our buttons are working as expected.
| | 04:01 | All right, there's the logo animated
and there's that button that takes to that
| | 04:05 | article, click, click, click, back to
the Home page, back to the trailer page.
| | 04:10 | All right, it's all working.
| | 04:12 | So there you have it, very easy way
to create navigation buttons to go to
| | 04:16 | anywhere in the Digital Magazine to
anywhere, back to the Home page and that
| | 04:22 | completes that part of the interactivity.
| | 04:24 | Next video, we're going to talk about
adding an FLV video for the movie trailer.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding a video to the digital magazine| 00:00 | Okay, our last task is to add a video,
so that we can see the video trailer, the
| | 00:05 | movie trailer for the
video that this actor is in.
| | 00:09 | That's going to be on Frame3, so let's
go navigate to Frame3, and you can see
| | 00:12 | there's some placeholder artwork.
| | 00:14 | Right now these button overlays are
kind of distracting, so I'm just going to
| | 00:16 | turn off the visibility of the
Buttons layer, just so we don't have to deal
| | 00:19 | with them right now.
| | 00:20 | We want to edit the contents of Frame3,
so we're going to go ahead and double
| | 00:23 | click on the instance on the stage there,
and we're inside Spread3 now, and we
| | 00:28 | want to get rid of this placeholder
artwork that was just what the designer had
| | 00:31 | put in the InDesign file that
communicated that's where the video goes.
| | 00:34 | I'm going to go ahead and drag
select through all that artwork.
| | 00:38 | What that also does, get a kind
of greenish teal background there.
| | 00:42 | So I'm going to Shift-click on that
background to deselect that and then I'll
| | 00:45 | just hit the Delete key, so that
placeholder artwork is now all gone.
| | 00:49 | Now, it's just a matter of importing
that video to the stage, and choosing a
| | 00:53 | player skin for it and setting some options.
| | 00:56 | So let's go do that.
| | 00:56 | Go to File > Import > Import Video.
| | 00:59 | It says where do you want
your video to come from?
| | 01:02 | We're just going to bring this
from a local file on our disk.
| | 01:05 | So we're going to click the Browse
button, and in the Media folder in my
| | 01:09 | Exercise Files, I've got the video
trailer already converted to FLV.
| | 01:13 | I'm going to go ahead and click Open,
and it gives you a bunch of information
| | 01:16 | here that we can skip for now, but if
your video isn't already in FLV format,
| | 01:20 | you can launch the Adobe Media
Encoder to re-encode it to FLV.
| | 01:23 | I'm going to go ahead and click
Continue, and it says okay, what kind of a
| | 01:27 | controller do you want to
have to play your video?
| | 01:31 | I like the skin all over, no caption version.
| | 01:34 | This gives you a set of controls.
| | 01:36 | Play, Stop, Fast Forward, Rewind, a Volume
Control, as well as a Full Screen option.
| | 01:43 | You can actually change the
color of your skin as well.
| | 01:45 | So if you want it to be tinted a
certain color, you can do that.
| | 01:48 | I'm going to go back to this nice medium
gray, and I'm going to go ahead and hit
| | 01:52 | Continue, gives you a nice summery of
what choices you've made, tells you where
| | 01:55 | the file came in from, what kind of
component you've added that it's going to
| | 01:59 | add it to your directory, and needs
to be deployed with your final SWF.
| | 02:02 | So you can read it on your own, but
it gives you a nice little summery of
| | 02:06 | what you've just done.
| | 02:07 | I'm going to go ahead and click the
Finish button, and it's going to go and grab
| | 02:10 | that video file, compile that skin
component and bring that in as well, and then
| | 02:16 | I can position it where I want on my stage here.
| | 02:19 | Couple of things, we want to take a
look at the Component Inspector, this skin,
| | 02:23 | this component was built and it was
provided by Flash that got installed when
| | 02:28 | you installed Flash Professional.
| | 02:30 | It has some default behaviors,
but you can actually change those.
| | 02:32 | To do that, you go on to the Window menu
and you choose Component Inspector, and
| | 02:36 | with that movie, that video selected,
you can see the attributes that are
| | 02:40 | currently assigned to that
video playback component.
| | 02:42 | I don't want it to autoplay, so I'm
going to change Autoplay from True to False,
| | 02:47 | and I want the skin to Autohide.
| | 02:51 | So when I mouse off the movie, and after
a few seconds I want the controls to go
| | 02:55 | away, and when I mouse over the video,
I want the controls to appear, so that I
| | 02:59 | can change that behavior there as well.
| | 03:01 | I've edited those attributes.
| | 03:03 | Let's test our work.
| | 03:04 | Let's go ahead and test our movie,
Command+Return or Ctrl+Enter on Windows, and
| | 03:08 | let's see if we did this correctly.
| | 03:10 | It will build that our movie, okay,
there's our navigation still working, the
| | 03:14 | animated logo worked, to access back
to the Homepage, there's the link to the
| | 03:18 | page that has the trailer
on it. There's our video.
| | 03:21 | When we mouse over it, the controller appears.
| | 03:23 | I can click the Play button and viola!
| | 03:26 | There's the video, yes yes!
| | 03:29 | I'm going to go ahead and pause
that, go back to the Homepage, and we
| | 03:32 | successfully completed our
version of the Digital Magazine.
| | 03:36 | Pretty easy to do, fun stuff, in the
next video, I'm going to show you what
| | 03:40 | a real developer could do to take
this InDesign layout and truly make it
| | 03:44 | really interactive.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exploring the final "developer" version of the digital magazine| 00:00 | So if you've made it this far, this is
the final video in this chapter, and this
| | 00:04 | is an example of with a little bit more
time and a little bit more experience in
| | 00:07 | ActionScript, what you can truly do to
bring content from InDesign into Flash,
| | 00:12 | and make a very highly interactive
digital magazine or digital document.
| | 00:16 | So, here I've got all these mouse-over
effects, I could zoom in, and scaling
| | 00:20 | effects as I mouse over.
| | 00:22 | When I click, I get an animated
transition, an animated intro into that layout.
| | 00:27 | When I click on a different button, again I
get animated intros from layout to layout.
| | 00:31 | I've got a little page browser component here.
| | 00:33 | I can click on to jump
from page to page that way.
| | 00:36 | So all nice there, just a little bit more
polished than the example we were showing.
| | 00:42 | This is quite a bit of a work though.
| | 00:43 | You'd have to have a quite a few more
ActionScript jobs than what we were showing.
| | 00:48 | Here's a little button to add
sure to that cart, and some of the
| | 00:52 | navigation elements there.
| | 00:56 | Pause the video there.
| | 00:57 | I just want to give you a taste of
how far you could take it if you're
| | 01:01 | willing to spend some time or at least
partner with someone who knows how to
| | 01:03 | write ActionScript.
| | 01:04 | If you are a premium subscriber, you
actually have access to this source
| | 01:09 | file, the FLV that was used to
create this final SWF, so you can actually
| | 01:14 | tease it apart, and deconstruct it
and take a look at how they did some of
| | 01:17 | the special advanced effects.
| | 01:20 | Goal of this chapter though was to
get you inspired to see how you can use
| | 01:23 | InDesign as a layout tool to layout
interactive content for further refinement
| | 01:28 | and work inside Flash CS4 Professional.
| | 01:30 | So hopefully you feel we've
accomplished that goal, and I hope you leave this
| | 01:34 | chapter inspired to do more.
| | 01:36 | If you're new to Flash, I encourage
you to check out the Flash CS4 essential
| | 01:39 | training title available in the Online
Training Library, and that will help you
| | 01:43 | get on your way to doing more
advanced things using Flash CS4 Professional.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
9. InDesign to Flash Production TipsThe Combine Textfields extension| 00:00 | I want to take a few minutes to go into
a little bit more detail on what happens
| | 00:03 | when you use Text, when you
go from InDesign to Flash.
| | 00:07 | The reality is that the two
applications use two different text engines.
| | 00:11 | InDesign has its own text engine, and
of course Flash authoring is using the
| | 00:15 | text engine found on the Flash player.
| | 00:17 | The two are not the same, so you can
get InDesign like text when you go from
| | 00:21 | InDesign to Flash, but what's
happening behind the scenes is that InDesign is
| | 00:26 | making sure that it preserves
the appearance of your layout.
| | 00:29 | In order to do that, it sometimes has
to breakup your text into multiple text
| | 00:34 | frames, to make sure that the
position of the characters does not change
| | 00:37 | between applications.
| | 00:38 | Let me give you an example of this.
| | 00:40 | So here we have two different
paragraphs, or two different text frames with
| | 00:43 | two paragraphs each.
| | 00:44 | This text here of course
is a Bold Myriad Pro Bold.
| | 00:47 | This is Myriad Pro Regular.
| | 00:49 | Same here, except this text has unique color.
| | 00:52 | Let's go ahead and export to this XFL.
| | 00:54 | File > Export > Adobe Flash CS4 Pro (XFL)
combined text to XFL. It's great.
| | 01:00 | Go ahead and save that.
| | 01:01 | Now we are going to go with the
InDesign text a Flash text, and what we are
| | 01:04 | saying here when we make this choice
is do everything you can to write out an
| | 01:10 | XFL file that preserves the exact
position of these characters as I have laid
| | 01:14 | them out in InDesign, but if
something needs to happen in order for you to
| | 01:17 | preserve that appearance,
you can go ahead and do that.
| | 01:20 | So if you have to rasterize certain
characters or convert them to outlines, go
| | 01:24 | ahead and do that as long as you
don't adjust the appearance there.
| | 01:27 | Let's go ahead and click OK and we'll
switch over to Flash here and open up that
| | 01:31 | file, Combine_Text.xfl.
| | 01:33 | There is the two paragraphs that zoom
up real quick, and we'll dive into the
| | 01:37 | symbol by double clicking.
| | 01:39 | Once we do this and then if we start clicking
on these text frames, you will see what I mean.
| | 01:44 | This is very similar, if you have
ever opened up a PDF inside Illustrator,
| | 01:48 | you will see that paragraphs get broken up
in the multiple text frames there as well.
| | 01:52 | So every line in a paragraph
becomes at least one text frame.
| | 01:56 | In the case where there is mixed
attributes, InDesign will break that up
| | 02:00 | even further, and create a unique
text frame for that different run of
| | 02:05 | character attributes.
| | 02:06 | So I have a text frame here, and text
frame here, text frame here and so forth.
| | 02:10 | Now, if you don't need to
edit the text, you are fine.
| | 02:13 | The text looks identical
as it did inside InDesign.
| | 02:15 | The layout has been preserved.
| | 02:17 | But if you need to do a late stage
edit that of course can be a little
| | 02:21 | problematic, because then you are
having to deal with multiple text frames.
| | 02:25 | Fortunately there is a little
extension that an external person created, his
| | 02:29 | name is Justin, and he has a
website called Ajar Productions.
| | 02:33 | Let's jump out over to our browser,
and I'll just do a Google search for Ajar
| | 02:38 | Productions combined text.
| | 02:42 | He wrote an extension for
Flash and there is the link.
| | 02:46 | You will find it in a
second, search results there.
| | 02:48 | That will take you to his blog, and Justin
Putney has created this little extension.
| | 02:53 | It's free.
| | 02:54 | You can download it.
| | 02:55 | It creates a sort of file
that you save to your desktop.
| | 02:58 | You just double-click on it, and it
installs a new menu command inside Flash
| | 03:01 | called the Combined Text Fields Command.
| | 03:03 | We are going to go see this an action,
I have already installed it in my
| | 03:06 | version of Flash here.
| | 03:07 | It's found under the Commands menu.
| | 03:09 | It's called Combined Text Fields, and
this is going to make it a lot easier.
| | 03:12 | If you do need to go back and edit a
range of text, it's easier to combine that
| | 03:17 | into a single text frame
before you do that text edit.
| | 03:19 | One other little thing that I pay
attention to is that there is a cross platform
| | 03:24 | difference on the use of Bold.
| | 03:26 | This was Myriad Pro Bold and when you open
this on the Mac it actually gets tagged twice.
| | 03:31 | One, to use Myriad Bold typeface, but it
also flags it with the Faux Bold style.
| | 03:38 | This is something you don't see on Windows.
| | 03:39 | So if you are Windows user, you
don't really need to worry about what I'm
| | 03:42 | showing you, but if it comes in by
using a bold font in a font family, you
| | 03:47 | may just want to check to make sure
under the text menu, under Style, Faux
| | 03:51 | Bold is not checked.
| | 03:52 | If it is, just uncheck it, and you will
see that it gets it back to the way it
| | 03:55 | is supposed to be, same thing here,
so Style, Faux Bold will turn that off.
| | 03:59 | I am going to select all four of
these text frames and we are going to use
| | 04:03 | Justin's cool command called Combined
Text Fields, and it says okay, how do you
| | 04:07 | want me to sort these selected items,
I'm going to do it from the top, and at
| | 04:11 | the end of every text frame, I want you
to preserve the line breaks by putting
| | 04:14 | the soft Return there.
| | 04:16 | So he has got this little code here, so
backslash n. I'm going to go ahead and
| | 04:19 | click OK, and now I'm left with one text
frame where I can edit that text a lot easier.
| | 04:24 | The line spacing did change a little bit,
but that's okay, I can fix that very easily.
| | 04:28 | In the Properties panel, under the
Paragraph section, I have got a line spacing
| | 04:33 | control here, and these are actually
scrubby sliders, so I can just click on
| | 04:35 | the number and drag to the left or right
to get aligns facing back to the way it was.
| | 04:40 | So if you do need to edit the
text once you have brought it in from
| | 04:43 | InDesign into Flash Professional, I
highly recommend you get the Combine
| | 04:47 | Textfields extension. It's free.
| | 04:49 | You can just double-click to install it
after you've downloaded it, and it makes
| | 04:53 | it a lot easier to deal with this
type of edits in late stage production.
| | 04:56 | Let's do it on this one.
| | 04:58 | This one is a little bit trickier,
just because there is this text frame in
| | 05:01 | the middle of a run.
| | 05:02 | It's breaking up this row into
multiple text frames, but it still makes short
| | 05:05 | work of it.
| | 05:07 | Commands, Combined Text Fields, again,
Soft Return, go ahead and click OK, and
| | 05:12 | so what we'll do here is we'll just
delete these soft Returns for that line
| | 05:16 | there, so we get that back into one line.
| | 05:19 | Great, so there it is and again, if I
want to reset the line spacing, I can go
| | 05:23 | to the Paragraph section of the
Properties panel, and adjust the line spacing
| | 05:26 | there, back to where it was.
| | 05:28 | So now I can go ahead and edit my text.
| | 05:29 | So thank you Justin Putney very much,
nice free extension that makes editing
| | 05:34 | text from InDesign once it is
brought into the Flash, a lot of easier.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Avoid ligatures if you want to edit text later in Flash| 00:00 | One additional point I want to make
about typography going from InDesign to
| | 00:04 | Flash, something that might get in your
way and it's best to know about upfront,
| | 00:07 | and that's the use of ligatures.
| | 00:09 | InDesign is primarily a print layout
tool, but it's morphing over time to
| | 00:13 | becoming a layout tool for pretty much
any medium, as kind of evidence by this
| | 00:17 | course, where you are
creating all these digital document.
| | 00:18 | But one of the features that's
turned on by default is Automatic Ligature
| | 00:23 | Replacement, so if you look at this text
frame here, and then you take a look at
| | 00:26 | the word fish and the word flapping
and the word flashing, it's automatically
| | 00:31 | replaced the fi character.
| | 00:33 | Here's the same text frame
with Ligatures turned on.
| | 00:36 | It has turned the two individual fi
characters into a single appearing fi.
| | 00:41 | That's called a ligature,
combining the f and the i characters.
| | 00:44 | When I click on this text frame with my
text tool, let's press T for text, and
| | 00:47 | then go to the flyout menu for the
Control panel here, you can see the Automatic
| | 00:52 | Ligatures feature has been turned on.
| | 00:54 | That is actually on by default.
| | 00:55 | So every text frame that you create in
InDesign, if you don't change this, gets
| | 00:59 | this Automatic Ligature behavior.
| | 01:01 | If I turn it off, you will see that
it coverts that fi back into individual
| | 01:05 | characters, so I'm going to
go back and turn that back on.
| | 01:09 | Let's export this to XFL and figure
out how Flash is going to deal with this.
| | 01:14 | We'll go ahead and do Command+E or Ctrl+E
to export, Ligatures.xfl, and that is great.
| | 01:20 | Go ahead and save it with
InDesign text to Flash text.
| | 01:22 | Go ahead and use the default here.
| | 01:24 | I'm going to go over to
Flash and open that file.
| | 01:28 | There it is, Ligatures.xfl, and the
appearance looks identical that's great.
| | 01:33 | The ligature has been supported.
| | 01:34 | It looks wonderful, there's the two
different versions one with Ligature turned
| | 01:38 | off, one with Ligatures turned on, and
if all you care about is the appearance,
| | 01:43 | then you have nothing to worry about.
| | 01:44 | But if you think you might need to
reserve the right or reserve the ability to
| | 01:50 | edit this text after the fact, after you
have brought into Flash, you might want
| | 01:54 | to give some pause to the Auto
Ligature feature, and here is why.
| | 01:57 | When I dive into this movie clip and
actually take a look at this individual
| | 02:00 | text frames, you will see that this is
indeed a text frame, but ligatures are
| | 02:06 | not supported by the Flash Player, so
in order to preserve the layout from
| | 02:10 | InDesign precisely, InDesign
converts the ligature into vector paths to
| | 02:15 | guarantee that the line breaks are in
the exact same location and the appearance
| | 02:19 | does not get altered.
| | 02:21 | That's what that means.
| | 02:22 | When you choose InDesign text, it
preserves as much of the edibility as
| | 02:26 | possible, but it always awaits towards
preserving the layout as you designed it in InDesign.
| | 02:31 | So again, if all you care about is the
appearance, you don't worry about having
| | 02:35 | to edit that text once it
is in Flash. You are fine.
| | 02:37 | Don't worry about it, but if you do
want to maintain edibility then I recommend
| | 02:42 | that you turn off that
Ligatures checkbox for the text frames.
| | 02:46 | If we jump back over to InDesign, again,
what you find that is with a text tool
| | 02:51 | active on selected text frame, you
can go to the flyout menu of the Control
| | 02:55 | panel and turn off Ligatures.
| | 02:58 | This is something that you can actually
turn off as a application default or a
| | 03:02 | document default with nothing selected,
just have no text frame selected here.
| | 03:07 | Let's go ahead and delete this one.
| | 03:09 | With no text frame selected, if you go
get your text tool and from the flyout
| | 03:13 | menu turn off Ligatures, every new text
frame you create from this point on in
| | 03:18 | this document will not use ligatures.
| | 03:20 | If I type fi there, let's go
ahead and make that text bigger.
| | 03:24 | You can see I'm not getting the
automatic replacement for the fi ligature.
| | 03:28 | Same thing with fl.
| | 03:29 | If I type Flash, it's not
replacing those characters.
| | 03:32 | So if you are using InDesign for both
print and digital documents, you may not
| | 03:36 | want to turn the Ligature feature off
all together, but maybe just for the
| | 03:40 | document you are using
to create digital content.
| | 03:43 | Okay there is my little warning about
ligatures, and use them with caution
| | 03:48 | depending on what your end goal is.
| | 03:49 | If all you care about is appearance,
you are not going to edit this text
| | 03:52 | inside Flash, no worries.
| | 03:53 | If you want to have that text
remain editable, including the ligatures,
| | 03:57 | turn that feature off.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using JPEG pass-through for better image quality| 00:00 | When you are working with images in
InDesign and going to export either a SWF
| | 00:03 | file or an XFL file, InDesign assumes
that your images need to be 72 dpi in
| | 00:10 | those final output formats, because
you are rendering a Flash file, Flash
| | 00:14 | assumes that your image
resolution is 72 as well.
| | 00:17 | So here I have two images, they are
both JPEGs .One has been placed at its
| | 00:22 | original size, with quite large.
| | 00:24 | It has been scaled down to
15% of its original size.
| | 00:28 | And this JPEG here has actually been
re-sampled in Photoshop to 15% of its
| | 00:33 | original size and saved as a separate file.
| | 00:35 | The point I'm trying to make is that
InDesign does a fairly decent job of
| | 00:39 | re-sampling, but Photoshop does
a much better job of re-sampling.
| | 00:42 | We are going to go ahead and
export this to SWF and show you the
| | 00:45 | different results here.
| | 00:46 | I'm going to go ahead and do a File,
Export, and from our file format we'll
| | 00:51 | choose SWF, and we'll just
call it Test.swf. That's fine.
| | 00:55 | From our JPEG quality slider or pop-up
menu here, we are going to go ahead and
| | 00:59 | choose the maximum value, and know
that the results will only get worse if we
| | 01:03 | choose a lower quality.
| | 01:05 | So make the image go out as
JPEGs, JPEG quality maximum.
| | 01:09 | We are going to go ahead and click OK.
| | 01:10 | So that opens up the result, and in the
browser we can see the differences, and
| | 01:14 | hopefully in the video that you are
watching here, you can tell right away the
| | 01:18 | difference between the one on
the left, and the one on the right.
| | 01:21 | What's going on here is that InDesign
is basically re-sampling the placed image
| | 01:26 | that was scaled down to 15%, and it
is re-sampling from the preview version
| | 01:31 | that's in the document.
| | 01:32 | So it's a much softer image.
| | 01:34 | I mean it's fine if you are just going
to do a prototype or a low resolution
| | 01:38 | screen presentation or something like that.
| | 01:39 | But when you really care about
image quality, here is the tip.
| | 01:42 | You want to take advantage of
kind of an undocumented feature.
| | 01:45 | It's called JPEG pass-through, and what
that means is if you bring in a JPEG at
| | 01:51 | the actual size you intend to use it in,
inside InDesign, then when you export
| | 01:55 | it to XFL or to SWF, it will go
through those file formats untouched.
| | 02:01 | That goes out exactly the way it came in.
| | 02:03 | So you can see this image here on the right,
it has not been re-sampled or re-compressed.
| | 02:07 | It just passed right on through
untouched, and hopefully you can see the one on
| | 02:11 | the right looks a lot
better than the one on the left.
| | 02:15 | So the moral of the story is when you
absolutely care about image quality, bring
| | 02:18 | the images into InDesign at their
final dimensions, the resolution 72 and the
| | 02:23 | pixel dimensions that you intend to use them in.
| | 02:25 | Don't scale the images inside InDesign.
| | 02:28 | Now, that's not always practical.
| | 02:30 | Sometimes you place an image, and you
have no idea how big you are going to use it.
| | 02:33 | You just resize it freely inside InDesign.
| | 02:36 | That's actually okay, once you know how
big you want to use your file -- so in
| | 02:40 | this case here, this is how big I have made it.
| | 02:42 | Here's a nice little trick you can do
to re-sample the image very quickly, and
| | 02:46 | get it to the actual output
size, and get better results.
| | 02:50 | The trick is to know how
much you have scaled this image.
| | 02:52 | If you double click on it with the
Selection tool, and then click one more time.
| | 02:56 | It will actually select the content
inside that frame, and the Control panel
| | 03:01 | will tell you how much you have scaled this.
| | 03:03 | It has been scaled down to 15%. Great.
| | 03:05 | That's useful information.
| | 03:05 | We are going to remember that.
| | 03:06 | What we are going to do is just go
ahead and select the frame again.
| | 03:10 | I'm going to hold down the Option key
on the Mac or the Alt key on Windows, and
| | 03:14 | we are going to Edit Original.
| | 03:15 | Option+Double-click or Alt+Double-click
will open up this image inside
| | 03:18 | Photoshop, if Photoshop is
your default editor for JPEGs.
| | 03:23 | If you are on a Mac, and you end up
opening Apple Preview, let's just take
| | 03:26 | a brief detour here.
| | 03:28 | You can always right-click on the
image and say Edit With, and then you can
| | 03:32 | choose Photoshop directly
instead of Apple Preview.
| | 03:35 | On my machine, JPEGs are set to be
edited with Photoshop, so I'm going to
| | 03:38 | hold down the Option key, and double click on
this to pop that image open inside Photoshop.
| | 03:43 | You can see it is 33% view, because it's
a pretty large file to fit on screen here.
| | 03:47 | We are going to Image > Image Size, and
here is the trick well you remember the
| | 03:51 | 15% value that we saw inside InDesign.
| | 03:53 | Change the document size from inches to percent.
| | 03:57 | Make sure the resolution is 72, you
have got Re-sample turned on and then
| | 04:01 | Bicubic Sharper for best results,
that's the one you want for down
| | 04:04 | sampling images for the web.
| | 04:06 | And then you just type in the same
percentage that you saw inside InDesign.
| | 04:09 | So, in this case it is 15%.
| | 04:11 | This is going to do a much
better job of re-sampling that down.
| | 04:14 | Let's view it at 100%, Command+1, Ctrl+1
on Windows, and you can see that looks
| | 04:19 | exactly like that one I'd
done earlier inside InDesign.
| | 04:22 | Let's save it, close it, come back to InDesign.
| | 04:25 | It will automatically update, and
now the two images look identical, the
| | 04:28 | left and the right.
| | 04:30 | So there you have it, take advantage
of JPEG pass-through when you care about
| | 04:34 | the image quality, use Photoshop as
the better image editor, down sample the
| | 04:39 | image to the dimensions and size that
you want to use it at, at a resolution of
| | 04:43 | 72 when you place that file inside InDesign.
| | 04:46 | As long as you don't touch it, you
don't scale it or add a drop-shadow to it or
| | 04:50 | do anything to it, that's going
to cause it to be re-rendered.
| | 04:53 | It will go out of InDesign
exactly the way that it came in.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
ConclusionGoodbye| 00:00 | Woo-hoo!
| | 00:01 | Congratulations, you made it through InDesign
CS4, Interactive documents and Presentations.
| | 00:06 | As you can see, I have been working hard.
| | 00:07 | My voice is starting to crack a little bit.
| | 00:10 | I hope that you have been inspired.
| | 00:11 | If you consider yourself a traditional
print designer, I hope we have expanded
| | 00:14 | your horizons and you can start to
think about what it might mean to create
| | 00:18 | digital documents in
addition to print documents.
| | 00:21 | Hope you enjoyed the title, feel free to
come back and watch it again and again,
| | 00:24 | and check out other titles of
course in the Online Training Library.
| | 00:28 | If you want to dabble a little bit in
Flash, now that you have kind of seen what
| | 00:31 | the possibilities are, go check
out Flash CS4 Central Training.
| | 00:34 | Thank you, and I hope you had a good time.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
